22.10.2014 Views

a-safety-2005vol1 1..117 - University of South Africa

a-safety-2005vol1 1..117 - University of South Africa

a-safety-2005vol1 1..117 - University of South Africa

SHOW MORE
SHOW LESS

Create successful ePaper yourself

Turn your PDF publications into a flip-book with our unique Google optimized e-Paper software.

<strong>Africa</strong>n Safety Promotion<br />

A Journal <strong>of</strong> Injury and Violence Prevention<br />

JOURNAL AIMS AND SCOPE<br />

<strong>Africa</strong>n Safety Promotion: A Journal <strong>of</strong> Injury and Violence Prevention<br />

(ASP) is a forum for discussion and constructive debate among<br />

academics, policy-makers and practitioners active in the field <strong>of</strong> injury<br />

prevention and <strong>safety</strong> promotion. ASP seeks to promote research and<br />

dialogue around a central public health issue that affects <strong>Africa</strong>, namely<br />

injury and violence.<br />

SUBJECT COVERAGE<br />

Issues <strong>of</strong> the ASP's predecessor, the Institute for Social and Health<br />

Science's Monograph Series, addressed a variety <strong>of</strong> injury and<br />

violence related topics, such as:<br />

. injury surveillance methodologies<br />

. costing techniques<br />

. epidemiological research findings<br />

. health systems research<br />

. risks and resiliences associated with violence and injuries in low- to -<br />

middle income contexts<br />

. best practices for injury prevention and containment interventions<br />

ASP is administered by the Unisa Institute for Social and Health<br />

Sciences, and the Presidential Crime, Violence and Injury Lead<br />

Programme. The Crime, Violence and Injury Lead Programme was<br />

established in October 2001 and is jointly managed and developed by<br />

the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Medical Research Council (MRC) and the UNISA<br />

Institute for Social and Health Sciences (ISHS). The brief <strong>of</strong> this<br />

Programme is to contribute to injury prevention and <strong>safety</strong> promotion in<br />

<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> and more widely in <strong>Africa</strong>. The Programme thus seeks to<br />

contribute to and promote the continent's health status, <strong>safety</strong>, and<br />

quality <strong>of</strong> life, specifically through multidisciplinary public-healthorientated<br />

research aimed at preventing death, disability and suffering<br />

arising from crime, violence and unintentional injury.<br />

ASP seeks to promote multidisciplinary research and dialogue about<br />

injury and violence on the continent. The journal publishes on a<br />

spectrum <strong>of</strong> topics <strong>of</strong> interest to researchers, practitioners and policy<br />

makers in the injury and violence prevention sector. The ASP is an<br />

accredited <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Post Secondary Education (SAPSE) journal.<br />

All articles in the journal are subject to peer review. ASP is published<br />

biannually and features original full-length articles, theoretical papers,<br />

reviews, and short communications.<br />

EDITOR-IN-CHIEF<br />

Mohamed Seedat, MRC-Unisa Crime, Violence and Injury Lead<br />

Programme, and <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong><br />

ISSUE EDITORS<br />

Mohamed Seedat, MRC-Unisa Crime, Violence and Injury Lead<br />

Programme and <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong><br />

Shahnaaz Suffla, <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> the Western Cape<br />

Lu-Anne Swart, <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, Institute for Social and<br />

Health Sciences<br />

EDITORIAL ASSISTANT<br />

Victor Peteke, <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong><br />

EDITORIAL COMMITTEE<br />

Richard Matzopoulos, Medical Research Council<br />

Garth Stevens, <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong><br />

Shahnaaz Suffla, <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> the Western Cape<br />

Martin Terre Blanche, <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong><br />

Ashley van Niekerk, Medical Research Council<br />

EDITORIAL BOARD<br />

Mahomed Dada, forensic pathologist, Vereeniging<br />

Samuel Forjuoh, Texas Agricultural & Mechanical <strong>University</strong><br />

Olive Kobusingye, Ugandan Injury Control Centre<br />

Dinesh Mohan, Indian Institute <strong>of</strong> Technology<br />

Wilson Odero, Moi <strong>University</strong><br />

Babatunde Solagberu, <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> Irolin<br />

SUBSCRIPTION FEE<br />

ZAR 250 per individual subscription<br />

ZAR 500 per group or organisational subscription<br />

US$ 150 per international subscription<br />

Account and Payment Details: The payment must be made in favour<br />

<strong>of</strong>: Unisa ISHS/CPA; Bank Account: ABSA (Sunnyside, Pretoria, <strong>South</strong><br />

<strong>Africa</strong>, Branch Code, 334545 Account Number 010000114)<br />

Contact Details: Ms Lyndsey Lourie, <strong>Africa</strong>n Safety Promotion: A<br />

Journal <strong>of</strong> Injury and Violence Prevention, PO Box 1087, Lenasia 1820,<br />

<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>. Tel: +27+11 857-1142. Fax: +27+11 857-1770.<br />

Email: lourilc@unisa.ac.za<br />

Copyright # 2005 <strong>Africa</strong>n Safety Promotion: A Journal <strong>of</strong> Injury and<br />

Violence Prevention.<br />

All rights reserved. No part <strong>of</strong> this publication may be reproduced,<br />

stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form, or by any<br />

means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise,<br />

without the prior permission <strong>of</strong> the copyright owners.<br />

ISSN: 1728-774X<br />

Publisher: Published on behalf <strong>of</strong> the UNISA Institute for Social and<br />

Health Sciences, the MRC-UNISA Crime, Violence and Injury Lead<br />

Programme and the Injury Prevention Initiative for <strong>Africa</strong> (IPIFA).<br />

Disclaimer: The development, preparation, and publication <strong>of</strong> this work<br />

has been undertaken with great care. However, the publisher and<br />

editors <strong>of</strong> the <strong>Africa</strong>n Safety Promotion: A Journal <strong>of</strong> Injury and<br />

Violence Prevention are not responsible for any errors herein or for the<br />

consequences that may ensue from the use <strong>of</strong> materials or information<br />

contained in this work. Opinions expressed by the authors(s) are not<br />

necessarily those <strong>of</strong> the publisher and editors <strong>of</strong> the journal.


<strong>Africa</strong>n Safety Promotion<br />

A Journal <strong>of</strong> Injury<br />

and Violence Prevention<br />

Vol 3, No 1 2005<br />

CONTENTS<br />

EDITORIAL<br />

Building cultures <strong>of</strong> peace: Contextual and discursive considerations<br />

Mohamed Seedat and Shahnaaz Suffla 1<br />

ORIGINAL CONTRIBUTIONS<br />

Understanding collective violence in apartheid and post-apartheid <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong><br />

Norman Duncan 5<br />

Truth, confessions and reparations: : Lessons from the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Truth<br />

and Reconciliation Commission<br />

Garth Stevens 23<br />

Non-violent conflict resolution and peacebuilding in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong><br />

Martin Terre Blanche 40<br />

Conflict, Reconciliation and Peacebuilding in the North-East region <strong>of</strong> India<br />

Rei Vashum 52<br />

Conflict management in the Indian subcontinent: The dimensions <strong>of</strong> Hindu-Muslim conflict<br />

Iqbal A. Ansari 63<br />

i


SHORT RESEARCH REPORTS<br />

Reflections on Truth and Reconciliation<br />

Hiren Gohain 76<br />

Caste and Class Violence in Central Bihar: Restructuring Social Order Towards Reconciliation<br />

Prakash Louis 83<br />

Satyagraha in Creative Society<br />

Manoranjan Mohanty 87<br />

SHORT COMMUNICATIONS<br />

International Collaborative Effort on Injury Statistics Meeting, 1-2 June 2005,<br />

Cuernavaca, Mexico<br />

Richard Matzopoulos 90<br />

Injury Prevention and Safety Promotion events held under the auspices <strong>of</strong> the<br />

Injury Prevention Initiative for <strong>Africa</strong>, 3-10 July 2005, Port-Said, Egypt<br />

Fatma Hassan, Wilson Odero and Ashley Van Niekerk 92<br />

Abstracts 95<br />

Call for submissions 106<br />

Contents <strong>of</strong> previous issues <strong>of</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Safety Promotion:<br />

A Journal <strong>of</strong> Injury and Violence Prevention<br />

109<br />

Order form 114<br />

ii


Editorial<br />

BUILDING CULTURES OF PEACE:<br />

CONTEXTUAL AND DISCURSIVE<br />

CONSIDERATIONS<br />

Mohamed Seedat 1<br />

Institute for Social and Health Sciences, <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong><br />

Shahnaaz Suffla<br />

Institute for Counselling, <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> the Western Cape<br />

At a structural level, the history <strong>of</strong> at least the last five centuries suggests that violence is an inherent<br />

feature <strong>of</strong> governance and management <strong>of</strong> geopolitical configurations including empires, monarchies<br />

and nation states, and to the quest for freedom from physical, intellectual and cultural occupation.<br />

Between the 16th and 20th centuries an estimated total <strong>of</strong> 143.8 million people were killed due to<br />

violent conflicts (Sivard, 1991; Sivard, 1996; Zwi, Garfield & Loretti, 2002). Of these at least 6 million<br />

people were killed in the slave trade, and 10 million indigenous Americans were killed by European<br />

colonialists. Of the estimated 1.6 million people who died as a consequence <strong>of</strong> interpersonal, selfinflicted<br />

or collective acts <strong>of</strong> violence in 2000, estimates suggest that approximately 310 000 people<br />

died from war-related injuries, varying according to region and levels <strong>of</strong> economic development<br />

(Krug, Dahlberg, Mercy, Zwi & Lozano, 2002). The World Health Organization (WHO) <strong>Africa</strong>n region<br />

recorded the highest rates <strong>of</strong> war-related deaths at 32 deaths per 100 000 population, followed by 8.2<br />

per 100 000 for the Eastern Mediterranean region, 7.6 per 100 000 for the European region, and 4.4<br />

per 100 000 for the low-middle income (LMIC) <strong>South</strong>-East Asian region. Whereas the overall rate for<br />

high-income countries is 1 per 100 000, the rate for LMICs is 6.2 per 100.000. For the WHO <strong>Africa</strong>n<br />

region war, alongside various communicable diseases (e.g. HIV/AIDS, tuberculosis) and noncommunicable<br />

diseases (e.g. ischaemic heart disease), is among the top 15 leading causes <strong>of</strong> death.<br />

Thus, when world history is read alongside injury and war mortality statistics, these may well<br />

corroborate the determinist view that violence is both necessary and intrinsic to human nature and<br />

societies' interpersonal and collective affairs.<br />

ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ<br />

1. Please direct all correspondence to Mohamed Seedat, Institute for Social and Health Sciences, <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, P.O. Box 1087, Lenasia, 1820,<br />

Johannesburg, <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>; Tel: +27 11 857 1142; Fax: +27 11 857 1770; E-mail: seedama@unisa.ac.za<br />

1


In stark contrast, a number <strong>of</strong> voices consciously contest the idea that war and collective violence,<br />

like other forms <strong>of</strong> violence, are necessary and an inevitable result <strong>of</strong> human nature and governance.<br />

Such voices include the World Report on Violence and Health (Krug et al., 2002), various United<br />

Nations declarations on peacekeeping, the peace psychology and <strong>safety</strong> promotion fraternities and<br />

faith-based groups (e.g. Catholic Bishops Conference, Psychologists for Social Responsibility),<br />

scholars and activists (e.g. Christie, Wagner & Winter, 2001; Crow, 2001; Khan, 2001; Noorani,<br />

2002). Despite their ideological and epistemological diversity, for the voices <strong>of</strong> peace and <strong>safety</strong><br />

violence is both predictable and preventable, and therefore its feasibility and utility as an instrument<br />

<strong>of</strong> social control and/or emancipation across different contexts and historical periods merit critical<br />

interrogation. Underlying this implicit call for interrogation is the idea that prevention and predictability<br />

may be discerned through a study <strong>of</strong> the determinants <strong>of</strong> violence and an enhanced articulation <strong>of</strong><br />

the psychosocial, structural, and contextual factors associated with the production <strong>of</strong> violence, and<br />

conversely peace.<br />

Whether the accent is on socio-political structures, individual pathology, learning, criminal intent or<br />

gender inequality, the voices <strong>of</strong> peace and <strong>safety</strong> promotion implicitly (though they may not wish to<br />

acknowledge) place violence and its prevention within the realms <strong>of</strong> human agency, reflexivity and<br />

ethico-normative considerations. In so far as collective violence is constructed as predictable and<br />

preventable, it is located within the realm <strong>of</strong> human agency. Likewise, the focus on the utility and<br />

consequences <strong>of</strong> violence positions violence within our reflexive and ethico-normative domains,<br />

which are not necessarily divorced from ideological and socio-economic issues. When, for instance,<br />

the human rights and anti-war movements opposing the American-British invasion <strong>of</strong> Iraq argue that<br />

the end does not justify the means and stress international rule <strong>of</strong> law, the importance <strong>of</strong> territorial<br />

integrity and self-determination, they tend to project war and violence as unethical, immoral and<br />

illegal.<br />

Ironically, as in other instances <strong>of</strong> war, the American and British governments, however hypocritical,<br />

also invoked principles related to freedom, human rights and democracy to justify the war morally<br />

and to mobilise the requisite public support, albeit limited. When the Anglo-American public began<br />

questioning their respective governments' claims that Iraq was associated with terrorism and<br />

weapons <strong>of</strong> mass destruction, the American government in particular shifted the focus from realpolitick<br />

to exalted moral principles, using catchy idioms and appeals to patriotism. As a self-appointed<br />

guardian <strong>of</strong> world freedom, America assumed moral responsibility to establish freedom, democracy<br />

and human rights even in lands such as Iraq, which are geographically distant from America.<br />

QUESTIONS ABOUT PEACE: UNIVERSALS AND SPECIFICS<br />

Such ethico-normative, dialectical and intra-psychic considerations that call for a rational and<br />

reflexive approach to the (non)deployment <strong>of</strong> violence presents a range <strong>of</strong> questions for peace<br />

promotion activists and researchers in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> and the Indian subcontinent. The First India-<br />

<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> Dialogue, held at the <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> Delhi under the auspices <strong>of</strong> Delhi <strong>University</strong>'s<br />

Developing Countries Research Centre and <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>'s Institute for Social and<br />

Health Sciences, focused on interrogating the universals and contextually-bound specifics underlying<br />

the determinants <strong>of</strong> violence and genesis <strong>of</strong> peace, truth and reconciliation. In this issue we bring<br />

together some <strong>of</strong> the key papers that formed the kernel <strong>of</strong> the discussions at the Dialogue, which was<br />

2


centrally focused on ``exploring Afro-Indo solutions in a universal search for peace and <strong>safety</strong>''.<br />

Delegates examined recent and current forms and expressions <strong>of</strong> collective violence in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong><br />

and India; discussed and compared <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n and Indian social and scientific responses to<br />

collective violence; reviewed successes, challenges and lessons discerned from <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> and<br />

India's emerging peace and <strong>safety</strong> promotion cultures; and explored mechanisms for mutuallybeneficial<br />

long-term co-operation around peace and <strong>safety</strong> promotion work in India and <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>.<br />

The Dialogue, encompassing an exchange <strong>of</strong> views and an attempt at discerning lessons for good<br />

practices for the prevention <strong>of</strong> collective violence and for peacebuilding, enabled a nuanced analysis<br />

<strong>of</strong> collective violence and its impact in both <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> and India (see Duncan and Louis in this<br />

issue). <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>'s relatively smooth transition to political democracy (see Terre Blanche) and<br />

associated structural mechanisms, such as the Truth and Reconciliation (see Stevens and Gohain),<br />

provided substantive material for comparative analysis. Indian academic and social activists,<br />

concerned about the incomplete project <strong>of</strong> democracy in the Indian subcontinent, generated a great<br />

deal <strong>of</strong> understanding <strong>of</strong> Satyagraha (see Manoranjan) and the violent conflicts in Bihar (see Louis),<br />

north-east India (see Vashum) and Indo-Pakistan and Hindu-Muslim tensions (see Ansari).<br />

These and other papers not included in this issue, which also focused on the struggle for selfdetermination<br />

in Kashmir, undoubtedly raised many questions about the nature and truth <strong>of</strong> conflict,<br />

reconciliation and truth itself. Mohanty, through a critical appropriation <strong>of</strong> Gandhi's Satyagraha,<br />

understood as a process to vindicate the truth and as a peacebuilding strategy on a larger societal<br />

level (Mayton II, 2001), furthers our search for the determinants <strong>of</strong> peace. Consonant with the overall<br />

focus <strong>of</strong> this ASP issue we also bring together a selection <strong>of</strong> abstracts summarising doctoral-level<br />

projects that challenge the public-health oriented researcher and practitioner to consider seriously the<br />

social sciences' and humanities' contributions to the body <strong>of</strong> knowledge focused on peace promotion.<br />

How ever we approach the study <strong>of</strong> violence and its prevention, or conversely peace and peace<br />

promotion, this collection <strong>of</strong> articles clearly points to the need for multi-sectoral engagement, crossglobal<br />

linkages and international collaboration. The crafting <strong>of</strong> peace is undoubtedly a global project<br />

that is responsive to the values <strong>of</strong> inclusiveness, diversity and equity. Accordingly, this issue <strong>of</strong> ASP<br />

is also an attempt to ensure that dominant knowledge traditions and practices are not privileged to<br />

the exclusion <strong>of</strong> those voices marginal to the public health oriented focus on <strong>safety</strong> promotion.<br />

Even though <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>'s emancipation from apartheid-capitalism remains an unfinished project,<br />

the dismantling <strong>of</strong> political apartheid through protracted negotiations and other modes <strong>of</strong> (in)direct<br />

dialogue and struggle, including cessation <strong>of</strong> violent hostilities, has produced a climate in which lives<br />

and resources otherwise lost in violence can now be invested towards meaningful and substantive<br />

socio-economic justice. The contributors to this issue seem to suggest that in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, as in<br />

India, new and innovative modes <strong>of</strong> engagement need to be found so that the vision <strong>of</strong> peace, justice<br />

and human rights becomes a reality for all, beyond the machinations <strong>of</strong> violence and pseudo-peace<br />

initiatives that are predicated on fear and domination.<br />

ACKNOWLEDGEMENT<br />

The editors thank Dr Manindra Thakur for providing the translations <strong>of</strong> Hindi terms in some <strong>of</strong> the<br />

articles in this issue.<br />

3


REFERENCES<br />

Christie, D.J., Wagner, R.V. & Winter, D.D. (Eds) (2001). Peace, conflict and violence: Peace psychology for<br />

the 21st century. New Jersey: Prentice Hall.<br />

Crow, K.D. (2001). Nurturing Islamic peace discourse. American Journal <strong>of</strong> Islamic Social Sciences, 17(3), 54-<br />

69.<br />

Khan, W. (2001). Islam rediscovered. Discovering Islam from its original sources. New Delhi: Goodword Books.<br />

Krug, E.G., Dahlberg, L.L., Mercy, J.A., Zwi, A.B. & Lozano, R. (Eds) (2002). World report on violence and<br />

health. Geneva: World Health Organization.<br />

Mayton II, D.M. (2001). Gandhi as peacebuilder: The social psychology <strong>of</strong> Satyagraha. In D.J. Christie, R.V.<br />

Wagner & D.D. Winter (Eds), Peace, conflict and violence: Peace psychology for the 21 st century (pp. 307-<br />

313). New Jersey: Prentice Hall.<br />

Noorani, A.G. (2002). Islam and Jihad. New Delhi: Leftwood Books.<br />

Sivard, R.L. (1991). World military and social expenditures (14th ed.). Washington DC: World Priorities.<br />

Sivard, R.L. (1996). World military and social expenditures (16th ed.). Washington DC: World Priorities.<br />

Zwi, A.B., Garfield, R. & Loretti, A. (2002). Collective violence. In E.G. Krug, L.G. Dahlberg, J.A. Mercy, A.B.<br />

Zwi & R. Lazano (Eds), World report on violence and health. Geneva: World Health Organization.<br />

4


Original contributions<br />

UNDERSTANDING COLLECTIVE<br />

VIOLENCE IN APARTHEID AND<br />

POST-APARTHEID SOUTH AFRICA<br />

Norman Duncan 1<br />

Department <strong>of</strong> Psychology, <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> the Witwatersrand<br />

ABSTRACT<br />

The primary aim <strong>of</strong> this article is to explore some <strong>of</strong> the patterns <strong>of</strong> political violence that<br />

characterised the apartheid and post-apartheid periods in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n history, as well as the<br />

attempts to deal with the sequelae <strong>of</strong> these patterns <strong>of</strong> violence. Secondly, the article endeavours to<br />

illustrate how the statistics that we are wont to rely on in making sense <strong>of</strong> political violence, frequently<br />

only present a partial glimpse <strong>of</strong> and in the process lead to misrepresentations <strong>of</strong> the phenomenon.<br />

Thirdly, the article attempts to examine two <strong>of</strong> the key interventions initiated by the post-apartheid<br />

government to deal with the violence in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>'s past and present, namely the Truth and<br />

Reconciliation Commission and the Reconstruction and Development Programme. The article<br />

concludes with the observation that, despite their many merits, interventions such as these could not<br />

be adequate to deal with past and extant patterns <strong>of</strong> political violence.<br />

Most <strong>of</strong> the available statistics indicate that fatalities resulting from political violence in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong><br />

(which in this article is seen as one <strong>of</strong> the key forms <strong>of</strong> collective violence that has marred the social<br />

landscape over the last century) increased dramatically during the late 1980s, as well as during the<br />

mid-1990s when <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> was negotiating its transition from the apartheid order to non-racial<br />

democracy (cf. Alence, 1999; <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Institute <strong>of</strong> Race Relations, 2000). Furthermore, as<br />

illustrated in Table 1, the available statistics indicate that following <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>'s first non-racial,<br />

democratic elections and the installation <strong>of</strong> its first democratic government, instances <strong>of</strong> overt political<br />

violence decreased substantially.<br />

While these statistics embody a glimmer <strong>of</strong> hope to a country, which for a very long period <strong>of</strong> its<br />

ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ<br />

1. Please direct all correspondence to Norman Duncan, Department <strong>of</strong> Psychology, <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> the Witwatersrand, Private Bag X3, P. O. Wits, 2050, <strong>South</strong><br />

<strong>Africa</strong>; Tel. +27 +11 717-4545; Fax. +27 +11 717- 4559; E-mail: duncann@umthombo.wits.ac.za<br />

5


history has been brutalised and paralysed by all forms <strong>of</strong> collective violence, one should obviously<br />

not accept this and other similar portrayals <strong>of</strong> collective violence in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> at face value; for as<br />

will be argued in this article, these portrayals <strong>of</strong> collective violence are somewhat partial and<br />

therefore relatively deceptive, both in terms <strong>of</strong> their representation <strong>of</strong> the extent <strong>of</strong> collective violence<br />

during the apartheid period, as well as their representation <strong>of</strong> the actual and potential impact <strong>of</strong> this<br />

violence on contemporary <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n society (cf. Simpson, 1993).<br />

Furthermore, it will be argued that the manner in which we recall, reconstruct, represent and deal<br />

with the extent and nature <strong>of</strong> the various forms <strong>of</strong> collective violence that characterised <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n<br />

society during the apartheid era, to some extent will determine the potential for new forms <strong>of</strong><br />

collective violence in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, both currently and in the future.<br />

TABLE 1<br />

Political fatalities<br />

YEAR<br />

TOTAL<br />

1985 879<br />

1986 1298<br />

1987 661<br />

1988 1149<br />

1989 1403<br />

1990 3699<br />

1991 2706<br />

1992 3347<br />

1993 3794<br />

1994 2476<br />

1995 1044<br />

1996 683<br />

1997 470<br />

1998 356<br />

23965<br />

Source: <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Institute <strong>of</strong> Race Relations (SAIRR) (2000)<br />

Before I present these arguments, however, it might be useful to firstly present the definitions <strong>of</strong><br />

violence and collective violence that inform this article.<br />

6


TOWARDS A DEFINITION OF COLLECTIVE VIOLENCE<br />

Indicative <strong>of</strong> the phenomenon's complex and quasi-impalpable nature, the humanities and social and<br />

health sciences have generated a multiplicity <strong>of</strong> definitions <strong>of</strong> violence. While this article <strong>of</strong>fers a<br />

social science analysis <strong>of</strong> collective violence, I have decided to utilise the World Health<br />

Organisation's (2002) definition <strong>of</strong> the phenomenon, even though this definition is located within a<br />

public health framework. This decision is based partly on the fact that this definition is fairly<br />

comprehensive, and partly also because the World Health Organisation (WHO) definition <strong>of</strong>fers a<br />

pragmatic point <strong>of</strong> departure for this article.<br />

In its World Report on Violence and Health, the World Health Organisation (2002) defines violence<br />

as:<br />

the intentional use <strong>of</strong> physical force or power, threatened or actual, against oneself, another<br />

person, or against a group or community, that either results in or has a high likelihood <strong>of</strong> resulting<br />

in injury, death, psychological harm, mal-development or deprivation (p. 4).<br />

Obviously, in the sense that it accommodates both harmful physical force as well as the abuse <strong>of</strong><br />

power (as expressed through coercion and domination) (Schutte, 1994), this definition extends the<br />

coverage <strong>of</strong> the term ``violence'' significantly beyond its earlier fairly narrow applications (cf. Bulhan,<br />

1985; Degenaar, 1990).<br />

Within the framework <strong>of</strong> this definition, the WHO (2002) distinguishes three broad categories <strong>of</strong><br />

violence, namely self-directed violence, interpersonal violence and collective violence. Collective<br />

violence, which constitutes the focus <strong>of</strong> this article, refers to:<br />

the instrumental use <strong>of</strong> violence by people who identify themselves as members <strong>of</strong> a group<br />

against another group ... in order to achieve [certain] political, economic or social objectives (p. 5).<br />

Against the backdrop <strong>of</strong> the broader definition <strong>of</strong> violence provided by the WHO, collective violence in<br />

effect would refer to ``physical force or power'', ``threatened or actual'', exercised with the aim <strong>of</strong><br />

privileging an in-group or in-groups at the expense <strong>of</strong> an out-group or out-groups. As implied in the<br />

latter definition, in terms <strong>of</strong> objectives collective violence can assume a predominantly (though<br />

obviously not exclusively) political, economic and social orientation.<br />

To a certain extent, this definition <strong>of</strong> collective violence overlaps with Bulhan (1985) and Galtung's (in<br />

Degenaar, 1990) notion <strong>of</strong> structural violence. According to Galtung, ``structural violence is present<br />

when human beings are being influenced so that their actual ... [functioning is] below their potential<br />

realizations'' (in Degenaar, 1990, p. 11). Structural violence is built into extant institutional structures,<br />

which through their functioning ensure that certain groups systematically obtain more power and<br />

privileges than others (cf. Bulhan, 1985; Galtung, in Degenaar, 1990). Furthermore, according to<br />

Bulhan (1985):<br />

... structural violence ... imposes a pattern <strong>of</strong> relations and practices that are deeply ingrained in<br />

and dominate everyday living. Individuals are born and socialized into it as victims or perpetrators<br />

and, in the absence <strong>of</strong> a fundamental social change, they play out their ascribed roles ... structural<br />

violence [is] hard to discern because it is very much part <strong>of</strong> social reality ... and everyday practices<br />

(p. 136).<br />

7


However, as will be argued later, and as world history has shown repeatedly, collective violence<br />

rarely goes unopposed by those against whom it is directed. As such, this violence itself can be<br />

considered an important determinant <strong>of</strong> reactive violence, including collective violence.<br />

MANIFESTATIONS OF COLLECTIVE VIOLENCE IN SOUTH AFRICA<br />

We now turn our attention to the anatomy and salient manifestations <strong>of</strong> collective violence during the<br />

apartheid and post-apartheid periods. However, before embarking on the description <strong>of</strong> these<br />

manifestations <strong>of</strong> collective violence, I wish to introduce two caveats.<br />

First, in view <strong>of</strong> the constraints inherent in an article <strong>of</strong> this nature and the divergent nature <strong>of</strong> the<br />

many manifestations <strong>of</strong> collective violence, I will focus only on political violence, and specifically, on<br />

specific manifestations <strong>of</strong> this form <strong>of</strong> collective violence:<br />

a) The attempts by the state to perpetuate or entrench social inequalities by means <strong>of</strong> legislation<br />

and institutional structures (particularly relevant for the discussion <strong>of</strong> the political violence during<br />

the apartheid era).<br />

b) The counter-violence embodied by attempts to challenge these inequalities, as well as the state's<br />

subsequent responses to this violence.<br />

c) Intra- and inter-community violence, motivated by, or resulting from, political factors (Duncan &<br />

Rock, 1997).<br />

Second, because this article departs from the assumption that the reader has a basic knowledge <strong>of</strong><br />

recent <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> history, but also due to space constraints, I will not discuss in any detail many <strong>of</strong><br />

the key historical events and processes that influenced the acts and processes <strong>of</strong> violence to be<br />

examined hereunder.<br />

Manifestations <strong>of</strong> collective violence in apartheid <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong><br />

State violence<br />

In and <strong>of</strong> itself, the system <strong>of</strong> apartheid embodied one <strong>of</strong> the most pernicious systems <strong>of</strong> political<br />

violence that the modern era has witnessed. As the eminent Somali-American psychologist Hussein<br />

Bulhan (1985) so succinctly put it, apartheid ``was brought into existence and ... maintained by dint <strong>of</strong><br />

violence'' (p. 131) (cf. Cassin, Cayla & Salazar, 2004).<br />

While its manifest objective <strong>of</strong> engendering and maintaining the dominance <strong>of</strong> a white minority over a<br />

black majority provided sufficient cause to typify it as a process <strong>of</strong> collective violence (i.e. in terms <strong>of</strong><br />

the definition <strong>of</strong> collective violence provided earlier), and more specifically, political violence, it is the<br />

political mechanisms and processes that were harnessed to give substance to this objective, which<br />

most powerfully evoke the full extent <strong>of</strong> the destructiveness <strong>of</strong> this system. I present a brief<br />

description <strong>of</strong> some <strong>of</strong> these mechanisms and processes below.<br />

Firstly, as Cassin et al. (2004) and Knox and Quirk (2000) observe, apartheid was vivified through an<br />

8


arsenal <strong>of</strong> laws that codified and bolstered all forms <strong>of</strong> racialised political violence in virtually every<br />

sphere <strong>of</strong> human activity in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>. This arsenal included:<br />

a) The Population Registration Act <strong>of</strong> 1950, which allowed for the forced classification <strong>of</strong> people into<br />

one <strong>of</strong> the four so-called `races' identified by the National Party government (namely, `white',<br />

`Indian', `coloured' and `<strong>Africa</strong>n'), and which, moreover, would form the basis <strong>of</strong> the social, political<br />

and economic marginalisation <strong>of</strong> all people not categorised `white'.<br />

b) The Reservation <strong>of</strong> Separate Amenities Act <strong>of</strong> 1953, which reserved the best public amenities<br />

(paid for by taxpayers <strong>of</strong> all the designated `races') for the exclusive use <strong>of</strong> whites.<br />

c) The Group Areas Act <strong>of</strong> 1957, which made separate residential areas compulsory and which saw<br />

millions <strong>of</strong> people evicted from their homes and effectively banished to the notorious apartheidengineered<br />

ghettos and homelands.<br />

d) The Prohibition <strong>of</strong> Mixed Marriages Act <strong>of</strong> 1950, which prohibited marriages between people <strong>of</strong><br />

different `races'.<br />

e) The Extension <strong>of</strong> <strong>University</strong> Act <strong>of</strong> 1957, which effectively prevented blacks from attending all the<br />

national universities and banished them to a few under-resourced facilities reserved for members<br />

<strong>of</strong> their different `races'.<br />

These laws allowed for the development <strong>of</strong> a regime <strong>of</strong> excessive privilege for whites and a situation<br />

<strong>of</strong> utter destitution and hardship for the overwhelming majority <strong>of</strong> black 1 <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>ns. As Chikane<br />

(1986) observed in the mid-1980s, being black in apartheid <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> meant being subjected to<br />

one <strong>of</strong> the most pervasive systems <strong>of</strong> collective violence, which manifested itself in the squalid,<br />

crime-infested ghettos, widespread malnutrition, poor or non-existent health systems, poor education<br />

in ill-equipped and overcrowded schools, inadequate or non-existent social security, the constant<br />

threat <strong>of</strong> forced evictions, high levels <strong>of</strong> unemployment and quotidian experiences <strong>of</strong> racist prejudice<br />

and abuse (Duncan & Rock, 1997). The list is virtually endless. Nonetheless, for illustrative purposes<br />

it might be useful to briefly consider some <strong>of</strong> the consequences <strong>of</strong> the institutionalised violence <strong>of</strong><br />

apartheid more closely.<br />

It is estimated that by 1983 the lives <strong>of</strong> no fewer than 3.5 million people had been disrupted as a<br />

result <strong>of</strong> the forced removals ensuing from the state's endeavours to forcefully segregate <strong>South</strong><br />

<strong>Africa</strong>n society (Simpson, 1993). Furthermore, in 1986, according to a study conducted jointly by the<br />

United Nations Children's Fund (UNICEF) and the National Children's Rights Commission (NCRC),<br />

while the child mortality was 0.9 per 1000 for whites, it was 7 per 1000 for <strong>Africa</strong>ns. Along similar<br />

lines, in 1994 it was reported that while the average infant mortality rate for whites was 10.8 per<br />

1000, it was 74 per 1000 for <strong>Africa</strong>ns (UNICEF & NCRC, 1993). Additionally, one study found that<br />

black children were between 14 and 15 times more likely to die before their fifth birthday, directly as a<br />

result <strong>of</strong> the harsh living conditions to which blacks were subjected in apartheid <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong><br />

(Dowdall, 1990). In a study completed during the early 1990s, Hickson and Kriegler (in Duncan &<br />

Rock, 1997) found that 50% <strong>of</strong> infant deaths in black communities were due to malnutrition-related<br />

diseases. Various studies also point to the fact that the stresses <strong>of</strong> apartheid oppression so severely<br />

compromised the functioning <strong>of</strong> black communities that many <strong>of</strong> these communities themselves<br />

became so pathogenically violent as to generally compromise the overall psychological wellbeing <strong>of</strong><br />

their members (Duncan & Rock, 1997; SAIRR, 1999).<br />

9


Counter-violence<br />

In essence, apartheid gave rise to and fed on the brutalisation <strong>of</strong> black communities. To a certain<br />

extent, this brutalisation can be seen as having been a precondition for the functioning and<br />

perpetuation <strong>of</strong> apartheid; because in order to perpetuate itself, this system had to orchestrate the<br />

creation <strong>of</strong> subaltern groups that were so brutalised and vulnerable that they could be threatened and<br />

cowed into accepting their own subordinate position in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n society without too much protest<br />

(Duncan & Rock, 1997).<br />

However, if there is one characteristic that most forms <strong>of</strong> political violence have in common (no<br />

matter how extreme they are), it is that they inevitably provoke various forms <strong>of</strong> counter-violence from<br />

those whom they seek to subjugate. This was the case with apartheid as well. Since its inception this<br />

system was under constant attack (Duncan & Rock, 1997). As a noted <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n academic<br />

observed during the 1980s, the system <strong>of</strong> apartheid spawned ``a violent society with violent laws ...<br />

[that] invites violence'', a situation which he argued, served as sufficient justification by many for the<br />

use <strong>of</strong> various acts <strong>of</strong> physical counter-violence (Boesak, cited in Duncan & Rock, 1997, p. 57).<br />

Paradoxically, this violence had a pr<strong>of</strong>ound effect not only on the apartheid system against which it<br />

was aimed, but also on the lives <strong>of</strong> the victims <strong>of</strong> this system. For example, the social dislocation<br />

unavoidably provoked by this violence severely disrupted the schooling <strong>of</strong> many children, as well as<br />

their access to the meagre health and social services ordinarily at their disposal (Duncan & Rock,<br />

1997). Then too, until the late 1980s, it led to many young people leaving the country to undergo<br />

military training; and in the 1990s it resulted in many people, including countless children and<br />

adolescents, being inducted into various so-called self-defence units throughout the country (Duncan<br />

& Rock, 1997; Mlazi, 1994).<br />

State repression<br />

Like other systems <strong>of</strong> oppression, the apartheid system employed a range <strong>of</strong> repressive measures in<br />

order to control dissent. These included house arrest, imprisonment without trial, countless states <strong>of</strong><br />

emergency, and the routine military occupation <strong>of</strong> black residential areas (Duncan & Rock, 1997).<br />

It is estimated that over 80 000 people were imprisoned without trial between 1960 and 1994. Of<br />

these, over 10 000 were subjected to various forms <strong>of</strong> psychological and physical abuse or to outright<br />

torture (Coleman, 1994). Thousands eventually were tried in the apartheid state's courts <strong>of</strong> law and<br />

imprisoned. Many received life or death sentences.<br />

Furthermore, it is reported that from 1974 to 1989 some 300 attempted assassinations <strong>of</strong> various<br />

leading anti-apartheid activists by covert state-sponsored `hit squads' took place both within and<br />

beyond the borders <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>. At least 100 <strong>of</strong> these assassination attempts were successful<br />

(Coleman, 1994).<br />

No one was exempt from these repressive measures Ð not even children (Human Rights<br />

Commission, 1993). Indeed, after the 1976 Soweto uprisings in which children emerged as important<br />

actors in the anti-apartheid struggle, the state's repression <strong>of</strong> children intensified to levels rarely<br />

witnessed in recent world history (Human Rights Commission, 1993; Straker, 1994), except perhaps<br />

in occupied Palestine (Punamaki, 1987). Research reveals that, until 1990, children consistently<br />

10


constituted between 25% and 46.5% <strong>of</strong> all awaiting-trial political prisoners held by the security forces.<br />

Of these, 25% were aged 16 years and younger and 6.13% were 14 years <strong>of</strong> age and younger.<br />

Some <strong>of</strong> these prisoners were as young as 7 years <strong>of</strong> age (Duncan & Rock, 1997).<br />

The interregnum <strong>of</strong> 1990 to 1994<br />

The apartheid state's use <strong>of</strong> repressive measures to deal with its opponents continued relentlessly<br />

until at least 1990, which in many respects was considered a watershed year in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>'s<br />

troubled history. It will be remembered that it was during this year that Nelson Mandela was released<br />

from prison, and that the <strong>Africa</strong>n National Congress (ANC), the Pan <strong>Africa</strong>n Congress (PAC) and<br />

various other restricted anti-apartheid organisations were unbanned (Duvenage, 1994; Knox & Quirk,<br />

2000). Furthermore, the year 1990 is generally regarded as the year that introduced the period <strong>of</strong><br />

transition between apartheid rule and the introduction <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>'s first non-racial democratic<br />

government.<br />

Importantly, however, 1990 also announced a fundamental shift in the nature <strong>of</strong> the predominant<br />

forms <strong>of</strong> political violence on the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n socio-political landscape. Whereas prior to 1990 the<br />

origins and nature <strong>of</strong> the predominant forms <strong>of</strong> political violence in large part were fairly clearly<br />

identifiable, after 1990 this was not readily the case. As Knox and Quirk (2000, pp. 153-154) so<br />

poignantly observe:<br />

Between 1990 and 1994 <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> roller-coastered between the highs <strong>of</strong> political agreements<br />

to the lows <strong>of</strong> countless massacres and levels <strong>of</strong> violence in a land already scorched by<br />

bloodshed [...] The nature <strong>of</strong> political violence was transformed from a primarily overt conflict<br />

between the regime and the forces <strong>of</strong> liberation, to a more entangled fight among a variety <strong>of</strong><br />

players with disparate motives, tactics and objectives.<br />

Indeed, during the early 1990s, <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> experienced what many political commentators referred<br />

to as a low-intensity war within black residential areas, particularly in the Gauteng and KwaZulu-Natal<br />

provinces <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> (cf. Coleman, 1994). Virtually on a daily basis the news media were filled<br />

with reports <strong>of</strong> bomb blasts, internecine battles in townships, and the assassination <strong>of</strong> influential<br />

political figures. Most <strong>of</strong> the victims <strong>of</strong> these incidents were black.<br />

It is frequently posited that the serious social and political dislocations caused by political violence<br />

(and for that matter, all forms <strong>of</strong> collective violence) allow for the expression <strong>of</strong> various other forms <strong>of</strong><br />

violence (Simpson, 1993). This certainly appears to have been the case in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> between<br />

1990 and 1994, with reports <strong>of</strong> dramatic increases in child abuse, homicide, violence against women<br />

and incidents <strong>of</strong> taxi violence, particularly within black communities (Duncan & Rock, 1997; Penn-<br />

Kekana, 1997; Simpson, 1993). For example, Simpson (1993) recorded an increase <strong>of</strong> nearly 6000<br />

criminally motivated murders from 1991 to 1992 (i.e. from 14 693 in 1991, to 20 135 in 1992).<br />

While the effects <strong>of</strong> the violence that came to characterise this period were certainly not any more<br />

pernicious than other forms <strong>of</strong> political violence that characterised <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> prior to the 1990s, the<br />

expression <strong>of</strong> this violence was so excessively brutal and unpredictable that it led many to fear that,<br />

just as the fruits <strong>of</strong> the extended struggle against apartheid (i.e. non-racial democracy) came within<br />

sight, <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> was slipping inexorably into the abyss <strong>of</strong> civil warfare and anarchy. Moreover, the<br />

11


fact that the origins and logic <strong>of</strong> this wave <strong>of</strong> violence were not readily apparent (Simpson, 1993)<br />

reinforced fears that it would be impossible to arrest its escalation (Knox & Quirk, 2000).<br />

Many political analysts typified this wave <strong>of</strong> political violence as `black on black' violence.<br />

Furthermore, because it <strong>of</strong>ten involved members <strong>of</strong> the Inkatha Freedom Party (IFP) and the ANC, it<br />

was frequently characterised as a party political battle for supremacy on the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n political<br />

landscape. However, the fact that this violence spread beyond what were considered IFP and ANC<br />

strongholds called this characterisation into question (Knox & Quirk, 2000). Indeed, many analysts<br />

suggested that it was instigated by various right-wing groups, as well as by conservative elements<br />

within the apartheid government and its security establishment in an effort to ensure that white<br />

political domination would continue after the 1994 elections (Coleman, 1994; Knox & Quirk, 2000;<br />

Zulu, 1994). As Coleman (1994, p. 143) argued, the ``major players in this violence'' could only have<br />

been ``those who had most to lose the apartheid government [and] the security establishment''. To a<br />

certain extent, this perception in fact found some resonance and justification in the following<br />

observation contained in the Second Interim Report <strong>of</strong> the Goldstone Commission <strong>of</strong> Inquiry into<br />

Public Violence:<br />

A police force and army which, for many decades have been used as instruments <strong>of</strong> oppression<br />

by successive white governments in maintaining a society predicated upon racial segregation. A<br />

history over some years <strong>of</strong> state complicity in undercover activities which include criminal conduct.<br />

Those activities have enabled critics <strong>of</strong> the government and others, fairly or unfairly, to place the<br />

blame for much <strong>of</strong> the violence at the door <strong>of</strong> the security forces. That and the well-documented<br />

criminal conduct <strong>of</strong> members <strong>of</strong> the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Police and the KwaZulu Police exacerbate the<br />

perception <strong>of</strong> many <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>ns that the government or its agencies are active parties<br />

responsible for the violence (Goldstone, cited in Zulu, 1994, p. 154).<br />

However, other commentators have argued somewhat more persuasively that rather than being<br />

attributable to a single factor, this violence was more likely to have been a result <strong>of</strong> a complex<br />

interaction <strong>of</strong> sinister forces within the apartheid state, political brinkmanship, provocateurism from<br />

many quarters, the scarcity <strong>of</strong> resources, unemployment, and sheer criminal opportunism (Knox &<br />

Quirk, 2000; Simpson, 1993).<br />

Nonetheless, whatever the causes <strong>of</strong> this violence, the loss <strong>of</strong> human life and the physical and<br />

psychological scars that it gave rise to were staggering. According to the National Children's Rights<br />

Commission (NCRC) (1994), between 1990 and 1993, some 45 000 children were displaced as a<br />

result <strong>of</strong> political violence in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>'s Gauteng and KwaZulu-Natal provinces alone.<br />

Furthermore, during the period spanning 1990 and 1994, an estimated 12 000 people were killed 2 ,<br />

20 000 were injured and 30 000 were arrested as a result <strong>of</strong> political violence (Coleman, 1994;<br />

Duncan & Rock, 1997).<br />

Obviously, the figures provided above should not be allowed to shroud or play down the devastating<br />

impact <strong>of</strong> the various forms <strong>of</strong> political violence that characterised the period preceding 1990. In fact,<br />

disaggregating the violence <strong>of</strong> the interregnum <strong>of</strong> 1990 to 1994 from its socially disruptive historical<br />

antecedents would not only be a-historical, but also misleading. Very importantly too, we should<br />

guard against perceiving these statistics as <strong>of</strong>fering a sufficiently representative portrayal <strong>of</strong> the range<br />

and extent <strong>of</strong> the political violence that typified the early 1990s, for they do not (cf. Simpson, 1993).<br />

12


Statistics on pre-1994 political violence: Partial at best<br />

The statistics contained in this article, like the many other similar extant compendia <strong>of</strong> statistical data<br />

collected by various researchers over the years cannot even begin to convey the full extent and<br />

range <strong>of</strong> the collective violence that <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> witnessed during the pre-1994 era. This is partly a<br />

result <strong>of</strong> the fact that much <strong>of</strong> the statistical information on political violence during the pre-1994<br />

period, at best, merely presents informed approximations <strong>of</strong> the extent and nature <strong>of</strong> the political<br />

violence that characterised the apartheid order (Simpson, 1994). As many researchers will readily<br />

admit, it was virtually impossible to obtain reliable and comprehensive statistical information <strong>of</strong> any<br />

sort, particularly on political violence, during the apartheid era. There were many reasons for this, key<br />

<strong>of</strong> which are as follows.<br />

First, the `culture <strong>of</strong> secrecy' cultivated and perpetuated by the apartheid state, particularly prior to<br />

1990s, resulted in the routine concealment or suppression <strong>of</strong> what the state held out as `politically<br />

sensitive' information. This resulted in the distortion <strong>of</strong> much <strong>of</strong> the available statistical data on<br />

political violence (Duncan & Rock, 1997). Indeed, various researchers have demonstrated how<br />

<strong>of</strong>ficial statistics were routinely recorded and represented by the apartheid state in a manner that<br />

systematically underplayed or minimised the full extent <strong>of</strong> the impact <strong>of</strong> Ð state-inspired Ð political<br />

violence (Duncan & Rock, 1997). For example, Fourie (in Duncan & Rock, 1997) maintains that in<br />

the reports routinely released by the state on the numbers <strong>of</strong> child detainees in state facilities,<br />

statistics related to children detained for periods shorter than one month were regularly omitted,<br />

which significantly decreased the number <strong>of</strong> child detainees reflected in government records.<br />

The second reason for the inadequacy <strong>of</strong> pre-1994 statistics on political violence identified by Madela<br />

and Poggenpoel (in Duncan & Rock, 1997) is that <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n researchers generally were relatively<br />

reluctant to undertake any research which would have exposed the violence and other excesses <strong>of</strong><br />

the apartheid state, as this had the potential to expose them to the wrath <strong>of</strong> the state and its security<br />

apparatus. Cases such as that involving the cold-blooded assassination <strong>of</strong> the <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> the<br />

Witwatersrand academic, David Webster 3 (Amnesty International, 1992; Nott, 1994), indicates that<br />

the apartheid state and its agents dealt extremely ruthlessly with those researchers whom it<br />

considered to be a threat to the status quo.<br />

The third reason was linked to the extent <strong>of</strong> the violence that characterised the apartheid era.<br />

According to Mkhize (1993), the extremely high levels <strong>of</strong> collective violence in apartheid <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>,<br />

together with other forms <strong>of</strong> violence, led to fairly high levels <strong>of</strong> ``violence tolerance'' (p. 7) in <strong>South</strong><br />

<strong>Africa</strong>n society. This desensitisation to and, to a certain extent, `naturalisation' <strong>of</strong> violence effectively<br />

led to significant under-reporting <strong>of</strong> the incidence <strong>of</strong> collective violence in general, and political<br />

violence specifically (Duncan & Rock, 1993).<br />

Nonetheless, no matter how comprehensive the available statistical information may be, and despite<br />

its proven utility, such information can never tell the full story; simply because it can never adequately<br />

describe the incalculable social and psychological costs <strong>of</strong> collective violence (Simpson, 1993). For<br />

example, statistics cannot describe the pain that many families endured on learning <strong>of</strong> the death <strong>of</strong><br />

one or more <strong>of</strong> their members at the hands <strong>of</strong> the apartheid government's security forces or vigilante<br />

groups, nor can it really describe the harm done to millions <strong>of</strong> black children who were condemned to<br />

a life <strong>of</strong> poverty and deprivation directly as a result <strong>of</strong> apartheid. Statistics can certainly not convey<br />

13


the despair experienced by parents forced to watch their children wasting away as a result <strong>of</strong><br />

preventable illnesses and malnutrition. Statistics also would not be able to capture the sense <strong>of</strong> loss<br />

and destitution that so many <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>ns must undoubtedly have experienced on witnessing their<br />

homes flattened by apartheid's bulldozers to make way for white residential areas. Statistical data<br />

alone would also not be able to capture the terror that many child political detainees must have<br />

experienced on being thrown into prison with hardened criminals for indefinite periods <strong>of</strong> time.<br />

Statistical data certainly also would not be able to describe the marks left on the psyche <strong>of</strong><br />

generations <strong>of</strong> people as a result <strong>of</strong> their quotidian exposure to the patent malignancy <strong>of</strong> the racist<br />

prejudice, vilification and persecution engendered by apartheid.<br />

Very importantly too, as Simpson (1993, p. 3) notes, as useful as statistical data may be:<br />

It could be argued that the picture which is painted in statistical terms has the ironic effect <strong>of</strong><br />

numbing us to the human suffering which statistics ostensibly convey Ð instead <strong>of</strong> guiding us in<br />

the development <strong>of</strong> the remedial and preventative steps which need to be taken.<br />

Manifestations <strong>of</strong> collective violence in post-apartheid <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong><br />

With its first non-racial democratic national elections in April 1994, <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> entered a new period<br />

in its history. In the words <strong>of</strong> Knox and Quirk (2000, p. 177), these elections were not so much ``a<br />

victory for individual political parties'' as a triumph <strong>of</strong> democracy over the institutionalised and<br />

genocidal violence <strong>of</strong> the apartheid order.<br />

On reading this statement by Knox and Quirk (2000), we obviously have to ask ourselves whether we<br />

have really triumphed over the political violence intrinsic to apartheid. The inadequacy <strong>of</strong> the<br />

available statistical information makes an unequivocal response to this question difficult.<br />

Nonetheless, if by political violence, we are merely referring to the gruesome incidents <strong>of</strong> police,<br />

military, right-wing and vigilante violence that characterised <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n society until 1994, then<br />

certainly <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, for the moment, has triumphed over the collective violence intrinsic to the<br />

apartheid order. For example, after 1994, instances <strong>of</strong> right-wing, vigilante and other forms <strong>of</strong> political<br />

violence decreased substantially (Alence, 1999; SAIRR, 1999). Specifically, Alence (1999) found that<br />

while, on average, 3000 people were killed per year directly as a result <strong>of</strong> political violence during the<br />

1990 to 1994 period, the average number <strong>of</strong> political fatalities for the period 1995 to 1997 was<br />

approximately 75% lower than the 1990 to 1994 period. While there was a brief upsurge in reported<br />

incidents <strong>of</strong> political violence at the time <strong>of</strong> the 1999 general elections, with various political leaders<br />

(particularly from the United Democratic Movement) losing their lives, in general, there has been a<br />

consistent downward trend in political violence since 1994 (Alence, 1999). Nonetheless, as was<br />

amply illustrated at the beginning <strong>of</strong> this century, the possibility <strong>of</strong> a resurgence <strong>of</strong> organised violence<br />

from white supremacist right-wing groups remains an ever-present threat (Nkuta & Boyle, 2002;<br />

Potgieter, 2002).<br />

Furthermore, the ongoing reports <strong>of</strong> vigilante violence in opposition to the high levels <strong>of</strong> crime that<br />

have come to characterise <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n society speaks to <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>ns' easy resort to violence as<br />

a means to solving socio-political problems (Dixon & Johns, 2001; SAIRR, 1999). Certainly, vigilante<br />

action is most frequently represented (both by the media and the state) as fundamentally criminal in<br />

14


intent and consequence. However, the fact that, in this country, much <strong>of</strong> the criminal activity against<br />

which vigilante violence is directed is, in part, a result <strong>of</strong> past political practices; the fact that the<br />

perception exists that crime has reached the levels that it has because <strong>of</strong> the actions or inaction <strong>of</strong><br />

the political elite (Alence, 1999; Alence & Pimstone, 1999); as well as the fact that the current high<br />

levels <strong>of</strong> crime in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> are frequently harnessed as a rallying point by political parties<br />

(particularly on the right <strong>of</strong> the political spectrum), in essence, renders such vigilante violence<br />

potentially political in nature (Alence, 1999).<br />

Moreover, if our definition <strong>of</strong> political violence includes Bulhan's (1985) notion <strong>of</strong> structural violence,<br />

then certainly <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> has been less than successful in dealing with the violence <strong>of</strong> apartheid.<br />

Recent research indicates that the racialised poverty trends and institutionalised systems <strong>of</strong> privilege<br />

established under the apartheid order are still firmly entrenched. For example, research undertaken<br />

by May, Woolard and Klasen (2000) indicate that blacks, and particularly <strong>Africa</strong>ns, continue to be<br />

significantly over-represented amongst the poorest sectors <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n society, with 61.7% and<br />

38.2% <strong>of</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>ns and `coloureds', respectively, being poor, as opposed to 1% <strong>of</strong> whites. Along<br />

similar lines, Foer (1997) found that, by the latter half <strong>of</strong> the 1990s, the income <strong>of</strong> the average black<br />

person was approximately one-sixth that <strong>of</strong> his or her white counterpart.<br />

In 1996, two years after the installation <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>'s first democratic government, more than 1<br />

million <strong>Africa</strong>n households were still accommodated in informal or squatter dwellings, as opposed to<br />

912 white households (SAIRR, 2000). Furthermore, available statistics indicate that while the infant<br />

mortality rate for whites currently stands at 7 per 100 000, it is 54 per 100 000 for <strong>Africa</strong>ns.<br />

Additionally, while the life expectancy for white women and men is 76 and 69 years, respectively, it is<br />

67 and 69 years for <strong>Africa</strong>n women and men, respectively (Budlender, 2000). Furthermore, May et<br />

al.'s (2000) research indicates that while whites score fairly high (and on a par with Canadians, for<br />

example) on the United Nations Development Programme's Human Development Index (HDI),<br />

<strong>Africa</strong>ns have a fairly low rating on the HDI Ð lower in fact than that <strong>of</strong> the national average <strong>of</strong> a<br />

country as poor as Swaziland. In effect, as <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>'s President, Thabo Mbeki, has so<br />

persuasively argued, <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> comprises two nations, one enjoying standards <strong>of</strong> living<br />

comparable to those <strong>of</strong> many industrialised countries, and one enduring standards <strong>of</strong> living<br />

comparable to those <strong>of</strong> countries inordinately poorer than <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>.<br />

Measures employed by the post-apartheid government to deal with political<br />

violence and its effects<br />

Following the euphoria <strong>of</strong> the 1994 elections, the newly installed government <strong>of</strong> national unity<br />

introduced various interventions aimed at addressing the political violence discussed in the preceding<br />

pages. I will very briefly consider two <strong>of</strong> these interventions here, namely, the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Truth and<br />

Reconciliation Commission (TRC) and the Reconstruction and Development Programme (RDP).<br />

Established by means <strong>of</strong> the Promotion <strong>of</strong> National Unity and Reconciliation Act (Act 34) <strong>of</strong> 1995<br />

(Cassin et al., 2004), the TRC's primary brief was to provide as ``complete a picture as possible <strong>of</strong> the<br />

nature, causes and extent <strong>of</strong> gross human rights violations committed during apartheid'' (Knox &<br />

Quirk, 2000, p. 178). One <strong>of</strong> the key implicit objectives <strong>of</strong> the TRC was to ``allow <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>ns to<br />

15


transcend the social divisions and tensions engineered by the past apartheid order'' (Magwaza,<br />

2001, p. 37), and thereby to add to initiatives aimed at national reconciliation and at minimising the<br />

possibility <strong>of</strong> future collective conflict and national instability.<br />

One <strong>of</strong> the RDP's primary objectives was to contribute to the elimination <strong>of</strong> some <strong>of</strong> the key racialised<br />

inequalities characteristic <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n society (Knox & Quirk, 2000; Rabbani, 1994; RDP White<br />

Paper, 1994). Consequently, access to adequate housing, employment, educational and health care<br />

facilities, and the overall state <strong>of</strong> the economy featured amongst the key problem areas that the RDP<br />

was to address. For obvious reasons, most indigent and marginalised black communities welcomed<br />

the programme.<br />

Knox and Quirk (2000) point out that in the initial documentation on the RDP, the link between the<br />

racialised inequalities in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n society and the potential for collective violence or instability<br />

was articulated as one <strong>of</strong> the key motives for the establishment <strong>of</strong> the RDP (cf. Rabbani, 1994;<br />

Tshotsho, 2005).<br />

To what extent have these interventions succeeded in dealing with the collective<br />

violence generated by apartheid?<br />

The Truth and Reconciliation Commission<br />

From the outset the conceptualisation, scope and functioning <strong>of</strong> the TRC were subjected to intense<br />

criticism from various quarters because <strong>of</strong> their inherent shortcomings (Derrida, 2004; Knox & Quirk,<br />

2000; Magwaza, 2001; SAIRR, 1999; see Stevens in this issue). In a critical reflection on the TRC,<br />

John Daniels (in Knox & Quirk, 2000), the TRC head <strong>of</strong> research in Durban, identified two <strong>of</strong> the<br />

more important <strong>of</strong> these shortcomings. The first was related to the time frame covered by the TRC,<br />

and the second to the definition <strong>of</strong> `gross human rights violations'.<br />

According to Daniels, the fact that the TRC's brief was limited to examining only those atrocities<br />

committed between 1960 and 1994, meant that some <strong>of</strong> the worst acts <strong>of</strong> political violence committed<br />

by the apartheid state effectively fell beyond the scrutiny <strong>of</strong> this institution. In the process, therefore, a<br />

sufficiently comprehensive examination and analysis <strong>of</strong> the extent and impact <strong>of</strong> the various forms <strong>of</strong><br />

political violence engendered by apartheid, for all intents and purposes, were precluded (cf. Cassin et<br />

al., 2004). Secondly, Daniels (in Knox & Quirk, 2000, p. 179) argues, the narrow definition <strong>of</strong> gross<br />

human rights violations as ``the killing, abduction, torture or severe ill-treatment <strong>of</strong> any person or any<br />

attempt, conspiracy, incitement, instigation, command or procurement to commit an act <strong>of</strong> killing,<br />

abduction, torture or severe ill-treatment'', precluded not only the examination <strong>of</strong> all the variants <strong>of</strong><br />

political violence spawned by apartheid, but also <strong>of</strong> the system <strong>of</strong> apartheid itself as a crime against<br />

humanity (cf. Cassin et al., 2004).<br />

Both these limitations, together with the widespread belief amongst many marginalised black<br />

communities (particularly those with less `sensational' or `mediatisable' stories to tell) that the TRC<br />

processes further marginalised them, obviously undermined the potential <strong>of</strong> the TRC to serve as a<br />

vehicle for reconciliation (Dixon & Johns, 2001). Furthermore, the perception on the part <strong>of</strong> many<br />

whites that the TRC was prejudiced against whites and persecutory (Knox & Quirk, 2000), obviously<br />

16


also substantially decreased the possibility that they would take ownership <strong>of</strong> and responsibility for<br />

their history, thereby decreasing the remembrance and reconciliatory functions <strong>of</strong> the TRC (cf.<br />

Duvenage, 1994; Simpson, 1994).<br />

Magwaza (2001) argues that the acknowledgement <strong>of</strong> the history <strong>of</strong> intense violence visited on<br />

blacks and opponents <strong>of</strong> the apartheid system for the benefit <strong>of</strong> whites was important, not only to<br />

signal a break with the ``ethos <strong>of</strong> secrecy and silence'' that was so viciously imposed on <strong>South</strong><br />

<strong>Africa</strong>ns by the former apartheid government, but also to prevent ``a recurrence <strong>of</strong> human rights<br />

violations to the horrific extent that we had witnessed during the apartheid era'' (Magwaza, 2001, p.<br />

37).<br />

Along similar lines, Knox and Quirk (2000) argue that the fact that the TRC did not allow for a full<br />

recovery or disclosure <strong>of</strong> past atrocities committed against large sectors <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n society (cf.<br />

Dixon & Johns, 2001), to a certain extent, does in fact open the way for attempts to deny and distort<br />

the violence <strong>of</strong> apartheid. This then creates the possibility for many whites, who now defensively<br />

reason that nothing wrong had occurred in the past or that apartheid was `simply an ill-conceived<br />

political system that had gone wrong', to feel that current processes aimed at redressing the damage<br />

caused by apartheid are unfair to them (Duvenage, 1994; Simpson, 1993). Duvenage identifies a<br />

range <strong>of</strong> reasons for this ``evasiveness'' or defensiveness on the part <strong>of</strong> whites, including fear <strong>of</strong><br />

confronting the atrocities <strong>of</strong> the past and abject racism.<br />

Whatever the causes may be for this denial <strong>of</strong> the violence <strong>of</strong> apartheid, it is indisputable that it<br />

contributes significantly to a discursive context in which it becomes easy for political and social<br />

conservatism and white right-wing political violence (inter alia) to be justified, as was amply illustrated<br />

on various radio talk shows and in newspaper reports following the bombings in Soweto on the<br />

outskirts <strong>of</strong> Johannesburg, and Bronkhorstspruit in the province <strong>of</strong> Mpumalanga, allegedly<br />

perpetrated by right-wing supremacist groups at the end <strong>of</strong> 2002 (cf. Potgieter, 2002). Consider here,<br />

for example, the following article published by Associated Press (Nessman, 2002, n.p.):<br />

While the violence is condemned by all but the most extreme Afrikaners, many say it should send<br />

a message to the black-led government that it can no longer ignore their problems [...] ``There is a<br />

lot <strong>of</strong> frustration,'' said Pieter Mulder, leader <strong>of</strong> the right wing Freedom Front party. ``Slowly, we are<br />

losing out [...] I must be honest and say that we are moving in the wrong direction.'' [...] A poll<br />

published this year ... said 87 percent <strong>of</strong> Afrikaners felt racism against them was a serious<br />

problem.<br />

This leads to one <strong>of</strong> the principal arguments that I want to put forward here.<br />

The unwillingness and inability on the part <strong>of</strong> many <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>ns to acknowledge and deal with one<br />

<strong>of</strong> the most violent epochs in its history, namely the apartheid era, precludes any possibility <strong>of</strong><br />

genuine reconciliation amongst <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>ns, and consequently, allows for the perpetuation <strong>of</strong> the<br />

deep divisions in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n society (Duvenage, 1994). In the process, the door is left wide open<br />

for the repetition or re-enactment <strong>of</strong> various forms <strong>of</strong> political violence. Yes, the statistics indicate that<br />

with the advent <strong>of</strong> the current democratic dispensation political violence had decreased substantially<br />

(Alence, 1999). However, through the amnesia that has been allowed to develop in respect <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong><br />

17


<strong>Africa</strong>'s violent past, a space has perhaps been created for such violence to be re-inflicted on this<br />

country. In the words <strong>of</strong> Desmond Tutu, the Chairperson <strong>of</strong> the TRC:<br />

The ... reason amnesia simply will not do is that the past refuses to lie down quietly. It has an<br />

uncanny habit <strong>of</strong> returning to haunt one ... the past [must be] properly dealt with for the sake <strong>of</strong> the<br />

future (in Grunebaum-Ralph, 2001, p. 202).<br />

The Reconstruction and Development Programme<br />

Knox and Quirk (2000) argue that from the outset, the RDP was hard pressed to balance the need to<br />

eliminate the racialised inequalities in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n society, whilst ensuring minimal loss <strong>of</strong> economic<br />

privileges within the white community. Additionally, it had to satisfy the demands <strong>of</strong> global capital to<br />

limit social expenditure. By 1996, however, it became clear that, for a range <strong>of</strong> reasons, the<br />

government was not going to meet many <strong>of</strong> the RDP's targets within the envisaged time period; and<br />

during the same year, the RDP <strong>of</strong>fice was closed down (cf. Economist, 1996; Government Gazette<br />

No. 19403, 1998; Knox & Quirk, 2000). This was a heavy blow to the aspirations <strong>of</strong> many poor<br />

communities. Responding to the closure <strong>of</strong> the RDP <strong>of</strong>fice, Interfund (1996, in Knox & Quirk, 2000, p.<br />

187) noted:<br />

The symbolic importance <strong>of</strong> the RDP <strong>of</strong>fice as representative <strong>of</strong> the government's commitment to<br />

development has meant that the closure [<strong>of</strong> the <strong>of</strong>fice] is read as a signal that the government was<br />

now giving less visibility and focus to issues concerning development and more <strong>of</strong> a focus to the<br />

business <strong>of</strong> economics.<br />

The government's subsequent focus on its macro economic plan, namely, the Growth, Employment<br />

and Redistributive Strategy (GEAR), with its strong emphasis on fiscal conservatism and, therefore,<br />

on downscaling social spending, reinforced the growing impression that the basic developmental and<br />

corrective action values underlying the formulation <strong>of</strong> the RDP in fact had been relinquished (Knox &<br />

Quirk, 2000).<br />

With the apparent abandonment <strong>of</strong> the `equalising' principles <strong>of</strong> the RDP (Knox & Quirk, 2000), as<br />

well as the fact that the racialised poverty trends established during the apartheid era on the surface<br />

continue unaltered, it can be argued that the structural violence <strong>of</strong> apartheid remains firmly<br />

embedded in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n society. Thus, even though the statistics indicate that incidents <strong>of</strong> overt<br />

physical acts <strong>of</strong> political violence had decreased, at the level <strong>of</strong> `everyday practices' (cf. Bulhan,<br />

1985), it is continuing unabated, and in the process, further entrenching the divisions within <strong>South</strong><br />

<strong>Africa</strong>n society and laying the foundations for the re-emergence <strong>of</strong> the forms <strong>of</strong> overt political violence<br />

which this country hopes that it had buried in its past.<br />

Certainly, there is a range <strong>of</strong> noteworthy achievements that are associated with the TRC and the<br />

RDP. However, for the reasons outlined in this article and elsewhere (e.g. Knox & Quirk, 2000;<br />

Magwaza, 2001; SAIRR, 1999), these interventions have fallen short <strong>of</strong> what was required to address<br />

the ills inflicted by apartheid on <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n society. Furthermore, the fact that the violence <strong>of</strong> the<br />

past has not been dealt with adequately obviously leaves this country vulnerable to various new<br />

manifestations <strong>of</strong> violence (particularly political violence) in the future. If the recent spate <strong>of</strong> violent<br />

protests against the shameful lack <strong>of</strong> accommodation and municipal services experienced by indigent<br />

18


communities is anything to go by (see, for example, Johnson, 2005; SAPA, 2005) we are already<br />

seeing concrete evidence <strong>of</strong> this.<br />

CONCLUSION<br />

In a first instance, this article has attempted to illustrate that the statistics that we are wont to rely on<br />

frequently only present a partial glimpse <strong>of</strong> the phenomena that we wish to analyse and lay bare.<br />

Second, the article has attempted to provide a cursory examination <strong>of</strong> the two key interventions<br />

initiated by the post-apartheid government to deal with the violence <strong>of</strong> this country's past and present.<br />

While the link between the two substantive strands in this article is perhaps not sufficiently clearly<br />

articulated, and while this article is still very much a `work in progress', I hope that it will in some way<br />

contribute to extant discussions and debate on issues <strong>of</strong> collective violence and, more specifically, <strong>of</strong><br />

political violence.<br />

NOTES<br />

1. In this article, the term ``black'' is used as a collective term designating all those groups classified<br />

as `Indian' `Bantu/<strong>Africa</strong>n' and coloured' and who, as a consequence, were relegated to a<br />

subaltern status by the apartheid state. Given the diversity <strong>of</strong> all human groups, it goes without<br />

saying that while it might be expedient to employ the term ``black'' here, the group designated by<br />

the term should not be considered homogeneous.<br />

2. Compared to an estimated 3500 political fatalities for the period 1984 to 1989.<br />

3. Shortly before his death, David Webster had published an article on government-sponsored<br />

`death squads' and other forms <strong>of</strong> covert repression in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> (Amnesty International, 1992).<br />

REFERENCES<br />

Alence, R. (1999). The democratic transition and crime in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>: The record <strong>of</strong> the 1990s.<br />

Nedbank ISS Crime Index, 3(2), 16-20.<br />

Alence, R. & Pimstone, G. (1999). Crime and the 1999 election: Perceptions <strong>of</strong> voters. Nedbank ISS<br />

Crime Index, 3(1), 1-4.<br />

Amnesty International (1992). <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>: State <strong>of</strong> fear. Security force complicity in torture and<br />

political killings, 1990-1992. New York: Author.<br />

Budlender, D. (2000). Human development. In J. May (Ed.), Poverty and inequality in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>:<br />

Meeting the challenge (pp. 97-140). Cape Town: David Philip.<br />

Bulhan, H. A. (1985). Frantz Fanon and the psychology <strong>of</strong> oppression. New York: Plenum Press.<br />

Cassin, B., Cayla, O. & Salazar, P. (2004). PreÂsentation (Presentation). In B. Cassin, O. Cayla & P.<br />

19


Salazar (Eds), VeÂriteÂ, reÂconciliation, reÂparation (Truth, reconciliation and reparation) (pp. 13-26).<br />

Paris: Seuil.<br />

Chikane, F. (1986). Children in turmoil: The effects <strong>of</strong> unrest on township children. In S. Burman & P.<br />

Reynolds (Eds), Growing up in a divided society (pp. 333-344). Johannesburg: Ravan Press.<br />

Coleman, M. (1994). Analysis <strong>of</strong> research into the political violence <strong>of</strong> the apartheid state. In A.<br />

Minnaar, I. Liebenberg & C. Schutte (Eds), The hidden hand: Covert operations in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> (pp.<br />

135-148). Pretoria: HSRC.<br />

Degenaar, J. (1990). The concept <strong>of</strong> violence. Centre for Intergroup Studies Occasional Paper<br />

Series, 13, 427.<br />

Derrida, J. (2004). VersoÈhnung, ubuntu, pardon: Quel genre? (Reconciliation, ubuntu, and<br />

forgiveness: In what form?) In B. Cassin, O. Cayla & P. Salazar (Eds), VeÂriteÂ, reÂconciliation,<br />

reÂparation (Truth, reconciliation and reparation) (pp. 111-156). Paris: Seuil.<br />

Dixon, B. & Johns, L. (2001). Gangs, PAGAD & the state: Vigilantism and revenge violence in the<br />

Western Cape. CSVR Violence and Transition Series, 2, 1-74. Accessed on 13 July 2003.<br />

Dowdall, T. (1990). Working with children and their families in civil conflict situations. Centre for<br />

Intergroup Studies Occasional Paper Series, 13, 87-96.<br />

Duncan, N. & Rock, B. (1997). Children and violence. Quantifying the damage. In B. Rock (Ed.),<br />

Spirals <strong>of</strong> suffering (pp. 43-68). Pretoria: HSRC.<br />

Duvenage, P. (1994). Rethinking the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n history <strong>of</strong> violence and covert operations. In A.<br />

Minnaar, I. Liebenberg & C. Schutte (Eds), The hidden hand: Covert operations in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> (pp.<br />

125-134). Pretoria: HSRC.<br />

Economist, The (1996). Reconstruction and Development Programme abandoned. The Economist,<br />

n.p. Retrieved July 13, 2003, from http://www.ask.elibrary.com/login.asp.<br />

Foer, F. (1997). Post-apartheid <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>. Retrieved July 13, 2003, from http://www.slate.msn.com/<br />

id/ 1062.<br />

Government Gazette (1998). Republic <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> Government Gazette, Vol. 400, Number<br />

19403.<br />

Grunebaum-Ralph, H. (2001). Re-placing past, forgetting presents: Narrative, place, and memory in<br />

the time <strong>of</strong> the Truth and Reconciliation Commission. Research in <strong>Africa</strong>n Literatures, 32(3), 198-212.<br />

Human Rights Commission. (1993). Human rights review. Braamfontein: Author.<br />

Johnson, T. (2005). Mass protests against housing shortages in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>. World Socialist<br />

Website. Retrieved July 7, 2005, from http://www.wsws.org/articles/2005/jun2005/safr-j14.shtml.<br />

20


Knox, C. & Quirk, P. (2000). Peace building in Northern Ireland, Israel and <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>. Transition,<br />

transformation and reconciliation. London: MacMillan.<br />

Magwaza, A. (2001). Submissions to the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Truth and Reconciliation Commission:<br />

Reflections <strong>of</strong> a commissioner on the culpability <strong>of</strong> psychology. In N. Duncan, A. van Niekerk, C. de<br />

la Rey & M. Seedat (Eds), Race, racism, knowledge production and <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n psychology (pp.<br />

37-44). New York: Nova.<br />

May, J., Woolard, I. & Klasen, S. (2000). The nature and measure <strong>of</strong> poverty and inequality. In J. May<br />

(Ed.), Poverty and inequality in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>: Meeting the challenge (pp. 19-50). Cape Town: David<br />

Philip.<br />

Mkhize, H. (1993, September). Programme for mental health care for children exposed to violence: A<br />

case <strong>of</strong> the Children and Violence Project in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>. Paper presented at the Children, War and<br />

Persecution Congress, Hamburg.<br />

Mlazi, A. (1994, July 13). Bite the bullet if you want to drink in Vosloorust. The Star, p. 1.<br />

National Children's Rights Committee (NCRC) (1994). Voiceless victims: The impact <strong>of</strong> political<br />

violence on women and children. Braamfontein: Author.<br />

Nessman, R. (2002). Afrikaners feeling marginalized, disillusioned in the new<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>. Retrieved<br />

July 13, 2003, from http://aad.english.ucsb.edu/docs/ravinessman.html.<br />

Nkuta, Z. & Boyle, B. (2002). <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> hunts `race war' right-wingers after bombs.<br />

Forksherald.com. Retrieved July 13, 2003, from http://www.grandforks.com/mld/grandforks/<br />

4413608.htm. Accessed on 13 July 2003.<br />

Nott, G. (1994). The Webster Inquest and the CCB. In A. Minnaar, I. Liebenberg & C. Schutte (Eds),<br />

The hidden hand: Covert operations in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> (pp. 49-66). Pretoria: HSRC.<br />

Penn-Kekana, L. (1997, September). Gender violence in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>: Causes, effects and<br />

responses, Urbanisation and Health Newsletter, 34, 512.<br />

Potgieter, D. (2002). Wit bakkie was regses se groot motorbom vir L<strong>of</strong>tus (White pick-up: Rightwingers<br />

big car bomb for L<strong>of</strong>tus Sports Stadium). Net-Rapport, pp. 1-2. Retrieved March 28, 2003,<br />

from http://www.news24.com/rapport.<br />

Punamaki, R. (1987). Childhood under conflict. Research Report, 32. Tampereen: Tampere Peace<br />

Research Institute.<br />

Rabbani, F. F. (1994). The ANC's Reconstruction and Development Programme: A basic guide to the<br />

Reconstruction and Development Programme. Retrieved July 13, 2003, from http://www.sas.upenn.edu/<strong>Africa</strong>n_Studies/Govern_Political/ANC_Recon.html.<br />

RDP White Paper (1994). RDP White Paper. Retrieved July 7, 2005, from http://www.polity.org.za/<br />

html/govdocs/white_papers/rdpwhite.html.<br />

21


SAPA (2005, July 7). Protesters burn tyres, block freeway. The Star, p. 6.<br />

Schutte, C. (1994). How many third forces, <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>? In A. Minnaar, I. Liebenberg & C. Schutte<br />

(Eds), The hidden hand: Covert operations in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> (pp. 49-66). Pretoria: HSRC.<br />

Simpson, G. (1993). Explaining endemic violence in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>. Retrieved July 12, 2003, from<br />

http://www.csvr.org.za/papers/papendem.htm.<br />

Simpson, G. (1994). Business and endemic violence in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>: Surviving the disaster or<br />

managing the transition? Retrieved July 12, 2003, from http://www.csvr.org.za/ papers/ papbugs.htm<br />

<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Institute <strong>of</strong> Race Relations (SAIRR) (1999). <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n survey. 1998/1999.<br />

Johannesburg: SAIRR.<br />

<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Institute <strong>of</strong> Race Relations (SAIRR) (2000). <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n survey. 1999/2000.<br />

Johannesburg: SAIRR.<br />

Straker, G. (1994). Integrating <strong>Africa</strong>n and Western healing practices in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>. American<br />

Journal <strong>of</strong> Psychotherapy, 48(3), 455-467.<br />

Tshotsho, Z. (2005). The Reconstruction and Development Programme <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> and mental<br />

health <strong>of</strong> children. Retrieved July 7, 2005, from http://www.ispn-psych.org/html/what_s_africa2.html.<br />

UNICEF & NCRC (1993). Children and women in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>: A situation analysis. Johannesburg:<br />

Authors.<br />

World Health Organisation (WHO) (2002). World report on violence and health. Geneva: WHO.<br />

Zulu, P. (1994). Third force operations in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>. In A. Minnaar, I. Liebenberg & C. Schutte<br />

(Eds), The hidden hand: Covert operations in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> (pp. 114-174). Pretoria: HSRC.<br />

22


TRUTH, CONFESSIONS AND<br />

REPARATIONS: LESSONS FROM THE<br />

SOUTH AFRICAN TRUTH AND<br />

RECONCILIATION COMMISSION<br />

Garth Stevens 1<br />

Institute for Social and Health Sciences, <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong><br />

ABSTRACT<br />

Collective violence in the form <strong>of</strong> war, state-sponsored acts <strong>of</strong> terror and institutionalised human<br />

rights violations, continue to be centrally implicated in the high rates <strong>of</strong> death and disability across the<br />

globe in contemporary societies. Alongside this recognition we have witnessed the development <strong>of</strong><br />

ongoing economic, political and social initiatives aimed at preventing collective forms <strong>of</strong> violence and<br />

conflicts, and mediating against their long-term impacts and effects. To this end, post-conflict<br />

commissions have become a fairly well-established psychological, social and political institutional<br />

mechanism to address past atrocities; one <strong>of</strong> the most acclaimed exemplars is the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n<br />

Truth and Reconciliation Commission (TRC). This article reflects on the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n TRC, and<br />

highlights the challenges that it has faced in meeting three pivotal aims, namely the eliciting <strong>of</strong> truth,<br />

acting as a facilitating space for confessions related to human rights violations, and effecting<br />

reparative processes for the victims <strong>of</strong> such acts <strong>of</strong> violence. The article notes that while the TRC<br />

may be considered a success in the context <strong>of</strong> post-apartheid nation-building it falls short as a<br />

comprehensive strategy for just reconstruction in post-conflict contexts, since it tends to contribute to<br />

the construction <strong>of</strong> a notion <strong>of</strong> social healing without significant forms <strong>of</strong> social justice embedded<br />

within it.<br />

This article explores some <strong>of</strong> the salient lessons and challenges emerging from the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n<br />

Truth and Reconciliation Commission (TRC), as a strategy for peacemaking and peacebuilding in<br />

post-apartheid <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>. Given that a great deal has been written on the TRC, including a focus<br />

ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ<br />

1 Please direct all correspondence to Garth Stevens, Institute for Social and Health Sciences, <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, P.O. Box 1087, Lenasia, 1820,<br />

Johannesburg, <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>; Tel: +27 11 857 1142; Fax: +27 11 857 1770; E-mail: Steveg@unisa.ac.za.<br />

23


on the psychology <strong>of</strong> the Commission (Hamber, 1995a, 1995b; SAJP, 2000), the complicity <strong>of</strong> various<br />

sectors <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n society under apartheid (see Baldwin-Ragaven, de Gruchy & London, 1999,<br />

Magwaza, 2001), the methodologies employed within the process (Bundy, 2000), and reparations<br />

and nation-building after the TRC (James & van der Vijver, 2000; Motsemme & Ratele, 2002),<br />

several broad lessons can be drawn about the merits and limitations inherent to the TRC.<br />

As a broad social intervention the TRC represents, on the one hand, a successful approach to<br />

nation-building in the context <strong>of</strong> post-conflict transitionary societies (Villa-Vicencio, 2000). On the<br />

other hand, it could be argued that the TRC's contributions to constructing a homogenous national<br />

unity and a non-`racial' 1 democracy occurred at the expense <strong>of</strong> economic, social and psychological<br />

reparations to the majority <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>ns (van der Walt, Franchi & Stevens, 2003). While the<br />

extent to which the TRC was able to facilitate the revelation <strong>of</strong> gross human rights by individuals and<br />

various institutionalised sectors <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n society during apartheid is a credit to this process,<br />

its ideological orientation, structure and procedural form, methodological approach and philosophical<br />

underpinnings <strong>of</strong>ten hamstrung its potential as a tool to comprehensively address social justice in<br />

post-apartheid <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>. This article specifically explores the structural constraints <strong>of</strong> the TRC,<br />

the ambiguities related to subjective and objective understandings <strong>of</strong> memory and histories, and the<br />

challenges related to amnesty, reparations (or non-reparations) and social justice. Furthermore, I<br />

query the extent to which national unity has been forged by the TRC in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> since 1994, and<br />

examine whether the TRC has in fact contributed to the consolidation <strong>of</strong> a post-apartheid `racialised'<br />

social formation through structurally containing social blaming, demands for reparations and justice<br />

for atrocities committed during apartheid, and by avoiding issues related to the consequential<br />

inequalities and human rights violations <strong>of</strong> apartheid. Finally, the article argues that when such<br />

peacemaking and peacebuilding initiatives are adopted in other contexts, we need to be aware <strong>of</strong><br />

their ideological limitations and actively encourage that they operate within the frameworks <strong>of</strong><br />

international law, human rights and social justice in order to maximise their benefits for broad sectors<br />

<strong>of</strong> societies emerging from conflicts.<br />

THE TRC AS A PEACEMAKING AND PEACEBUILDING STRATEGY<br />

As one <strong>of</strong> the outcomes <strong>of</strong> the negotiated settlement between the dominant political powers that had<br />

reached a stalemate by 1990, the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n TRC emerged as a peacemaking and peacebuilding<br />

strategy. Suffla's work (2004) provides an instructive synopsis on the inter-related strategies <strong>of</strong><br />

peacemaking and peacebuilding and is reflected upon below. She argues that peacemaking is<br />

directed at reducing the occurrence and intensity <strong>of</strong> direct violence and involves a range <strong>of</strong><br />

preventative methods. Given that peacemaking is underpinned by the concept <strong>of</strong> conflict resolution, it<br />

is responsive to the values <strong>of</strong> peace, non-violence, empathy, utilises methods that promote dialogue,<br />

mutually beneficial outcomes, and acknowledges the influence <strong>of</strong> the social context within which<br />

conflict is located (see also Sanson & Bretherton, 2001; Wessells and Monteiro, 2001, cited in Suffla,<br />

2004). While peacemaking therefore appears to be unproblematic at a conceptual level, when<br />

applied to truth commissions as a broad socio-political and psychosocial intervention, it immediately<br />

raises certain tensions that may compromise the effectiveness <strong>of</strong> truth commissions to deliver on<br />

their implicit aims. Several authors (Crawford, 2000; de la Rey, 2001; Lederach, 1997) have noted<br />

24


that some <strong>of</strong> the key psychosocial imperatives that are identified as needing to be met in the<br />

aftermath <strong>of</strong> violent social conflict are the promotion <strong>of</strong> reconciliation and reconstruction. Here,<br />

reconciliation, truth, forgiveness and healing are foregrounded as being critical subjective elements to<br />

peacemaking, as they involve the recognition <strong>of</strong> victims' pain, an acknowledgement <strong>of</strong> wrongdoing by<br />

perpetrators, a willingness to acknowledge the truth, as well as a desire to <strong>of</strong>fer and accept<br />

forgiveness (Suffla, 2004). Some <strong>of</strong> the immediate political, ideological and philosophical questions<br />

that have however been raised by these assumptions are <strong>of</strong> course: Whose truth (and consequently,<br />

which history)? Reconciliation at what cost, especially if social justice and reconstruction are absent<br />

and if the balance <strong>of</strong> power is skewed between conflicting parties? Is forgiveness a social process or<br />

an individual process and can truth commissions facilitate this at a broad social level? Is the<br />

comprehensive attainment <strong>of</strong> these aims not dependent on the absence <strong>of</strong> a dominant hegemonic<br />

political discourse, or on political neutrality, and can truth commissions ever be politically neutral?<br />

Despite these questions and concerns, it is evident that the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n TRC did manage to fulfil<br />

some <strong>of</strong> these key imperatives associated with peacemaking, even if not fully.<br />

Suffla (2004) also suggests that unlike peacemaking, peacebuilding is the process that attempts to<br />

address structural violence in its various forms <strong>of</strong> social domination, political oppression and<br />

economic exploitation, and is therefore directed at the creation <strong>of</strong> material conditions conducive to<br />

social transformation, structural reconstruction, and the transformation <strong>of</strong> discourses that maintain<br />

oppression and exploitation. Through this process, a more critical discourse and consciousness is<br />

generated that not only challenges a conflictual status quo, but also squarely argues for peace to<br />

transcend the mere prevention and resolution <strong>of</strong> conflict, and to incorporate issues <strong>of</strong> social justice<br />

(Christie, 2001, cited in Suffla, 2004). More importantly, peacebuilding is ultimately directed at the<br />

creation <strong>of</strong> a social order that represents the antithesis <strong>of</strong> a conflictual status quo. Therefore, it is<br />

apparent that peacemaking and peacebuilding <strong>of</strong>ten occur simultaneously in their social application<br />

(Christie, Wagner & Winter, 2001). Peacebuilding efforts frequently begin to occur prior to<br />

peacemaking initiatives, and in fact <strong>of</strong>ten inform them. They may also occur during peacemaking<br />

initiatives, and continue to occur as an integral part <strong>of</strong> social transformation thereafter (Suffla, 2004).<br />

However, the construct <strong>of</strong> peacebuilding raises certain critical questions as to truth commissions'<br />

ability to fulfil such colossal social tasks. When peacebuilding discourses become formalised and<br />

embedded in newdispensations, to what extent can they retain critical independence or political<br />

neutrality? Can they be critical <strong>of</strong> the newor emergent status quo, or do they act in its service? To<br />

what extent is their ability to foster an alternative culture shaped by their emergence from a specific<br />

social and political context? While much <strong>of</strong> the TRC's work in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> can certainly be seen as<br />

peacemaking, the expanse <strong>of</strong> time over which it operated certainly served the function <strong>of</strong> shaping<br />

and consolidating a discourse <strong>of</strong> nation-building in post-apartheid <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, and thus can also be<br />

seen as a peacebuilding strategy. However, the degree to which it has successfully acted as a<br />

peacebuilding initiative is dealt with at length, later in the article.<br />

THE SOCIO-HISTORICAL CONTEXT OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN TRC<br />

While a great deal <strong>of</strong> international attention has focused on the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n TRC and its successes<br />

and/or failures, the actual concept <strong>of</strong> truth commissions emerged in the 1970s in Uganda, and gained<br />

25


greater prominence in Latin America in the 1980s. Generally, truth commissions are <strong>of</strong>ficial agencies<br />

that are sponsored by governments and/or international organisations to formally investigate and<br />

report on human rights violations that occur in specific countries or regions that have endured a<br />

period <strong>of</strong> social conflict. Truth commissions provide a forum for victims, relatives and even<br />

perpetrators wishing to give testimony and evidence <strong>of</strong> human rights abuses, thereby <strong>of</strong>fering<br />

psychological closure to those who experienced tragedies, and an account for past abuses. Truth<br />

commissions provide recommendations to prevent similar acts from recurring in future and aim to<br />

stimulate national reconciliation. After the first truth commission in 1974 in Uganda, several other<br />

countries employed this process, namely, the National Commission on the Disappeared in Argentina<br />

in 1983, the National Commission for Truth and Reconciliation in Chile in 1991, the Commission <strong>of</strong><br />

Inquiry in Chad in 1992, and the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Truth and Reconciliation Commission in 1998. While<br />

the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n TRC certainly drew on the Latin American examples to help shape its form and<br />

processes, there were various socio-historical factors and political imperatives that impacted on the<br />

choice, outcomes and effectiveness <strong>of</strong> the TRC as a peacemaking and peacebuilding strategy.<br />

The socio-political condition pre-dating the TRC in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> was one in which the ruling National<br />

Party, on the one hand, was unable to effect a victory over an increasingly militant resistance to the<br />

apartheid system from the liberation movement. In addition to this, the backdrop <strong>of</strong> sanctions and a<br />

flailing political economy rendered it impossible for the apartheid state to sustain its escalated<br />

oppression. The resistance movements, on the other hand, were unable to initiate a comprehensive<br />

revolution against the apartheid state for a range <strong>of</strong> objective and subjective political reasons.<br />

The National Party's choice <strong>of</strong> institutionalised racism, as embodied in the 1948 apartheid policy, was<br />

due to cumulative factors, but was extremely functional to the development <strong>of</strong> capitalism in <strong>South</strong><br />

<strong>Africa</strong>. The segregationist policies were partly a result <strong>of</strong> the historical development <strong>of</strong> `race' and<br />

class since the onset <strong>of</strong> colonialism in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, and directly related to the attempt to promote<br />

Afrikaner Nationalism and the interests <strong>of</strong> Afrikaner capital against international capital (Terreblanche<br />

& Nattrass, 1990). While the social impacts <strong>of</strong> these racist policies have been well-documented (see<br />

for example Terreblanche & Nattrass, 1990; Wolpe, 1988), the most important consideration for the<br />

segregationist choice in 1948 was clearly an economic one. As the largest producer <strong>of</strong> gold, <strong>South</strong><br />

<strong>Africa</strong> was clearly able to compete on the international capitalist market. Nevertheless, it did not<br />

possess the technological expertise and capital goods necessary to compete with major<br />

industrialised countries, with regard to a wide range <strong>of</strong> commodities. The only option for <strong>South</strong><br />

<strong>Africa</strong>n capital was therefore to compensate for this through the exploitation <strong>of</strong> cheap black labour.<br />

Apartheid policy was not only functional to capitalist development, but was imperative to its<br />

integration into the world capitalist economy. Protectionist strategies to realise the dream <strong>of</strong><br />

Volkskapitalisme became redundant, as Afrikaner capital and international capital became<br />

increasingly integrated (Callinicos, 1987; O'Meara, 1983).<br />

Apartheid capitalism flourished in the boom following the Second World War. Its incorporation into the<br />

world capitalist economy allowed it to benefit from the high growth rate experienced globally, but by<br />

the 1960s obvious signals appeared to highlight the fact that apartheid was becoming an obstacle to<br />

further capitalist development. Internal political instability and resistance from the liberation<br />

movements, <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>'s exclusion from the Commonwealth and the United Nations Arms<br />

embargo, all resulted in an immense withdrawal <strong>of</strong> international capital from <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> in the mid-<br />

26


1960s (Saul, 1986). By the 1970s, international capitalism was in an ever-deepening recession, and<br />

this impacted on <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> as well (Alexander, 1985). An organic economic and social crisis arose<br />

internally in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, because <strong>of</strong> the contradictions existing between the systems <strong>of</strong> racist<br />

domination and capitalist exploitation. Even though racism had been functional, and imperative to<br />

capitalist accumulation in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, it had reached a ceiling in its utility. Apartheid policy could no<br />

longer ensure the long-term interests <strong>of</strong> both national and international capital (Saul, 1986). The<br />

social crisis <strong>of</strong> apartheid capitalism resulted in greater internal opposition to the system <strong>of</strong> racist<br />

domination by the liberation movements, as well as repressive state responses, and created a<br />

political climate <strong>of</strong> instability. In addition, the large black working class had begun to organise itself<br />

into significant trade unions, and had strong links to the liberation movements. Internationally, this<br />

was supported by the growing anti-apartheid and pro-sanctions lobbies, and international investors<br />

became more and more reluctant to gamble on the fragile <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n political economy<br />

(Alexander, 1985; Saul, 1986; Wolpe, 1988).<br />

Political reforms implemented by the apartheid state were met with intense opposition from the<br />

liberation movements in the 1970s and the 1980s. Student, trade union and community-based<br />

struggles all escalated during this time, and culminated in the period <strong>of</strong> ungovernability in the 1980s<br />

(Brecker, 1994).<br />

The Congress Alliance (i.e. the <strong>Africa</strong>n National Congress and its affiliates, the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n<br />

Communist Party and the Congress <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Trade Unions) had become hegemonic within<br />

the liberation movements, and their political strategy was aimed primarily at the dismantling <strong>of</strong> the<br />

apartheid political apparatus. This was partly a result <strong>of</strong> strong nationalist ideologies that dominated<br />

the political agenda <strong>of</strong> the Alliance and informed its perspective <strong>of</strong> the National Question in <strong>South</strong><br />

<strong>Africa</strong> as being related to `race' and less so to the interface between `race' and class. However, an<br />

impasse between the liberation movements and the state occurred, as neither could gain an outright<br />

victory over the other. The collapse <strong>of</strong> the Soviet Union and the Eastern European Bloc represented<br />

an ideological victory for international capitalism. It was at this point that capital took the initiative, and<br />

through the National Party, entered into a Negotiated Settlement with the liberation movement Ð in<br />

particular, the Congress Alliance (Brecker, 1994). In addition, the resistance movements could no<br />

longer rely on sustainable funding and unconditional political assistance from international<br />

supporters, and their leadership found themselves dispersed nationally, in exile and languishing in<br />

apartheid jails.<br />

The settlement essentially involved the transition towards a non-`racial' democracy, through which<br />

<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n capitalism would be restructured without the structural obstacles <strong>of</strong> apartheid, and<br />

would be given a new lease <strong>of</strong> life. The result <strong>of</strong> this process was the first democratic elections in<br />

April 1994, which saw an overwhelming victory for the <strong>Africa</strong>n National Congress (Brecker, 1994).<br />

There was also an agreement to share power for the first five years <strong>of</strong> the transitional democracy,<br />

within a free-market framework. Minority rights were retained and white civil servants were allowed to<br />

retain their positions in the state bureaucratic structures. Amnesty was promised to all activists,<br />

politicians and soldiers, with the proviso that full disclosures be made with regard to their<br />

contributions to gross human rights violations and atrocities. It was out <strong>of</strong> this context that the <strong>South</strong><br />

<strong>Africa</strong>n TRC was born.<br />

27


The TRC certainly acted as a public peacemaking strategy that facilitated the recall and mourning <strong>of</strong><br />

a repressive and oppressive history in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>. It could also be argued that it was deeply<br />

embedded within the politics <strong>of</strong> negotiation, and allowed for a containing, structured environment and<br />

process for the victims <strong>of</strong> repression and oppression to voice their experiences without resorting to<br />

retributive justice <strong>of</strong>ten associated with purges and trials in post-conflict contexts. Perpetrators <strong>of</strong><br />

gross human rights violations were <strong>of</strong>fered amnesty in return for full disclosures <strong>of</strong> atrocities Ð a quid<br />

pro quo process in which perpetrators were protected from retributive justice in return for assistance<br />

in providing an account <strong>of</strong> atrocities that was likely to be initially contested, but would then hopefully<br />

become implicitly accepted as a collectively shared truth and history. Thus, the TRC represented<br />

itself as a structure that protected the rights <strong>of</strong> all groups in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> equally, if certain conditions<br />

were met, and was one embodiment <strong>of</strong> the political compromise <strong>of</strong> the political settlement. In this<br />

sense, the TRC may be characterised as attempting to fulfil a more restorative role that is<br />

interrogated later in this article. It was furthermore embedded in the politics <strong>of</strong> nationalism that had<br />

characterised both apartheid and hegemonic liberatory politics prior to the settlement. The TRC was<br />

infused with notions <strong>of</strong> nation-building, the new <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> and the rainbownation. It is therefore<br />

fairly clear that the TRC was not a politically neutral structure or process, but reflected the political<br />

histories <strong>of</strong> the major role players in the settlement, as well as the imperatives associated with the<br />

transition from apartheid to non-`racial' capitalist democracy.<br />

The TRC also acted as a peacebuilding strategy for those who envisaged the role <strong>of</strong> the new <strong>South</strong><br />

<strong>Africa</strong> to become increasingly integrated into the regional, continental and international economic and<br />

political arenas. It was critical to develop a stable socio-political structure that would attract foreign<br />

investment, and <strong>of</strong>fer long-term stability through the avoidance <strong>of</strong> high pr<strong>of</strong>ile trials, purges and civil<br />

conflict. The state's self-imposed structural adjustment programme in the form <strong>of</strong> GEAR (Growth,<br />

Employment and Redistribution), strict fiscal discipline, the abandonment <strong>of</strong> the Reconstruction and<br />

Development Programme (RDP), a mechanism <strong>of</strong> aid to the poor, and the TRC helped facilitate the<br />

construction <strong>of</strong> a politically, socially and economically viable <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> ready for incorporation into<br />

the global economy. For those who viewed these elements as the key imperatives facing postapartheid<br />

<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, the TRC was certainly a critical peacebuilding element that avoided<br />

addressing the contentious issues <strong>of</strong> land and wealth redistribution. So the settlement was<br />

characterised by costly political compromises and, as Marais (1998) notes, by costly economic and<br />

social compromises as well. Bundy (2000) suggests that the <strong>Africa</strong>n National Congress (ANC)<br />

strategically retreated from addressing these and other contentious socioeconomic issues in order to<br />

ensure that the society could be sustained through the transition from apartheid to non-`racial'<br />

capitalism/democracy, while Adam and Adam (2000) argue that one <strong>of</strong> the reasons for consciously<br />

glossing over certain contentious issues is the desire to draw upon the infrastructure and skills <strong>of</strong> the<br />

previous regime for the benefit <strong>of</strong> the future (van der Walt et al., 2003).<br />

While it would be remiss to reflect exclusively on the TRC as a mere tool that was politically and<br />

ideologically manipulated, thereby denying its own agency and positive contributions, it is apparent<br />

that as a peacemaking and peacebuilding strategy, the TRC was rooted within a very particular<br />

political and ideological discourse that would ultimately influence its outcome and impact. This can be<br />

more carefully identified within the form and processes <strong>of</strong> the TRC, and it is to this that we now turn<br />

our attention.<br />

28


LEGALISED STRUCTURE AND PROCEDURAL FORM OF THE TRC<br />

The promulgation <strong>of</strong> the Promotion <strong>of</strong> National Unity and Reconciliation Bill in 1995 formalised a 17-<br />

member commission to facilitate a truth and recovery process aimed at reconciliation (Suffla, 2004).<br />

The mandate <strong>of</strong> the TRC, as a statutory agent <strong>of</strong> national unity and reconciliation, was to:<br />

. establish as complete a picture as possible <strong>of</strong> the nature, causes and extent <strong>of</strong> past gross human<br />

rights violations;<br />

. provide reparation and rehabilitation to victims <strong>of</strong> abuse;<br />

. grant amnesty to perpetrators <strong>of</strong> human rights abuses who <strong>of</strong>fered full disclosure about the crimes<br />

that they had committed;<br />

. formulate a set <strong>of</strong> recommendations to the President with respect to the creation <strong>of</strong> institutions<br />

conducive to a stable and fair society and measures to prevent future human rights violations; and<br />

. compile a report publicising the work and findings <strong>of</strong> the TRC.<br />

To assist in the implementation <strong>of</strong> these objectives, the legislation established three committees<br />

within the TRC:<br />

1. Committee on Human Rights Violations: to conduct public hearings throughout the country.<br />

2. Committee on Amnesty: to consider applications for amnesty from those who had committed<br />

political crimes.<br />

3. Committee on Reparation and Rehabilitation <strong>of</strong> Victims: to formulate recommendations on how to<br />

implement a reparations policy.<br />

Through an act <strong>of</strong> parliament, the TRC became a legitimised and legalised institution that focused<br />

specifically on gross violations <strong>of</strong> human rights during the period between March 1960 and 11 May<br />

1994. The focus on gross human rights violations was defined and narrowed to include only victims<br />

<strong>of</strong> killing, torture, abduction and severe ill-treatment (van der Walt et al., 2003). Two critical<br />

implications arise from this pragmatic approach. First, the consequences <strong>of</strong> apartheid as a systemic<br />

form <strong>of</strong> oppression and human rights violations was not addressed overtly, but rather, the focus was<br />

on violations that would have been considered illegal, even under apartheid. Socio-economic<br />

disparities, socio-political marginalisation and the effects <strong>of</strong> legalised racism were essentially not the<br />

focus <strong>of</strong> inquiry. In addition to allowing for a denial <strong>of</strong> responsibility on the part <strong>of</strong> those at the head <strong>of</strong><br />

the apartheid state apparatus, this particular focus had the effect <strong>of</strong> locating the blame for apartheid<br />

atrocities solely in the illegal activities <strong>of</strong> a minority <strong>of</strong> individuals. Consequently, the TRC process<br />

resulted in many foot-soldiers <strong>of</strong> apartheid being identified and questioned, rather than placing the<br />

system <strong>of</strong> apartheid and its leardership on trial. Such a limited scope accorded to the TRC further<br />

negates the persistent and comprehensive manner in which apartheid undermined and continues to<br />

undermine black <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>ns at social, political, economic and personal levels. Second, with<br />

regard to the specific time-frame, an entire layer <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n society was essentially exonerated<br />

by default, and the foundations <strong>of</strong> the apartheid system received no overt attention by the TRC (van<br />

der Walt et al., 2003).<br />

With regard to the amnesty process, the TRC was specifically mandated to grant amnesty to<br />

perpetrators <strong>of</strong> human rights abuses who <strong>of</strong>fered full disclosure about the crimes that they had<br />

committed. While having the right to grant or deny amnesty, the TRC did not have the express<br />

mandate to prosecute in instances where amnesty was not granted. This matter was referred to the<br />

29


state prosecutorial services for further investigation and possible prosecution, and in effect the TRC<br />

then did not have a full and comprehensive judicial mandate. This left questions as to the ability <strong>of</strong><br />

the TRC to follow through on instances <strong>of</strong> gross human rights violations and the prosecution there<strong>of</strong>.<br />

In addition, where amnesty was granted, the Act expressly prevented any future civil cases or claims<br />

from being made by victims or the families <strong>of</strong> victims against perpetrators (e.g. the case <strong>of</strong> the Biko<br />

family that attempted to lodge civil proceedings against Steve Biko's self-confessed murderers).<br />

On a related note, many deponents who appeared in front <strong>of</strong> the TRC were angered by the inability<br />

<strong>of</strong> the TRC to act in regard to reparations. The government reserved the prerogative to act on the<br />

TRC's recommendations regarding reparations (Burton, 2000). The considered primary mode <strong>of</strong><br />

reparations had been <strong>of</strong> a monetary nature. In addition, community reparations and symbolic<br />

reparations (e.g. memorials) were also considered. While the financial reparations would be welcome<br />

for many, others have questioned the morality <strong>of</strong> such a process.<br />

Furthermore, while there have been suggestions as to how to archive the TRC material and to place<br />

it squarely in the public domain to acknowledge those who suffered under the yolk <strong>of</strong> apartheid,<br />

issues <strong>of</strong> social justice remain. Many perpetrators continue to function with absolute impunity in postapartheid<br />

<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> Ð an understandably sore point for victims, survivors and their families.<br />

UNSTATED AND IMPLIED MANDATES OF THE TRC<br />

Even though the stated intent <strong>of</strong> the TRC is clear from its mandate, there are several unstated<br />

intentions and consequences <strong>of</strong> this process.<br />

Facilitating hope and optimism<br />

van der Walt et al. (2003) argue that owing to the future-orientated strategies that had been<br />

employed in the transitional compromise, a discourse <strong>of</strong> hope and optimism had to be propagated.<br />

This discourse <strong>of</strong> national unity, that concealed socio-economic disparities (Bundy 2000), is captured<br />

by Desmond Tutu's (1997) rainbownation. Premised upon this compromise, the TRC needed to<br />

promote nation-building in a manner that served inadvertently (and at times advertently) as a<br />

concealment for the structural deficiencies <strong>of</strong> the political compromise. In the sense that this<br />

discourse needed to sustain a country through its transition, some writers have argued that the<br />

decision by the TRC to follow this path was both pragmatic and successful (Boraine, 2000, Villa-<br />

Vicencio, 2000) in so far as it delayed controversy and conflict, and allowed the nation to work<br />

through a difficult past.<br />

However, if these strategies prevented economic and social redress <strong>of</strong> apartheid inequalities by<br />

creating an amnesia, then the TRC can certainly be critiqued for being complicit in deferring and<br />

avoiding the trial and prosecution <strong>of</strong> those responsible for atrocities committed during apartheid on<br />

the one hand, and the redistribution <strong>of</strong> wealth and land on the other.<br />

Constructing memory and history<br />

At the level <strong>of</strong> memory and history, the TRC was not mandated with inscribing an <strong>of</strong>ficial history, but it<br />

30


certainly functioned as a mechanism to interpolate subjects into a process in which collective identity<br />

and collective memory could be contested, and then broadly consensually defined. So by<br />

symbolising the experience <strong>of</strong> discontent by the majority <strong>of</strong> black <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>ns in processes such<br />

as the TRC, in which there was an obsession with history-making and nation-building (van der Walt<br />

et al., 2003), the TRC process facilitated a context in which the `racial' and socio-economic inequities<br />

<strong>of</strong> the apartheid legacy that were to some extent negated in the transition from apartheid to<br />

democracy, could remain invisible. The process <strong>of</strong> writing history (whether <strong>of</strong>ficial or not) and<br />

constructing memory is political. In particular, an attempt to construct a so-called collective memory,<br />

speaks <strong>of</strong> the agenda to construct a collective identity. Under the rubric <strong>of</strong> reconciliation, a country<br />

divided by the social, economic, `racial' and political policy <strong>of</strong> apartheid was asked to forge a<br />

nationalism (and therefore a national identity) based on a consensus <strong>of</strong> how the apartheid past was<br />

to be remembered.<br />

Collective identity and memory speak to the dominant understandings <strong>of</strong> the past that are shared by<br />

the vast majority <strong>of</strong> those inhabiting a state. While Adam and Adam (2000) correctly point out that it is<br />

nonsensical to assume collective understandings to be absolute and homogenous, and that at best<br />

they can be figurative, this process <strong>of</strong> forging a homogenous collective understanding did occur to<br />

some extent within the TRC, becoming a factual commonplace among many in contemporary <strong>South</strong><br />

<strong>Africa</strong>.<br />

However, at stake in collective remembering are subject positions <strong>of</strong> the diverse populace and for the<br />

TRC to successfully nationalise collective understandings <strong>of</strong> the past to some extent, <strong>of</strong>ten translated<br />

into enormous sacrifice at the individual level. What began as an exercise in the establishment <strong>of</strong> a<br />

collective memory also partially translated into distortions <strong>of</strong> personal memories or personal<br />

forgetting. Where the establishment <strong>of</strong> a collective memory was resisted, those who maintained the<br />

integrity <strong>of</strong> their identity and memories risked incomprehension in the new array <strong>of</strong> social<br />

relationships. The meta-communication embedded within the TRC implied a new form <strong>of</strong> social<br />

marginalisation because one either had to become a member <strong>of</strong> the new<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, or remain<br />

alienated within it (van der Walt et al., 2003).<br />

Authors such as Villa-Vicencio (2000) argue that the un<strong>of</strong>ficial construction <strong>of</strong> a collective memory<br />

and history was not the purview <strong>of</strong> the TRC. He suggests that the resultant report was an account in<br />

which multiple voices and narratives were represented in a contested manner, and deliberately<br />

served as an incomplete record that had a dialogical outcome in a social formation that sorely<br />

needed it. However, Bundy (2000) and Posel (1999) point out that these personal histories were not<br />

included at the time <strong>of</strong> the actual writing <strong>of</strong> the document, and it appears that while narrative, social<br />

and healing truths were used in the hearings, the TRC Final Report presented itself as a factually<br />

true document, devoid <strong>of</strong> these subjective elements (van der Walt et al., 2003).<br />

Accommodating subjective and objective disclosures<br />

Within the TRC process, subjective accounts <strong>of</strong> personal narratives and experiences were<br />

accommodated alongside more objective, pre-recorded, written statements. For Bundy (2000), the<br />

31


TRC process ``represents a structurally fragmented historical account, in which the contradictory pulls<br />

<strong>of</strong> the TRC's mandate exact a toll both epistemological and methodological'' (p.13).<br />

While this appears to be an appropriate assessment given the contradictory nature <strong>of</strong> the stated and<br />

unstated mandates <strong>of</strong> the TRC, it appears that this vacillation also became strategically useful as the<br />

TRC attempted to meet its tasks <strong>of</strong> peacemaking and peacebuilding. On the one hand, personal<br />

experiences <strong>of</strong> victims and perpetrators needed to be heard as part <strong>of</strong> a peacemaking strategy, but<br />

on the other hand, these needed to be contained in a manner that could be integrated into a coherent<br />

collective history that would promote nation-building.<br />

So the structure <strong>of</strong> the TRC straddled both judicial and reconciliatory procedures. This resulted in the<br />

quasi-judicial appearance <strong>of</strong> the hearings, in which the human faces <strong>of</strong> trauma were juxtaposed<br />

against the objective judicial process in a court-like setting. Antagonists to this process argued that<br />

this blurred the TRC's focus (van Zyl Slabbert, 2000) and that it failed to instill the respect for the law<br />

that was required in the new <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> (Bundy, 2000; Jeffery, 1999; Neier, 1998). Those in favour<br />

<strong>of</strong> this compromise argued that it allowed for a human component to emerge in the hearings, and that<br />

this was what the country needed for reconciliation to occur (Boraine, 2000; Villa-Vicencio, 2000).<br />

However, this procedure within the TRC contributed to a silencing <strong>of</strong> the `racialised' macro-economic<br />

inequalities pervading <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, and the subjective experiences <strong>of</strong> the testifiers were partially<br />

foregrounded at points. The imperatives <strong>of</strong> addressing the macro-economic consequences <strong>of</strong> the<br />

systematised, socio-politically entrenched oppression <strong>of</strong> apartheid were subordinated to those <strong>of</strong><br />

producing a unifying national archive. Personal testimony was the primary mechanism through which<br />

this was attained, but only when such testimony appropriated the discourse <strong>of</strong> nation-building that<br />

permeated the TRC. When deponents deviated from this, certain constraints were <strong>of</strong>ten imposed<br />

upon them. van der Walt (1999) suggests that this forced testifiers to depart from the point <strong>of</strong> the<br />

experiences, and instead to speak in the language and discourse <strong>of</strong> the TRC. He examined the<br />

extent to which survivors <strong>of</strong> human rights violations were allowed to speak when operating outside <strong>of</strong><br />

the dominant discourses <strong>of</strong> truth and reconciliation, and found that when using the political rhetoric<br />

salient to the TRC's agenda <strong>of</strong> nation-building, testifiers were allowed to speak longer and with fewer<br />

interruptions than when they focused on other aspects <strong>of</strong> their subjective experience <strong>of</strong> the trauma.<br />

When victims grappled with the emotions engendered by their narratives, the TRC panel would<br />

frequently respond by cross-examining testifiers, and refer the victim to his or her recorded<br />

statement. While this may be accounted for in part by panelists acting clinically and callously in the<br />

interest <strong>of</strong> self-preservation when faced with the immense trauma <strong>of</strong> the testifiers, it is also apparent<br />

that documents such as the recorded statements were given greater validity than the testimony itself<br />

at certain points. The tensions between personalised and subjective testimonies and objective judicial<br />

truth mentioned above clearly represent one <strong>of</strong> the major challenges <strong>of</strong> the TRC process at a<br />

methodological and philosophical level.<br />

Beyond this, there appeared to be implicit attempts to institutionalise subjective and individualised<br />

processes and to re-package them as collective, objective strategies for reconciliation. Here the<br />

covert religiose underpinnings <strong>of</strong> the TRC are a case in point and are reflected in statements such as<br />

Revealing is Healing. Symbolically, the TRC became the confessional, and its commissioners the<br />

symbolic interceders who were able to grant absolution or suggest a certain level <strong>of</strong> penance. A<br />

32


similar psychological construction also pervaded the TRC process in which cathartic expressions <strong>of</strong><br />

atrocities committed were viewed as a step towards healing the nation. While the latter two<br />

underpinnings certainly have significant merit in peace promotion and reconciliation, the result in this<br />

instance is more complex, contributing to an obfuscation <strong>of</strong> the structural damages <strong>of</strong> apartheid at<br />

more insidious levels, and tend to bolster the notion that atrocities committed during apartheid were<br />

the acts <strong>of</strong> crazed individuals and that the effects were only felt by individual victims. In so doing, the<br />

system <strong>of</strong> apartheid was vilified, but essentially managed to remain scot-free. Associated with this,<br />

was the notion <strong>of</strong> forgiveness. While some authors argue that forgiveness can be enacted at a group<br />

level by a victimised social category if the perpetrating social group takes collective responsibility for<br />

their acts (Bhargava, 2000), several questions arise. Firstly, to what extent can and will groups take<br />

collective responsibility and likewise, grant forgiveness, especially given the heterogeneity <strong>of</strong> their<br />

lived experiences? Secondly, would such a polarisation have been consistent with the TRC's focus<br />

on creating sameness rather than difference in the context <strong>of</strong> post-apartheid nation-building? Thirdly,<br />

was it possible for the TRC in any way to structurally facilitate or impose such processes <strong>of</strong> collective<br />

responsibility and forgiveness? In each instance, the inherent difficulties with infusing forgiveness into<br />

such processes related to collective responsibility are apparent. This does not imply that forgiveness<br />

is not central to reconciliation, but there needs to be an acknowledgement that forgiveness is <strong>of</strong>ten<br />

premised on the personal motives and subjective interpretations <strong>of</strong> social experiences <strong>of</strong> individuals,<br />

and social categories in their entirety cannot simply be compelled through moral argument to take<br />

collective responsibility and <strong>of</strong>fer collective forgiveness. Morality <strong>of</strong> course is also socially<br />

constructed, embedded in political and ideological discourses, and may therefore be contested. In the<br />

case <strong>of</strong> the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n TRC, this problematic contributed to an emphasis on individuals to take<br />

responsibility and in turn, <strong>of</strong>fer forgiveness (e.g. the case <strong>of</strong> the parents <strong>of</strong> a white American<br />

exchange student, Amy Biehl, who was killed at a political rally, and whose parents publicly forgave<br />

her killers). Social processes resulting in repression, oppression and violence were proverbially let <strong>of</strong>f<br />

the hook.<br />

CONFESSIONS, AMNESTY, REPARATIONS AND SOCIAL JUSTICE<br />

The process <strong>of</strong> granting amnesty was contingent on full disclosures being made by those appearing<br />

in front <strong>of</strong> the TRC, with regard to gross human rights violations occurring in the context <strong>of</strong> political<br />

motivations (van der Vijver, 2000). However, this amnesty prevents any civil case or claim being<br />

made against perpetrators in future. Here, a case in point is the murder <strong>of</strong> the Black Consciousness<br />

leader, Steven Bantu Biko. While Biko's murderers confessed to the killing in all its gory detail, when<br />

the family attempted to institute civil action against them, this was denied. Monetary compensation in<br />

this instance was certainly not sufficient, and social justice appeared to be absent in this case. The<br />

process <strong>of</strong> amnesty granting could also have potentially been combined with other forms <strong>of</strong> censure,<br />

(if not prosecution), such as preventing those found to be involved in gross human rights violations as<br />

being unfit to stand for any <strong>of</strong>ficial <strong>of</strong>fice in the new dispensation. Rather, many self-confessed killers<br />

and torturers, or the leadership directing such acts, remain at large and in positions <strong>of</strong> authority in the<br />

new dispensation.<br />

A further example <strong>of</strong> the difficulties with the amnesty process can be seen in the challenges<br />

33


associated with Dr. Wouter Basson (Burger & Gould, 2002), the apartheid regime's most highlyranked<br />

chemical weapons expert. After repeated and failed attempts by the TRC to gain information<br />

from Dr. Basson on his activities during apartheid, the matter was eventually forwarded to the state<br />

prosecutorial services. Dr. Basson was put on trial, and despite compelling anecdotal evidence, he<br />

was acquitted <strong>of</strong> all charges after a 30-month long trial in which the state failed to conclusively prove<br />

his guilt. The cost <strong>of</strong> the trial was estimated at US$2 million at the time, and given the adverse<br />

international press coverage, the hefty costs and challenges facing prosecution teams in this area, a<br />

minimal number <strong>of</strong> successful trials have occurred for perpetrators <strong>of</strong> gross human rights violations<br />

(most <strong>of</strong> whom were low-level functionaries) who were not <strong>of</strong>fered amnesty.<br />

With regard to reparations, these were recently decided upon by the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n government. Of<br />

the US$375 million recommended by the TRC to be paid as reparations to the 22 000 testifiers, the<br />

government has only authorised the payment <strong>of</strong> US$74 million Ð less than 20% <strong>of</strong> the original<br />

recommendation (Michael, 2003). While symbolic and community reparations will be an important<br />

step beyond monetary compensation, these are occurring slowly and other forms <strong>of</strong> reparations have<br />

yet to be discussed. For example, given the levels <strong>of</strong> trauma excised through the TRC process, more<br />

comprehensive health and mental health strategies could certainly have been generated. While<br />

victim empowerment and <strong>of</strong>fender-victim dialoguing has been established in some instances, victim<br />

support services have not been established as a sustained effort (see for example, Stauffer and<br />

Hamber, 1995). In addition, even though the Reconstruction and Development Programme (RDP) <strong>of</strong><br />

the new <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n government was in part construed as a socio-economic measure aimed at<br />

reparations for the majority <strong>of</strong> the black population, its intentions were unattainable in the context <strong>of</strong><br />

the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n and global economy from the start (Stevens, 1996), and it has now effectively been<br />

abandoned. Finally, questions as to the success <strong>of</strong> the TRC in promoting lasting reconciliation<br />

through the process <strong>of</strong> restorative social justice remain, and this scepticism is supported by an array<br />

<strong>of</strong> empirical studies that have shown contrary findings (see for example, Hamber, 1997).<br />

A CRITICAL APPRAISAL<br />

At the level <strong>of</strong> its own internal mandate, the TRC certainly went a long way to meeting its stated<br />

objectives. Over 22 000 people testified in hearings before the TRC, and information pertaining to<br />

gross human rights violations that had occurred under apartheid emerged for the first time into the<br />

public domain. The extent <strong>of</strong> the accounts was in some way more than what many had ever<br />

anticipated and certainly helped to contribute to a more complex set <strong>of</strong> social histories that had until<br />

then not been acknowledged within the public sphere. Furthermore, more than 6000 people applied<br />

for amnesty within the framework <strong>of</strong> the TRC Ð certainly a significant number <strong>of</strong> people who<br />

acknowledged the need to take some degree <strong>of</strong> responsibility for their deeds during the apartheid<br />

years (SATRC, 1998).<br />

However, because peacemaking and peacebuilding strategies such as the TRC are embedded within<br />

and emerge out <strong>of</strong> pre-existing conflictual social conditions, they are themselves invariably politically<br />

and ideologically influenced. In the case <strong>of</strong> the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n TRC, the politics and economics <strong>of</strong><br />

negotiation and compromise became the hegemonic ideological discourse on which the TRC was<br />

premised and so severely constrained the potential impact <strong>of</strong> the TRC. For instance the issue <strong>of</strong><br />

34


eparations was heavily influenced by the economic imperatives <strong>of</strong> post-apartheid <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>.<br />

Despite the TRC's valuable recommendations, the reduced one-<strong>of</strong>f payment to victims <strong>of</strong> apartheid<br />

can only be seen as a token form <strong>of</strong> economic reparation, and the ANC government also vehemently<br />

opposed the idea <strong>of</strong> imposing a wealth tax on business. Furthermore, attempts to lodge class action<br />

lawsuits against several multinationals have been met with absolute antagonism from the state,<br />

arguing that it is bad for business (Michael, 2003).<br />

While the TRC certainly contributed to forgiveness, healing and reconciliation for many individuals,<br />

and countless others probably benefited from the process vicariously, many <strong>of</strong> the structural<br />

inequities arising out <strong>of</strong> apartheid remain salient in contemporary <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n society.<br />

Reconciliation is unlikely to be experienced as a widespread phenomenon when social relations<br />

remain fundamentally unequal in post-conflict contexts.<br />

As this article has attempted to draw out some <strong>of</strong> the most salient lessons and challenges <strong>of</strong> the<br />

<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n TRC, it is fair to state that as an institutionalised form <strong>of</strong> peacemaking and<br />

peacebuilding, the TRC has had mixed results and impacts, (depending on the ideological position<br />

that one holds in contemporary <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n society). However, despite the critique embedded in<br />

the above argument, there is no doubt that truth commissions have a potentially significant role to<br />

play in social transition from conflict to peace, and as such should be supported. Nevertheless, truth<br />

commissions only provide one partial strategy for peacemaking and peacebuilding in post-conflict,<br />

transitionary societies. Ash (2003) refers to purges, trials and history lessons (e.g. truth commissions)<br />

as potential tools to assist such societies. While this article has dealt with the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n TRC as a<br />

form <strong>of</strong> history lesson, the concept <strong>of</strong> social justice is likely to require elements <strong>of</strong> restorative,<br />

retributive and reparative mechanisms <strong>of</strong> justice. Even though truth commissions may have the<br />

potential to fulfil objectives related to restorative justice, trials may be necessary for those who have<br />

clearly committed crimes against humanity, and purges may be vital to prevent those complicit in acts<br />

<strong>of</strong> human rights violations from ever holding public <strong>of</strong>fice again. The success <strong>of</strong> truth commissions is<br />

also dependent upon historical adversaries holding similar levels <strong>of</strong> power within a society (i.e. where<br />

the balance <strong>of</strong> forces are more equitably distributed), and concrete strategies that provide social,<br />

economic and political redress for those who have been marginalised. In <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, despite the<br />

limited economic redress, the political and moral balance <strong>of</strong> forces had shifted to a level conducive to<br />

peacemaking and peacebuilding. Political and social consensus had been broadly attained in support<br />

<strong>of</strong> the TRC, thereby ensuring some degree <strong>of</strong> legitimacy for the process and its final outcomes,<br />

despite its limitations (e.g. even though historical accounts were contested during the hearings, the<br />

final report <strong>of</strong> the TRC appears to have generated minimal discontent from broad cross-sections <strong>of</strong><br />

the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n population). Wherever truth commissions do occur, they should not however be<br />

romanticised, but thoughtfully premised on the imperatives facing a particular social formation in<br />

nation-building, as well as on the universally accepted principles <strong>of</strong> social justice, international law<br />

and human rights (van der Vijver, 2000). So in the context <strong>of</strong> globalisation, wars and conflicts the role<br />

<strong>of</strong> international communities in ensuring that these universal principles are promoted within truth<br />

commissions will become increasingly important, especially as we attempt to hold all those<br />

responsible for wars, conflicts and human rights atrocities accountable on an international scale.<br />

35


ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS<br />

I would like to thank Clinton van der Walt and Vije Franchi, colleagues with whom I previously<br />

collaborated on a similar topic, and whose seminal ideas are reflected in this paper.<br />

NOTES<br />

1. The placing <strong>of</strong> words or concepts between single quotation marks generally indicates that its<br />

validity is being queried, and suggests that the meaning broadly ascribed to the concept or word<br />

is not accepted by the author. With reference to concepts related to racism, it is primarily a critical<br />

discursive strategy to avoid unwittingly reproducing essentialised notions <strong>of</strong> distinctly separate<br />

and unequal biological races and associated racialising processes.<br />

REFERENCES<br />

Adam, H. & Adam, K. (2000). The politics <strong>of</strong> memory in a divided society. In W. James & D. P. van<br />

der Vijver (Eds), After the TRC: Reflections on truth and reconciliation in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> (pp. 32-47).<br />

Cape Town: David Phillip.<br />

Alexander, N. (1985). Sowthe wind. Johannesburg: Skotaville.<br />

Ash, T.G. (2003). Future <strong>of</strong> the past. Hindustan Times, April 11.<br />

Baldwin-Ragaven, L., de Gruchy, J. & London, L. (1999). An ambulance <strong>of</strong> the wrong colour. Health<br />

pr<strong>of</strong>essionals, human rights and ethics in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>. Rondebosch: UCT Press.<br />

Bhargava, R. (2000). Restoring decency to barbaric societies. In R. Kotberg & D. Thompson (Eds),<br />

The morality <strong>of</strong> truth commissions (pp. 45-66). New Jersey: Princeton <strong>University</strong> Press.<br />

Boraine, A. (2000). The language <strong>of</strong> potential. In W. James & D. P. van der Vijver (Eds), After the<br />

TRC: Reflections on truth and reconciliation in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> (pp.73-81). Cape Town: David Phillip.<br />

Brecker, C. (1994). Left faces new challenge. International Viewpoint, 257, 6-12.<br />

Bundy, C. (2000). The beast <strong>of</strong> the past. In W. James & D. P. van der Vijver (Eds), After the TRC:<br />

Reflections on truth and reconciliation in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> (pp.9-20). Cape Town: David Phillip.<br />

Burger, M. & Gould, C. (2002). Secrets and lies. Cape Town: Zebra Press.<br />

Burton, M. (2000). Reparation, amnesty and a national archive. In W. James & L. van der Vijver<br />

(Eds), After the TRC: Reflections on truth and reconciliation in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> (pp. 109-114). Cape<br />

Town: David Philip.<br />

Callinicos, L. (1987). Working life 1886-1940. Johannesburg: Ravan Press.<br />

Christie, D.J., Wagner, R.V. & Winter, D.D. (2001). Peace, conflict and violence: Peace psychology<br />

for the 21st century. New Jersey: Prentice Hall.<br />

36


Crawford, N.C. (2000). The passion <strong>of</strong> world politics: Propositions on emotions and emotional<br />

relationships. International Security, 24(4), 116-156.<br />

de la Rey, C. (2001). Reconciliation in divided societies. In D.J. Christie, R.V. Wagner & D.D. Winter<br />

(Eds), Peace, conflict and violence: Peace psychology for the 21st century (pp. 251-261). New<br />

Jersey: Prentice Hall.<br />

Hamber, B. (1997). Reflecting on the truth: Has the media coverage <strong>of</strong> the TRC changed the way the<br />

public sees itself, its history and its responsibility? Paper presented at the TRC and Human Rights<br />

Journalism in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> Workshop, Rosebank Hotel, Johannesburg, <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, 3 October.<br />

Hamber, B. E. (1995a). Dealing with the past and the psychology <strong>of</strong> reconciliation: A psychological<br />

perspective <strong>of</strong> the Truth and Reconciliation Commission. Occasional Paper. Johannesburg, <strong>South</strong><br />

<strong>Africa</strong>: The Centre for the Study <strong>of</strong> Violence & Reconciliation.<br />

Hamber, B. E. (1995b). Do sleeping dogs lie? The psychological implications <strong>of</strong> the Truth and<br />

Reconciliation Commission in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>. Occasional Paper. Johannesburg, <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>: The<br />

Centre for the Study <strong>of</strong> Violence & Reconciliation.<br />

James, W. & van der Vijver, L. (Eds) (2000). After the TRC: Reflections on truth and reconciliation in<br />

<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>. Cape Town: David Philip.<br />

Jeffery, A. (1999). The truth about the Truth Commission. Johannesburg: <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Institute <strong>of</strong><br />

Race Relations.<br />

Lederach, J.P. (1997). Building peace: Sustainable reconciliation in divided societies. Washington,<br />

DC: United States Institute <strong>of</strong> Peace.<br />

Magwaza, A. (2001). Submissions to the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Truth and Reconciliation Commission: The<br />

reflections <strong>of</strong> a commissioner on the culpability <strong>of</strong> psychology. In N. Duncan, A. van Niekerk, C. de la<br />

Rey & M. Seedat (Eds), Race, racism, knowledge production and psychology in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> (pp. 37-<br />

44). New York: Nova Science Publishers, Inc.<br />

Marais, H. (1998). <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>: Limits to change: The political economy <strong>of</strong> transition. Cape Town:<br />

UCT Press.<br />

Michael, M.T. (2003). Moment <strong>of</strong> truth. World Press ReviewOnline, May 2. Retrieved April 15, 2003,<br />

from http://www.worldpress.org/<strong>Africa</strong>/1077.cfm.<br />

Motsemme, N. & Ratele, K. (2002). Losing life and re-making nation: The Truth and Reconciliation<br />

Commission. In N. Duncan, P.D. Gqola, M. H<strong>of</strong>meyer, T. Shefer, F. Malunga & M. Mashige (Eds),<br />

Discourses on difference. Discourses on oppression (pp. 407-426). Cape Town: CASAS.<br />

Neier, A. (1998). War crimes: Brutality, genocide, terror and the struggle for justice. New York: Times<br />

Books.<br />

O'Meara, D. (1983). Volkskapitalisme. Braamfontein: Ravan Press.<br />

37


Posel, D. (1999). The TRC Report: What kind <strong>of</strong> history? What kind <strong>of</strong> truth? Paper presented at the<br />

Wits History Workshop and the Centre for the Study <strong>of</strong> Violence and Reconciliation Conference,<br />

TRC: Commissioning the Past, June 1999, Johannesburg, <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>.<br />

SAJP (2000). Perspectives on the Truth and Reconciliation Commission. <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Journal <strong>of</strong><br />

Psychology, Special Issue, 30(1), 1-59.<br />

Sanson, A. & Bretherton, D. (2001). Conflict resolution: Theoretical and practical issues. In D.J.<br />

Christie, R.V. Wagner & D.D. Winter (Eds), Peace, conflict and violence: Peace psychology for the<br />

21st century (pp. 193-209). New Jersey: Prentice Hall.<br />

Saul, J.S. (1986). Introduction: The revolutionary prospect. In J.S. Saul & S. Gelb (Eds), The crisis in<br />

<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> (pp. 9-52). New York: Monthly Review Press.<br />

<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Truth and Reconciliation Commission (SATRC) (1998). Truth and Reconciliation<br />

Commission <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> Report. Cape Town: Author.<br />

Stauffer, C. & Hamber, B. (1995). Putting a face on the past: Survivor-<strong>of</strong>fender mediation and the<br />

Truth and Reconciliation Commission. Occasional Paper. Johannesburg, <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>: The Centre for<br />

the Study <strong>of</strong> Violence & Reconciliation.<br />

Stevens, G. (1996). The `racialised' discourses <strong>of</strong> a group <strong>of</strong> black parents and adolescents in a<br />

Western Cape community. Unpublished masters thesis. <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> the Western Cape, Bellville,<br />

<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>.<br />

Suffla, S. (2004). Peacemaking and peacebuilding. In L. Swartz, C. de la Rey & N. Duncan (Eds),<br />

Psychology (pp. 313-322). Cape Town: Oxford <strong>University</strong> Press.<br />

Terreblanche, S. & Nattrass, N. (1990). A periodisation <strong>of</strong> the political economy from 1910. In N.<br />

Nattrass & E. Ardington (Eds), The political economy <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> (pp. 6-23). Cape Town: Oxford<br />

<strong>University</strong> Press.<br />

Tutu, D. (1997). Foreword. In A. Boraine, J. Levy & R. Scheffer (Eds), Dealing with the past: Truth<br />

and reconciliation in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> (pp. vii-viii). Cape Town: IDASA.<br />

van der Vijver, L. (2000). The amnesty process. In W. James & L. van der Vijver (Eds), After the<br />

TRC: Reflections on truth and reconciliation in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> (pp. 128-139). Cape Town: David Philip.<br />

van der Walt, C., Franchi, V. & Stevens, G. (2003). The <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Truth and Reconciliation<br />

Commission: `Race', historical compromise and transitional democracy. International Journal <strong>of</strong><br />

Intercultural Relations, 27(2), 251-267.<br />

van der Walt, C.M. (1999). The trauma <strong>of</strong> telling: An examination <strong>of</strong> testimony in the Truth and<br />

Reconciliation Commission. Unpublished honours thesis, <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> the Witwatersrand,<br />

Johannesburg, <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>.<br />

van Zyl Slabbert, F. (1999). Tough choices: Reflections <strong>of</strong> an Afrikaner <strong>Africa</strong>n. Cape Town: Tafelberg<br />

Publishers.<br />

38


Villa-Vicencio, C. (2000). On the limitations <strong>of</strong> academic history: The quest for truth demands both<br />

more and less. In W. James & D. P. van der Vijver (Eds), After the TRC: Reflections on truth and<br />

reconciliation in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> (pp.21-31). Cape Town: David Phillip.<br />

Wolpe, H. (1988). Race, class and the apartheid state. Addis Ababa: Organisation for <strong>Africa</strong>n Unity.<br />

39


NON-VIOLENT CONFLICT<br />

RESOLUTION AND PEACEBUILDING<br />

IN SOUTH AFRICA<br />

Martin Terre Blanche 1<br />

Department <strong>of</strong> Psychology, <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong><br />

ABSTRACT<br />

In this article I use two recent media events to consider the history <strong>of</strong> and prospects for peaceful<br />

transformation in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>. First, I use the cricket World Cup to dramatise the post-colonial global<br />

context within which modern-day <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n subjectivities have come into being. I argue that while<br />

<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>ns, and in particular black <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>ns, are constrained by discourses <strong>of</strong> exoticism,<br />

they also make positive use <strong>of</strong> the ``double consciousness'' which is thus foisted on them to forge<br />

newforms <strong>of</strong> personal and national identity. Second, I use local opposition to the war against Iraq as<br />

emblematic <strong>of</strong> the role played by civil society and peaceful protest in bringing about <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>'s<br />

political transformation. However, I argue that the social capital built up before, during and<br />

immediately after the apartheid years is nowbeing eclipsed by the global predominance <strong>of</strong> private<br />

capital.<br />

Much <strong>of</strong> the discussion during the Indo-<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n dialogue, at which this article was presented,<br />

revolved around a particular <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n peacebuilding institution, namely the Truth and<br />

Reconciliation Commission (TRC). This is perhaps not surprising as, for many, the TRC continues to<br />

represent the essence <strong>of</strong> what is special about the emergence <strong>of</strong> democracy in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>. Over<br />

the past two decades, more than 24 countries have followed <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>'s example and created<br />

<strong>of</strong>ficial truth commissions (Wilson, 2003), and prominent figures in the TRC, such as archbishop<br />

Desmond Tutu, continue to be popular figures on the international conference circuit (Kretzmann &<br />

Mjekula, 2003).<br />

ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ<br />

1. Please direct all correspondence to Martin Terre Blanche, Department <strong>of</strong> Psychology, <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, P.O. Box 392, UNISA, 0003, <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>;<br />

Tel. +27 +12 429-8085; Fax. +27 +12 429-3414; E-mail: terremj@unisa.ac.za<br />

40


However, an important purpose <strong>of</strong> the Indo-<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n dialogue was to examine not only specific<br />

and highly publicised institutions such as the TRC, but also the broader peace process in <strong>South</strong><br />

<strong>Africa</strong>. Accordingly, various mappings <strong>of</strong> the wider <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n political landscape are provided in<br />

this issue (see Duncan, and Stevens), each <strong>of</strong> which in a different way helps to place initiatives such<br />

as the TRC in context. Inevitably, each <strong>of</strong> these mappings glosses over some <strong>of</strong> the significant<br />

intricacies and paradoxes <strong>of</strong> the peace process, but collectively they hopefully do provide a useful<br />

overview <strong>of</strong> the politics <strong>of</strong> peace and violence in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>.<br />

The map I draw in this article is not, as it were, executed from the top down, but instead tries to<br />

suggest the general contours <strong>of</strong> peacebuilding in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> from the bottom up Ð by highlighting<br />

two recent quintessentially <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n events in which I participated.<br />

A GAME OF CRICKET<br />

I experienced the first event vicariously, as part <strong>of</strong> the estimated 1.2 billion cricket enthusiasts<br />

worldwide who viewed the opening ceremony <strong>of</strong> the 2003 cricket World Cup on television. The<br />

ceremony, and the World Cup as a whole, were very much a product <strong>of</strong> global media culture, but at<br />

the same time also typically <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n. Apart from the obligatory speeches, it consisted mostly <strong>of</strong><br />

an elaborately staged and choreographed pageant showcasing <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>'s `rainbow nation' and<br />

natural beauty. Like the rugby World Cup in 1995, what was being presented was, in the words <strong>of</strong><br />

<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n novelist, J.M. Coetzee (1995), ``a de-historicized vision <strong>of</strong> Tourist <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>''. The<br />

pageant was therefore, at one level, fairly straightforwardly just another symptom <strong>of</strong> what Said (1978)<br />

calls orientalism. Orientalism describes a world in which Euro-American culture has become so<br />

pervasive that other cultural and political realities have become thinkable and doable only as<br />

something exotic Ð not only by Euro-Americans, but also by the very people who have been<br />

positioned as exotic foils to the West.<br />

At best those who are considered exotic, and who have learned to consider themselves as such, will<br />

be made to parade, or will themselves willingly parade, before Western eyes as an interesting<br />

entertainment. At worst non-Westerners will, as occurred again in the war against Iraq, be<br />

constrained to take on the mantle <strong>of</strong> wretchedness, incompetence and savagery.<br />

The cricket World Cup opening ceremony, and the tournament as a whole, were conditioned as much<br />

by willing acquiescence with exoticism-as-entertainment as by an attempt to dispel the image <strong>of</strong><br />

exoticism-as-horror. It was as important for <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>ns, and for those who were watching us, that<br />

the pageant should show us at our exotically entertaining best, and that everything should go <strong>of</strong>f<br />

smoothly. There should be no power failures, no unexpected strikes, and <strong>of</strong> course no violence.<br />

In both the `developed' and the `developing' world, `the power failure' is more than an inconvenience<br />

Ð it is metonymic <strong>of</strong> having been left behind by modernity, <strong>of</strong> being unable to maintain the requisite<br />

technological and organisational efficiency to run a modern technocratic state. As Mitter (2003, n.p.)<br />

puts it: ``nothing says Third World quite like a power outage''. Thus, the most memorable sound bite<br />

from the massive electricity blackout that struck the North-East <strong>of</strong> the United States and Canada in<br />

August 2003 was the remark by New Mexico governor, Bill Richardson, a former energy secretary<br />

41


during the Clinton administration, that the United States was ``a global superpower with a Third World<br />

electricity grid''.<br />

For North Americans the blackout was an anomaly that threatened to disrupt the familiar categories<br />

<strong>of</strong> `First World' and `Third World' Ð as much an ideological as a practical crisis. In Middle America,<br />

newspaper editors, intellectuals and politicians scrambled to discursively manage this threat to the<br />

First World's image <strong>of</strong> itself. Thus, the Belleville Intelligencer (2003) quickly pointed out that things<br />

are even worse in the `Third World' (``we think the Haitians wouldn't mind a grid like ours''); a group<br />

called ``Citizens for Pennsylvania's Future'' (2003, n.p.) rushed to the nation's defence with a press<br />

release insisting that ``the electric system is highly reliable, though not perfect''; while the journal<br />

Nature had physicist Benjamin Carreras explaining how the blackout was in fact a sign <strong>of</strong> the high<br />

quality <strong>of</strong> the American system as reliable systems are prone to occasional large failures, whereas in<br />

less robust systems, such as is in India for example, ``the tension in the network gets released in<br />

many small jolts'' (Suellentrop, 2003, n.p.).<br />

Susan Douglas (2003, n.p.), writing in InTheseTimes, perhaps most straightforwardly expressed the<br />

nature <strong>of</strong> the crisis: ``How, like, totally embarrassing''.<br />

In <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, during the cricket World Cup, there were no such embarrassments. Things did go<br />

smoothly. For Ali Bacher, the chief executive <strong>of</strong> the cricket World Cup company, as perhaps for most<br />

<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>ns, the great achievement <strong>of</strong> the Cup was that we managed to stage a ``world-class<br />

event'' with the same level <strong>of</strong> competence as any <strong>of</strong> the <strong>of</strong>ficially ``world-class'' countries such as the<br />

UK, the USA or Australia would have. In particular, security issues were handled to perfection. As<br />

<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n commentators have been repeating ad nauseam, not even a single violent incident <strong>of</strong><br />

any significance was reported during the entire tournament. <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> previously staged a similar<br />

``world-class'' event, the rugby World Cup in 1995, with equal success, but for countries outside the<br />

Western mainstream it is <strong>of</strong> course necessary to prove again and again that they are still safely<br />

ensconced on the entertaining side <strong>of</strong> exoticism and have not regressed towards its more abject side.<br />

<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> has to show, and keep on showing, that it has arrived at the blessed state <strong>of</strong> late<br />

capitalist development where, in the words <strong>of</strong> Francis Fukuyama (1992), history has ended.<br />

This, in essence, is what <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>'s non-violent revolution has achieved. We have positioned<br />

ourselves, at least for the moment, and perhaps only in our own eyes, as the `other' who can be<br />

regarded fondly, even if with some puzzled amusement. We will play the role <strong>of</strong> friendly, smiling<br />

natives to the world's media, and to ourselves, and will not become that other who must be feared or<br />

pitied.<br />

<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> is <strong>of</strong> course not the only country to have arrived at this juncture, but now merely joins a<br />

throng <strong>of</strong> other `developing' countries (perhaps including India) who have been striving for many<br />

decades to run themselves as modern, technocratic states with an eye on the tourist industry. The<br />

same kinds <strong>of</strong> dynamics that exist between `developing countries' and `the West' also play<br />

themselves out in the internal politics <strong>of</strong> these countries. In <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, poor provinces try to live up<br />

to the standards <strong>of</strong> rich provinces; black <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>ns look at themselves through white eyes; poor<br />

<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>ns judge themselves by the yardstick <strong>of</strong> affluence.<br />

42


A century ago W.E.B. DuBois (1903, pp. 2-3) described how this kind <strong>of</strong> double consciousness<br />

operates for <strong>Africa</strong>n Americans:<br />

After the Egyptian and Indian, the Greek and Roman, the Teuton and Mongolian, the Negro is a<br />

sort <strong>of</strong> seventh son, born with a veil, and gifted with second-sight in this American world Ð a<br />

world which yields him no true self-consciousness, but only lets him see himself through the<br />

revelation <strong>of</strong> the other world. It is a peculiar sensation, this double-consciousness, this sense <strong>of</strong><br />

always looking at one's self through the eyes <strong>of</strong> others, <strong>of</strong> measuring one's soul by the tape <strong>of</strong> a<br />

world that looks on in amused contempt and pity.<br />

This double consciousness, <strong>of</strong> being simultaneously the other and the one doing the othering, was<br />

described by Frantz Fanon (1965, 1967) as a kind <strong>of</strong> psychic disfigurement from which colonised<br />

people can recover only by consciously embracing exoticism-as-horror, choosing violence over<br />

peaceful docility. It was also neatly dramatised in the cricket World Cup opening ceremony by the<br />

device <strong>of</strong> including in the pageant, a safari vehicle full <strong>of</strong> ``foreign'' tourists, with local comedian Mark<br />

Lottering as tour guide. These tourists acted in exactly the kinds <strong>of</strong> silly, camera-wielding ways<br />

tourists are supposed to Ð dutifully consuming the various pieces <strong>of</strong> exoticism-as-entertainment<br />

being put on display for them and even flirting with the idea <strong>of</strong> exoticism-as-horror by pretending to<br />

be afraid <strong>of</strong> some <strong>of</strong> the more extravagant stage effects.<br />

A first reading <strong>of</strong> spectacles such as the cricket World Cup is therefore that they are precisely the<br />

kind <strong>of</strong> symptom one would expect to see in the aftermath <strong>of</strong> a non-violent revolution; as such, a<br />

revolution can at best represent an accommodation between the oppressors and an elite group<br />

among the formerly oppressed. The elite are those who have essentially taken on the language and<br />

mentality <strong>of</strong> the oppressor, and are therefore able to negotiate a settlement in terms intelligible to the<br />

oppressor while at the same time clinging to a romanticised, exotic vision <strong>of</strong> themselves as somehow<br />

other-than-the-oppressor. This kind <strong>of</strong> analysis <strong>of</strong> the current <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n situation, as a peaceful<br />

accommodation between ruling elites at the expense <strong>of</strong>, say, the poor is now extremely common, and<br />

one which I personally find highly seductive.<br />

However, a somewhat more positive reading is also possible. Although post-apartheid, 21st century<br />

<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> clearly finds itself constrained by the discursive field created by Western concepts <strong>of</strong><br />

exoticism, I would like to think that it (along with other countries in a similar position) is far from being<br />

inextricably caught in this field. The inclusion <strong>of</strong> tourists and a safari vehicle in the cricket World Cup<br />

pageant in fact symbolises, in a small way, one <strong>of</strong> the escape routes still available to us. The pageant<br />

was not straightforwardly only about putting on a show <strong>of</strong> exoticism, but also about showing up the<br />

spectators as something <strong>of</strong> a spectacle themselves, and perhaps even about looking at ourselves<br />

looking at others looking at us. There is a certain knowingness in the way people in the `Third World'<br />

can position themselves simultaneously as part <strong>of</strong> and other to the global mainstream Ð a certain<br />

sophistication and tolerance <strong>of</strong> apparent contradictions Ð which cannot be achieved in the more unidimensional<br />

cultural and political circumstances that now obtain in much <strong>of</strong> the `West'.<br />

While large sections <strong>of</strong> the American and British public have fallen under the spell <strong>of</strong> war-mongering<br />

extremists who perceive the world monochromatically, in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, nobody seems to find it<br />

remarkable that at the time <strong>of</strong> my writing this article our minister <strong>of</strong> finance was a former trade union<br />

activist or that our deputy minister <strong>of</strong> defence was a Quaker pacifist. At some level, such members <strong>of</strong><br />

43


the new governing elite have indeed sold out and taken on the outer trappings and authoritarian<br />

attitudes <strong>of</strong> their former masters. However, they are also, I would like to believe, able to reflect on and<br />

recognise the creative possibilities <strong>of</strong> the contradictory positions they find themselves in as postcolonial<br />

subjects. For example, according to Nozizwe Madlala-Routledge, the deputy minister <strong>of</strong><br />

defence at the time <strong>of</strong> writing this article, her vision was ``to transform military culture, reduce<br />

weapons proliferation, confront the arms industry and provide the leadership in the region for a stable<br />

and lasting peace'' (Moix, 1999, n.p.). Although Madlala-Routledge has not exactly made good on<br />

these promises (she has been party to a large arms procurement deal signed by the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n<br />

government), it is certainly not the kind <strong>of</strong> rhetoric one would expect <strong>of</strong> a `Western' minister <strong>of</strong><br />

defence.<br />

It may be true, as DuBois (1903, p. 3) puts it, that the history <strong>of</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Americans (and, one could<br />

argue with Fanon, <strong>of</strong> colonised people all over the world) is conditioned by a single longing Ð ``to<br />

attain self-conscious manhood, to merge his double self into a better and truer self''. However, while<br />

DuBois (1903, p. 3) talks about double consciousness as a form <strong>of</strong> psychic disfigurement, it is<br />

simultaneously also a form <strong>of</strong> consciousness that goes beyond the ordinary `black folk' are ``gifted<br />

with second-sight''.<br />

When <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> increasingly operates as a would-be `First World' state, when it uses the<br />

quintessentially Western concept <strong>of</strong> ``renaissance'' to try and cajole other <strong>Africa</strong>n countries into doing<br />

the same, it is easy to portray what is happening as simply another case <strong>of</strong> selling out to the financial<br />

and ideological status quo. And when this process is presented, as I attempt to do in this article, as<br />

having been essentially peaceful, it seems obvious not only that there has been a sell-out, but that it<br />

is based on historical duplicity. As Homi Bhabha (2002, n.p.) puts it:<br />

Here was an instance <strong>of</strong> liberation through liberalism, liberation apparently facilitated by the<br />

rational forces <strong>of</strong> the market, by a democratic social movement, by the good <strong>of</strong>fices <strong>of</strong><br />

international institutions ... Hidden, sometimes not so hidden, in the process was a great degree <strong>of</strong><br />

brutality, a civil war in fact, fomented by the apartheid state; a reign <strong>of</strong> terror now fading into the<br />

recesses <strong>of</strong> memory except among those who suffered its bombs and bullets and beatings.<br />

However, Bhabha (1990, p. 85), like DuBois, recognises that what emerges is much more than<br />

rejection or appropriation <strong>of</strong> colonial cultural goods, or even simply a form <strong>of</strong> subjectivity tragically<br />

split between these two poles, but instead the colonial experience ``<strong>of</strong>ten produces a text rich in the<br />

traditions <strong>of</strong> trompe-l'oeil, irony, mimicry and repetition''. Even a relatively commercial group such as<br />

the Soweto String Quartet (who don zebra-striped suits to play a mixture <strong>of</strong> `classical', jazz, and<br />

traditional Afrikaans music to predominantly white audiences) are clearly engaged in a far more<br />

complex game than simply capitulating to, or being split in two by, the colonial gaze.<br />

OUTSIDE THE AMERICAN EMBASSY<br />

The second quintessentially <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n event I participated in was also to a large extent staged for<br />

Euro-American consumption, but rather than an entertainment it was intended as a peaceful protest.<br />

As it turned out, it was never televised Ð so rather than 1.2 billion participants there were only about<br />

120 <strong>of</strong> us. The event was a candle-lit vigil outside the American embassy in Pretoria on the first night,<br />

44


and on every subsequent night, <strong>of</strong> the war against Iraq. The embassy is in a leafy suburb on the<br />

same street as the Indian embassy, but whereas the latter operates from an elegant colonial<br />

mansion, the US embassy resembles nothing more than a heavily fortified steel and reinforced<br />

concrete bunker.<br />

The protest was staged by the Anti-War Coalition which, as is usual in this kind <strong>of</strong> protest politics,<br />

consists <strong>of</strong> a loose amalgamation <strong>of</strong> highly disparate organisations. Here is a partial list <strong>of</strong> the motley<br />

crew <strong>of</strong> organisations forming the coalition, giving something <strong>of</strong> the flavour <strong>of</strong> the kinds <strong>of</strong> micro and<br />

macro issues around which civic society in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> organises:<br />

Anti-Eviction Campaign, Anti-Privatisation Forum, Athlone Concerned Civic Residents Association,<br />

Azanian Peoples' Organization, Black Consciousness Forum, Bophelong Community Service<br />

Forum, Botshebelo Palestine Solidarity Committee, Ceasefire Campaign, Concerned Citizens<br />

Forum, Delft Concerned Residents Movement, Democratic Socialist Movement, Environmental<br />

Justice Networking Forum, Free Burma Campaign, Freedom <strong>of</strong> Expression Institute, Guguletu<br />

Anti-Privatisation Forum, Human Rights Foundation, Ikageng Crisis Committee, Indymedia, Inner<br />

City Anti-Eviction Campaign, Ironside Civic Movement, Islamic Action, Johannesburg Palestine<br />

Solidarity Committee, Jubilee <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, Kanana Community Development Forum, Kathorus<br />

Concerned Residents, Keep Left, Khanya College, KTC Concerned Residents Movement,<br />

Lakeside, Landless Access Movement <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, Landless Peoples Movement, Lavender<br />

Hill Anti-Eviction Campaign, Lekoa-Vaal Community Forum, Mabuluka Vukuzenzele Ð Pretoria,<br />

Malboro/Alex, Mandela Park Action Youth Housing Committee, Mandela Village Durban Deep,<br />

Media Review Network, Mfuleni Anti-Eviction Campaign, Mohideen Civic Ð Potchestroom,<br />

Mothers for Services, Muslim Students Association, Muslim Youth Movement, Orange Farm Water<br />

Crisis Committee, Palestine Solidarity Committee, Pan-<strong>Africa</strong>n Congress, Riverpark Residents<br />

Committee Rural Development Services Network, Smallfarm Community Forum, <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n<br />

Catholic Bishops Council, <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n NGO Coalition, Social Movement Indaba, Socialist Party<br />

<strong>of</strong> Azania, Socialist Students Movement, Soldiers Forum, Soweto Electricity Crisis Committee,<br />

Squatter Families <strong>of</strong> Faure Road, Strand Concerned Group, Tafelsig Anti-Eviction Campaign,<br />

Tafelsig Concerned Parents, Tambo Square Concerned Residents Movement, Thembelihle Crisis<br />

Committee, Trust for Community Outreach and Education, Tshakane Residents Committee,<br />

United Civics <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, Valhalla Park United Civic Front, Vukuzenzele Residents Committee<br />

Ð Alex, Waterless Community <strong>of</strong> Fisantekraal, Workers' Organisation for Socialist Action,<br />

Workers' Party, Working Class Coordinating Committee Ð Vaal, Youth for Work, Zamdela<br />

Palestine Solidarity Committee.<br />

Together with larger umbrella groupings such as the Congress <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Trade Unions, the<br />

Azanian People's Organisation (AZAPO), the Pan <strong>Africa</strong>n Congress (PAC), the <strong>Africa</strong>n National<br />

Congress (ANC), the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Communist Party and the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Council <strong>of</strong> Churches,<br />

these are the types <strong>of</strong> organisations that were at the forefront <strong>of</strong> the struggle against apartheid. Preliberation<br />

<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> is now <strong>of</strong>ten imagined in terms <strong>of</strong> a protracted period <strong>of</strong> low-intensity armed<br />

struggle, followed by a brief period <strong>of</strong> high-level negotiations from 1990 to 1994. What is underplayed<br />

in such accounts is the fact that most <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>'s liberation history was not characterised either<br />

by overt violence or by peace negotiations between leaders, but by large- and small-scale, nonviolent,<br />

grassroots attempts at bringing the regime to a fall.<br />

45


Indeed, <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> has a long history <strong>of</strong> non-violent struggle. Shortly after <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> was united<br />

as a country in 1910, Gandhi led a series <strong>of</strong> passive resistance campaigns against the pass laws. In<br />

1923, the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Indian Congress was formed and used passive resistance to protest against<br />

many discriminatory laws. The <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Indian Congress also cooperated with the ANC in the<br />

Defiance Campaign <strong>of</strong> 1952, and was present at the signing <strong>of</strong> the Freedom Charter in 1955.<br />

Historically, it was only after all other avenues <strong>of</strong> protest had been closed that organisations such as<br />

the ANC and PAC turned to violence. The Programme <strong>of</strong> Action <strong>of</strong> 1949, and the Defiance Campaign<br />

<strong>of</strong> 1952 used boycotts, strikes, civil disobedience and non-cooperation to show opposition to the<br />

apartheid system. Smaller groups, such as the Federation <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Women (Fedsaw) and the<br />

Black Sash also made use <strong>of</strong> demonstrations and protest marches.<br />

During the late 1960s and 1970s, student movements like the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Students Organisation<br />

and the Black People's Convention utilised the Black Consciousness philosophy to instil pride and<br />

psychologically undermine the apartheid system. During the 1970s and 1980s, various other groups<br />

were formed to resist apartheid, many <strong>of</strong> them growing out <strong>of</strong> the legacies <strong>of</strong> the Black<br />

Consciousness Movement. For example, in 1978, the Azanian People's Organisation (AZAPO) was<br />

formed, while in 1983 the United Democratic Front (UDF) was established as an umbrella body<br />

representing about 600 anti-apartheid organisations. In 1984 the National Forum, another umbrella<br />

body, was founded to oppose the new constitution, and this body organised a boycott <strong>of</strong> the August<br />

1984 elections. On the labour front, the formation <strong>of</strong> the Congress <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Trade Unions<br />

(Cosatu) in 1985 heralded the beginning <strong>of</strong> a long series <strong>of</strong> strikes and other forms <strong>of</strong> peaceful<br />

economic activism.<br />

Internationally, there was also a vast network <strong>of</strong> small and large organisations, and individuals who<br />

had anti-apartheid activism as one <strong>of</strong> their goals. Among the major peacefully achieved victories <strong>of</strong><br />

this network were the sports boycott and economic sanctions instituted against <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> by the<br />

United Nations. Although the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n regime, in part thanks to covert aid provided by<br />

governments and corporations in Europe and America, was not brought down by these measures, it<br />

created a climate in which it became clear even to them that the apartheid state had no long-term<br />

viability. The international anti-apartheid network was also instrumental in channelling hundreds <strong>of</strong><br />

millions <strong>of</strong> dollars in aid to democratically oriented <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n non-governmental organisations.<br />

Among many other countries, India was vociferous in its opposition to apartheid, attacking it in the<br />

General Assembly <strong>of</strong> the United Nations, for example, and strongly objecting to <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong><br />

remaining in the commonwealth while implementing apartheid policies.<br />

Internally, many <strong>of</strong> the civil society organisations (civics, trade unions, non-governmental<br />

organisations, political parties and churches) supported the armed struggle, but in practice,<br />

expressed their opposition to the state through non-violent means. In many cases, this may have<br />

been for the sake <strong>of</strong> expediency (to avoid arrest), direct oppression (many were in fact arrested and<br />

tortured or had elaborate legal constraints placed on them), or because they simply did not have the<br />

means for violent insurrection. There were also a fair number <strong>of</strong> well-publicised violent clashes with<br />

the police and the army. Nevertheless, for the most part, the anti-apartheid struggle in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong><br />

was characterised not by gunfire, but by peaceful protest. When overt anti-state violence did occur it<br />

was usually presented as a reaction to police provocation rather than as a deliberate strategy.<br />

46


As is <strong>of</strong>ten the case in situations <strong>of</strong> oppression, organisations claiming to represent or to be working<br />

on behalf <strong>of</strong> the oppressed seemed at times to spend as much time plotting and politicking against<br />

each other as against the state, but here too conflict was mostly <strong>of</strong> the peaceful variety. Major<br />

exceptions to this were the ongoing violence between UDF/ANC supporters and Inkatha Freedom<br />

Party (IFP) supporters among Zulu-speakers in the province <strong>of</strong> KwaZulu-Natal, and sporadic violence<br />

in Vaal triangle townships in Gauteng province, including so-called ``hostel violence'' and ``train<br />

violence''. All <strong>of</strong> these forms <strong>of</strong> violence were suspected at the time to be, and have since largely<br />

been shown to have been, instigated and sponsored by the state's security apparatus (Haysom,<br />

1992). With the exception <strong>of</strong> the violence in KwaZulu-Natal, which had been fostered over a lengthy<br />

period by the apartheid state, and which still continues to simmer, this violence rapidly disappeared<br />

with the coming <strong>of</strong> democracy, to be replaced by a variety <strong>of</strong> forms <strong>of</strong> criminal violence.<br />

Anybody who participated in one way or another in the workings <strong>of</strong> civil society organisations during<br />

the apartheid years will know that the predominant feeling was not one <strong>of</strong> optimism. Non-violent<br />

protest was the order <strong>of</strong> the day, but there was no great faith in its efficacy. The power imbalance<br />

between the regime and its opponents seemed too extreme ever to be overcome, and at times it<br />

seemed as if anti-apartheid organisations had fallen into a sterile routine <strong>of</strong> boycotting and registering<br />

outrage; that they had become institutionalised in a protest role which did not hold out any real<br />

prospect <strong>of</strong> bringing about change.<br />

Many were therefore caught by surprise when then State President, F.W. de Klerk, suddenly<br />

indicated, at the opening <strong>of</strong> the (mainly white) parliament in February 1990, that liberation<br />

movements would be unbanned, and that his government would enter into negotiations with them<br />

(address by the State President, F.W. de Klerk on 2 February 1990):<br />

[There is] a growing realisation by an increasing number <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>ns that only a negotiated<br />

understanding among the representative leaders <strong>of</strong> the entire population is able to ensure lasting<br />

peace. The alternative is growing violence, tension and conflict. That is unacceptable and in<br />

nobody's interest. The well-being <strong>of</strong> all in this country is linked inextricably to the ability <strong>of</strong> the<br />

leaders to come to terms with one another on a new dispensation. No-one can escape this simple<br />

truth.<br />

The ``simple truth'' proclaimed by De Klerk in 1990 is one which had been at the heart <strong>of</strong> the antiapartheid<br />

struggle from the outset, and to many, it therefore seemed like some sort <strong>of</strong> miracle that it<br />

should suddenly dawn on him in 1990, after he and most other white politicians had denied it for a<br />

century and more. A minor industry has since been established in presenting the non-violent<br />

resolution <strong>of</strong> the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n conflict as a miracle: De Klerk's supposed Damascus experience;<br />

Nelson Mandela's surprising lack <strong>of</strong> bitterness and conciliatory attitude towards white <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>ns;<br />

and a host <strong>of</strong> other minor miracles, such as Kenyan pr<strong>of</strong>essor, Washington Okumo's last-minute<br />

coup in getting IFP leader Mangosotho Buthelezi to sign up to the settlement.<br />

A more mundane explanation <strong>of</strong> the transition, and one which is all but explicitly acknowledged in De<br />

Klerk's 1990 speech, is that it happened for the following reasons:<br />

a) The international situation had altered to such an extent that there was no longer a danger that<br />

post-apartheid <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> would become part <strong>of</strong> the ``communist'' sphere <strong>of</strong> influence.<br />

47


) An ideological climate had been systematically created over a period <strong>of</strong> many decades in which<br />

the idea <strong>of</strong> a minority government simply no longer seemed tenable.<br />

In terms <strong>of</strong> ``internal'' conditions, it is therefore largely the (mainly peaceful) ideological struggle<br />

against apartheid which brought about its demise. As a result <strong>of</strong> this struggle the apartheid regime<br />

was on the ideological defensive almost from the outset Ð very quickly, for example, having to<br />

jettison the term apartheid, followed in quick succession by the abandonment <strong>of</strong> many forms <strong>of</strong> petty<br />

racism and increasingly baroque attempts at co-opting `coloured' and `Indian' <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>ns. F.W. de<br />

Klerk's predecessor, P.W. Botha, who is now mainly remembered for the severity <strong>of</strong> the repressive<br />

measures he instituted during the 1980s and for the shrillness <strong>of</strong> his anti-communist rhetoric, was in<br />

fact much preoccupied with desperate attempts at convincing a sceptical world that his regime was in<br />

no way anti-democratic or racist (Schrire, 1991). Thus, by the time De Klerk emerged on the scene,<br />

all that remained to legitimate the white <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n regime, also in the eyes <strong>of</strong> its own electorate,<br />

was the now mythical ``communist onslaught'', and when that fell away, nothing remained to prop up<br />

its ideological edifice.<br />

Let us pause at this point, with the struggle against apartheid having emerged victorious through<br />

largely peaceful ideological means, and return to the candle-lit vigil outside the US embassy in March<br />

2003. Here we have <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n civil society attempting to return the favour afforded to them by the<br />

international anti-apartheid movement, not by joining directly in the war against American<br />

imperialism, but through peaceful means Ð by showing up the ideological bankruptcy <strong>of</strong> the<br />

American position. Here we also have something <strong>of</strong> an advertisement for the kind <strong>of</strong> country <strong>South</strong><br />

<strong>Africa</strong> has become as a result <strong>of</strong> many decades <strong>of</strong> painstaking peacebuilding.<br />

The gathering was extremely diverse, with all shades <strong>of</strong> political opinion, religions, ages and races<br />

represented. A Quaker woman read a poem about pacifism. Two young Muslim men held up a<br />

banner: ``Death to Bush!'' A group <strong>of</strong> young children sang: ``All we are saying, is give peace a<br />

chance''. All chanted: ``Forward with international solidarity! Forward!'' Passing cars hooted their<br />

support. There was a spirit <strong>of</strong> tolerance, an unspoken assumption that the gathering would be<br />

peaceful, and an eagerness to listen to different voices. Even the large contingent <strong>of</strong> policemen was<br />

<strong>of</strong> the new <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n variety Ð remaining in the background and pointedly avoiding<br />

confrontational behaviour. In the back <strong>of</strong> one armoured vehicle I noticed a group <strong>of</strong> young policemen<br />

whiling away the time with, <strong>of</strong> all things, a game <strong>of</strong> Monopoly.<br />

The diversity <strong>of</strong> the gathering and the open, participatory manner in which it was conducted reflected<br />

well on the depth <strong>of</strong> `social capital' (Coleman, 1988; Putnam, 1995) built up in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> during the<br />

struggle, the four transitional years, and in the decade <strong>of</strong> post-apartheid reconstruction. In contrast to<br />

the USA, where social capital has been actively depleted (as seen in the steadily lower frequency<br />

and greater shallowness <strong>of</strong> social interaction, and in the declining sense <strong>of</strong> mutual trust among<br />

citizens) in order to amass ever-larger hoards <strong>of</strong> private financial capital, in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, a strong<br />

tradition has been established <strong>of</strong> actually talking things through, <strong>of</strong> confronting differences in open<br />

debate and <strong>of</strong> having the patience to find consensus.<br />

But as I looked more closely at the gathering outside the American embassy, it became clear that<br />

something was wrong with that idyllic picture <strong>of</strong> a tolerant, civic-minded post-apartheid <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>.<br />

First, there were only 120 <strong>of</strong> us. By my calculation that is precisely 0,0000001% <strong>of</strong> the number <strong>of</strong><br />

people who watched the cricket World Cup pageant. In other capital cities Ð London, Sydney,<br />

48


Amman Ð there were hundreds <strong>of</strong> thousands <strong>of</strong> protesters. Second, the gathering was not quite as<br />

diverse as it at first seemed Ð there were relatively few <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>ns <strong>of</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n descent; very few<br />

working class people; nobody confessed to being Jewish. In fact, the majority <strong>of</strong> participants were<br />

Muslim, and as the war dragged on, fewer and fewer non-Muslims pitched up for the nightly vigil.<br />

Gradually the policemen seemed to become more aggressive. I later read in the newspaper that they<br />

had started arresting hooting motorists Ð apparently because local homeowners complained that<br />

they were disturbing the peace.<br />

In post-apartheid capitalist <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, peace, like violence, has become privatised. It is no longer a<br />

shared achievement, to be collectively fostered and enjoyed by the people, but something to be<br />

bought and insisted on if you are rich enough to afford a home in a security complex, or to hold on to<br />

in the privacy <strong>of</strong> your living room as you watch the cricket World Cup or the war on Iraq. Since 1995,<br />

house prices in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> have, in real terms, increased by 127% Ð the second highest growth<br />

rate in the world (Van Rooyen, 2003). It seems unlikely that in the post-apartheid years social capital<br />

has increased at the same rate, and more probable that it has in fact declined.<br />

CONCLUSION<br />

In this article I have presented two emblematic moments from life in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> in the early 21st<br />

century and tried to use them as a lens to look upwards towards the larger ideological struggles<br />

around conflict and conflict resolution, which created the conditions for these moments to occur.<br />

In the first case I started with a somewhat pessimistic reading <strong>of</strong> a colonised elite trying to liberate<br />

themselves from their colonial masters while simultaneously trying to be just like them, but concluded<br />

with the more optimistic possibility that the double consciousness <strong>of</strong> the colonised may be a truer<br />

reflection <strong>of</strong> life in the 21st century than the uni-dimensional cultural fantasies still pursued by the<br />

George Bushes <strong>of</strong> this world. In the second case, I started at the more optimistic end <strong>of</strong> the scale,<br />

claiming that the downfall <strong>of</strong> apartheid was due to the slow, peaceful, participatory creation <strong>of</strong> a<br />

certain ideological climate by <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n civil society and our international allies, and that this<br />

democratic spirit and passion endure into the present. However, I ended on a negative note,<br />

suggesting that perhaps the real ideological force which brought about the end <strong>of</strong> apartheid and<br />

which now determines the shape <strong>of</strong> post-apartheid <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> is not civil society but international<br />

capitalism.<br />

I cannot say with any certainty if an optimistic or a pessimistic reading is more useful in trying to<br />

understand how our peaceful transition came about and what kind <strong>of</strong> society we have transformed<br />

into, but suspect that an honest account <strong>of</strong> where we are now and <strong>of</strong> how we got here needs to<br />

include both these possibilities.<br />

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS<br />

My thanks to my wife, Helen Terre Blanche, for helping to formulate some sections <strong>of</strong> this article, and<br />

to Manoranjan Mohanty for inviting me to present a paper at the Indo-<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n dialogue.<br />

49


REFERENCES<br />

Belleville Intelligencer. (2003, September 5). Third world quality? Really... Editorial.<br />

Bhabha, H. (1990). Nation and narration. London: Routledge.<br />

Bhabha, H. (2002). Speaking <strong>of</strong> postcoloniality, in the continuous present: A conversation / Homi<br />

Bhabha, John Comar<strong>of</strong>f. In D. T. Goldberg & A. Quayson (Eds), Relocating Postcolonialism (pp. 15-<br />

46). Oxford: Blackwell.<br />

Citizens for Pennsylvania's Future. (2003, August 26). PennFuture: 5 wrong answers and 5 smart<br />

solutions to reduce blackouts. Press Release. Retrieved August 25, 2005, from http://<br />

www.prnewswire.com/cgi-bin/stories.<br />

Coetzee, J.M. (1995, July/August). Retrospect: The world cup <strong>of</strong> rugby. <strong>South</strong>ern <strong>Africa</strong>n Review<strong>of</strong><br />

Books, 38.<br />

Coleman, J.C. (1988). Social capital in the creation <strong>of</strong> human capital. American Journal <strong>of</strong> Sociology,<br />

94, 95-120.<br />

Douglas, S.J. (2003, September 5). Third world, here we come. InTheseTimes. Retrieved August 24,<br />

2005, from http://www.inthesetimes.com/site/main/article/470/.<br />

DuBois, W.E.B. (1903/1989). The souls <strong>of</strong> black folk. New York: Penguin.<br />

Fanon, F. (1965). The wretched <strong>of</strong> the earth. New York: Grove.<br />

Fanon, F. (1967). Black skin, white masks. New York: Grove.<br />

Fukuyama, F. (1992). The end <strong>of</strong> history and the last man. New York: Free Press.<br />

Haysom, N. (1992). The total strategy: The <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n security forces and the suppression <strong>of</strong> civil<br />

liberties. In J. Dugard (Ed.), The last years <strong>of</strong> apartheid: Civil liberties in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> (pp. 55-93).<br />

USA: Ford Foundation.<br />

Kretzmann, S. & Mjekula, L. (2003, September 4). Ubuntu can teach US how to deal with global<br />

terrorism says Tutu. East Cape News.<br />

Mitter, S. (2003). Third world: The sweet blackout blues. Comment posted on <strong>Africa</strong>na website<br />

(gateway to the Black World). Retrieved June 15, 2004, from http://www.africana.com/.<br />

Moix, B. (1999, December). Conscientious engagement: A Quaker Deputy Defense Minister. Quaker<br />

Life. Retrieved August 24, 2005, from http://www.fum.org/QL/issues/9912/moix.htm.<br />

Putnam, R. D. (1995). Bowling alone: America's declining social capital. Journal <strong>of</strong> Democracy, 6(1),<br />

65-78.<br />

Said, E. (1978). Orientalism. New York: Pantheon Books.<br />

Schrire, R. (1991). Adapt or die: The end <strong>of</strong> white politics in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>. USA: Ford Foundation.<br />

50


Suellentrop, C. (2003, August 15). This was a first world blackout. Slate. Retrieved August 24, 2005,<br />

from http://slate.msn.com/id/2087036/.<br />

Van Rooyen, D. (2003, March 30). Eiendomme styg vinniger as oorsee. Rapport, p. 18.<br />

Wilson, S. (2003, September 7). Seeking justice for past evil: Peru probing political crimes.<br />

Washington Post.<br />

51


CONFLICT, RECONCILIATION AND<br />

PEACEBUILDING IN THE NORTH-EAST<br />

REGION OF INDIA<br />

Rei Vashum 1<br />

School <strong>of</strong> Social Sciences, Indira Gandhi National Open <strong>University</strong><br />

ABSTRACT<br />

Reconciliation and peacebuilding is a multifaceted process, and one much sought after by various<br />

communities, particularly in the high conflict North-East region <strong>of</strong> India. Most <strong>of</strong> the complex nature <strong>of</strong><br />

conflict in this region is rooted in the past and so, in the absence <strong>of</strong> a rigorous understanding <strong>of</strong> the<br />

basis <strong>of</strong> the conflict, attempts to resolve the conflict are likely to be unsuccessful. The failed efforts <strong>of</strong><br />

the Government <strong>of</strong> India (GoI), and various organisations and groups to address the conflict thus call<br />

for an innovative approach, which takes into account the various contours <strong>of</strong> conflicts in the quest to<br />

build peace. The ongoing peace process in Nagalim (Nagaland) is a valuable opportunity for the GoI<br />

and the Nagas, as well as the people <strong>of</strong> the North-East, to solve a major and enduring problem <strong>of</strong> the<br />

region. Accordingly, this article reflects on the conflict situation, and the processes <strong>of</strong> reconciliation<br />

and peacebuilding in the North-East region <strong>of</strong> India, with special reference to the Indo-Naga peace<br />

process. The article will also address the implications <strong>of</strong> the peacebuilding process.<br />

The North-East region <strong>of</strong> India comprises <strong>of</strong> seven sister-states 1 : Arunachal Pradesh, Assam,<br />

Manipur, Meghalaya, Mizoram, Nagaland and Tripura. The region is a conglomeration <strong>of</strong> various<br />

ethnic groups, cultures and `races'. The main constituents <strong>of</strong> the region are the mongoloids <strong>of</strong> the<br />

Sino-Tibetan linguistic family and the Caucasoids belonging to the Aryan linguistic family; the two<br />

groups are not homogeneous in terms <strong>of</strong> sociocultural and political aspects. Thus identity crises,<br />

alienation and under-development are some <strong>of</strong> the main issues that continue to trouble the North-<br />

East region. While many <strong>of</strong> the problems in the region have historical roots, the mishandling <strong>of</strong> issues<br />

in the region by the post-independent Indian state, and ignorance <strong>of</strong> the situation in the North-East<br />

ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ<br />

1. Please direct all correspondence to Rei Vashum, Faculty <strong>of</strong> Sociology, School <strong>of</strong> Social Sciences, Indira Gandhi National Open <strong>University</strong>, Maindan Garhi,<br />

New Delhi 110068, India; E-mail: reivashum@hotmail.com.<br />

52


egion on the part <strong>of</strong> policymakers and administrators are among the major contributory factors<br />

stemming resolution <strong>of</strong> the conflict. It appears that the Indian state is most concerned with defence<br />

and national security, as the region borders four neighbouring sovereign states: China in the north,<br />

Myanmar (erstwhile Burma) in the east, Bangladesh in the south and Bhutan in the north-west. In<br />

fact, the link between the North-East region and the rest <strong>of</strong> India is through a narrow strip (also called<br />

``chicken neck'') in northern West Bengal.<br />

This article will accordingly focus on the following three core issues: (1) the nature <strong>of</strong> the conflict<br />

situation in the North-East region <strong>of</strong> India; (2) reconciliation and peacebuilding, and their implications;<br />

and (3) prospects for Indo-Naga peacemaking.<br />

CONFLICT SITUATION IN THE NORTH-EAST<br />

The conflict in the North-East region has been characterised by: (1) an identity crisis and a sense <strong>of</strong><br />

alienation; (2) conflict with the Indian state; (3) inter-community conflict; (4) under-development; and<br />

(5) conflict arising from a policy <strong>of</strong> language imposition. To these some might add `intra-community<br />

conflict' to the list. I review each <strong>of</strong> these in turn below.<br />

Identity crisis, nationality issues and alienation<br />

The people <strong>of</strong> the North-East region have been facing an immense crisis <strong>of</strong> identity and a sense <strong>of</strong><br />

alienation over the last few decades. A strong sense among the North-East people <strong>of</strong> being foreign to<br />

the Indian union, a distinct history, the geographical isolation <strong>of</strong> the region, and coercion by the Indian<br />

state on the indigenous peoples <strong>of</strong> the region to participate in the Indian Union without their consent<br />

are among the many factors that account for the ongoing sense <strong>of</strong> alienation. Thus, many North-East<br />

people feel that they are Indian by historical accident and not by choice.<br />

A pervasive sense <strong>of</strong> being historically, culturally, linguistically, politically and even racially different<br />

from the rest <strong>of</strong> the population <strong>of</strong> India has thus prompted the creation <strong>of</strong> various ``external'' 2 peoples'<br />

self-determination movements in the North-East region (see Alexander & Friedlander, 1980;<br />

Cassese, 1981; Chen, 1976; Cobban, 1969; Cobo, 1986; Hannum, 1992; Sanajaoba, 1994; Sanders,<br />

1993; Vashum, 1996, 1999, 2000). Many groups in the region have accordingly been agitating for<br />

independent nation-states since the 1940s and have set up parallel governments in their own way;<br />

the Naga movement for self-determination (``sovereignty'') 3 , to be discussed later in the article, is a<br />

good example <strong>of</strong> the cessationist movement.<br />

In parallel to the calls for self-determination by various groups in the North-East region there is also<br />

the struggle for autonomous status within the Constitution <strong>of</strong> India. This struggle centres around<br />

demands for the creation <strong>of</strong> new state/s, including calls for the establishment <strong>of</strong> Boroland (Bodoland)<br />

to be carved out <strong>of</strong> the State <strong>of</strong> Assam, and various demands for implementation <strong>of</strong> the ``VIth<br />

Schedule'' 4 in the Hills <strong>of</strong> Manipur and other states <strong>of</strong> the region.<br />

In contrast to the groups' call for self-determination and/or autonomy, there are also some ethnic<br />

groups in the North-East region (e.g. Arunchal Pradesh) who are complacent about the status quo.<br />

53


Such groups do not call for sovereignty. Instead, they tend to favour certain provisions and rights<br />

enshrined within the existing Constitution <strong>of</strong> India. These groups have been criticised for being<br />

unaware <strong>of</strong> their historical independent political existence and their lack <strong>of</strong> capacity to organise or<br />

form self-determination movements on a large scale. The common denominator characterising all<br />

three groups has been the identity crisis and a sense <strong>of</strong> alienation from their Indian counterparts.<br />

Conflict with the Indian state: Militarisation and neocolonialism in the region<br />

In the North-East, the Union <strong>of</strong> India is largely represented by paramilitary and army personnel, who<br />

are <strong>of</strong>ten responsible for the violation <strong>of</strong> human rights in the region. Human rights violations have<br />

been perpetrated in the name <strong>of</strong> providing protection and security to the people <strong>of</strong> the region, thereby<br />

compounding the sense <strong>of</strong> alienation and North-Eastern people's difficulty in identifying with so-called<br />

mainland India. The militarisation <strong>of</strong> the GoI's presence in the North-East is thus directly or indirectly<br />

linked to the resurgence <strong>of</strong> insurgency movements in the region.<br />

Neocolonialism has also been a cause for great concern in the North-East. Even though the Indian<br />

state, as the successor to British colonialism, is responsible for the administration <strong>of</strong> the North-East<br />

region, today the North-East people are apprehensive about the danger <strong>of</strong> the continued siphoning <strong>of</strong><br />

resources by the GoI from the region. Petroleum, forest resources and various minerals are among<br />

the many resources siphoned by the GoI.<br />

Inter-community conflict and the issue <strong>of</strong> foreign influx<br />

The influx <strong>of</strong> foreigners into the North-East has become alarming. It appears that the region has<br />

become a ``dumping ground'' for refugees and foreign nationals. In some areas, such as Tripura and<br />

parts <strong>of</strong> Assam, the influx <strong>of</strong> foreigners, particularly from Bangladesh, has dramatically altered the<br />

population demographics. The other states, namely Mizoram (influx <strong>of</strong> Hajongs mainly from<br />

Bangladesh), Nagaland (Miyas-Muslim mainly from Bangladesh via Assam), Manipur (Burmese<br />

nationals mainly <strong>of</strong> Chin-Kuki groups), and Arunachal Pradesh (Chakmas mainly from Bangladesh),<br />

have also experienced the burden <strong>of</strong> uncontrolled and unregulated influx <strong>of</strong> foreigners. Since there is<br />

no clear policy for responding to foreigners and their associated concerns and integration, the<br />

potential for inter-community conflict continues to grow. In fact, historically ethnic conflicts in the<br />

North-East region have also represented a significant obstacle for peaceful co-existence among the<br />

region's people. Most <strong>of</strong> the causal factors for these conflicts are deep-seated and historically<br />

situated. For instance, the ethnic conflict in Assam between the Boros (earlier called Bodos) and the<br />

Santhals (immigrant adivasis from Jharkhand in Eastern India) 5 , was initiated by the British for their<br />

own dubious reasons. Similarly, conflict between the Nagas, the indigenous people <strong>of</strong> the region and<br />

the Kukis began after the British located the Kukis in Manipur 6 and other parts <strong>of</strong> the North-East in<br />

the 19th century. In another case, due to the partition <strong>of</strong> Bengal and the chauvinism <strong>of</strong> the Bengalee<br />

settlers in Tripura, the indigenous people <strong>of</strong> Tripura have been reduced to just about 29%. Ethnic<br />

conflicts in the North-East region tends to be related to ethnic chauvinism, exploitation and<br />

discrimination <strong>of</strong> subordinated tribes by the dominant groups across the advanced plains peoples <strong>of</strong><br />

Assam, Manipur and Tripura.<br />

54


Under-development, lack <strong>of</strong> infrastructure and conflict<br />

Under-development and the lack <strong>of</strong> infrastructure are serious problems in the North-East. Except for<br />

some parts <strong>of</strong> Assam, signs <strong>of</strong> varying levels <strong>of</strong> under-development are evident throughout the<br />

region. The hill peoples or tribes are the victims <strong>of</strong> discrimination and exploitation by the so-called<br />

dominant and more advanced plains peoples. The dominance <strong>of</strong> the plains peoples, especially in the<br />

realm <strong>of</strong> government and politics, and the location <strong>of</strong> all the main public administration <strong>of</strong>fices in the<br />

plains (respective capital cities) entrenches the exploitation <strong>of</strong> the hill peoples.<br />

The lack <strong>of</strong> an education system is also a major problem in the North-East. Although there is at least<br />

one university 7 , in each <strong>of</strong> the seven sister states, the hill peoples (in plains-dominated states) do not<br />

have access to universities, or sufficient colleges and schools in their areas. In Manipur, even though<br />

hill areas constitute 90% <strong>of</strong> the total area <strong>of</strong> the state, no university has been provided for the<br />

extensive tribal areas. Furthermore, tribal students, teachers and administrative staff are poorly<br />

represented at Manipur <strong>University</strong> and colleges.<br />

High levels <strong>of</strong> politicisation, nepotism and the politics <strong>of</strong> hatred directed at the disfranchised tribes<br />

seem to be part <strong>of</strong> the schemes employed by the so-called dominant plain's people. Similarly, the<br />

tribal communities in Assam that qualify for at least two or three central state universities in view <strong>of</strong><br />

their substantial population do not have a university. If such minimum infrastructure is not provided by<br />

the central or state government, then one can well imagine the lack <strong>of</strong> scope for local communities in<br />

the undeveloped and `backward' tribal areas <strong>of</strong> the region.<br />

Conflicts resulting from politics <strong>of</strong> language imposition<br />

Exploitation and discrimination <strong>of</strong> subordinated groups is also associated with the imposition <strong>of</strong><br />

language in the North-East. Even though Assam has only recently been divided into several states,<br />

Assamese linguistic and cultural hegemony and the continued imposition <strong>of</strong> the Manipuri 8 language<br />

on the tribes compromises the identity and cultural heritage <strong>of</strong> the minorities, thereby undermining<br />

prospects for peace and reconciliation.<br />

INDO-NAGA CONFLICT<br />

Following the preceding overview <strong>of</strong> the nature <strong>of</strong> the conflict in the North-East region, in this section<br />

I focus on one case study, namely Indo-Naga conflict, and consider the crucial associated issues <strong>of</strong><br />

conflict and peacebuilding.<br />

I have chosen the Indo-Naga conflict and peace process for six main reasons:<br />

(1) The current peace process has resulted in casualties, security-related violence and human rights<br />

violations in the states <strong>of</strong> Nagaland and Manipur.<br />

(2) The current peace process was launched on the basis <strong>of</strong> non-violence and bilateral dialogue and<br />

negotiation.<br />

(3) This peace process involves the GoI and the National Socialist Council <strong>of</strong> Nagalim (NSCN),<br />

which is considered to be the `mother' <strong>of</strong> all people's movements for self-determination in the<br />

55


egion. The current Indo-Naga peace process has been re-launched after the deadlock <strong>of</strong> the first<br />

peace process (1964-1972).<br />

(4) The peace process is viewed by other groups seeking self-determination in the region as a<br />

potential model for conflict resolution.<br />

(5) The current dialogue is free <strong>of</strong> any preconditions; involves the highest level (at the Prime<br />

Ministerial level); and is held in a third country, outside India.<br />

(6) The involvement and support <strong>of</strong> the various civil society groups (both national and international)<br />

and other world communities.<br />

Nature and history <strong>of</strong> the Indo-Naga conflict<br />

The Indo-Naga conflict is sociocultural, economic, historical and political in nature. The main<br />

contesting issue is that the Nagas define themselves as an independent nation, requiring the GoI not<br />

to interfere with their affairs. Historically the Nagas were independently governed people in their<br />

present homeland, which is located in the hilly confluence <strong>of</strong> India, China and Myanmar 9 . Every Naga<br />

village was an independent self-governing system run by the villagers themselves according to<br />

democratic principles.<br />

According to recorded history, the first outsiders the Nagas encountered were the Ahoms, sometime<br />

in 1228 AD (see Vashum, 2000). Although the encounter was fierce, the two gradually became good<br />

neighbours, with the relationship lasting for about 600 years. The second foreign group the Nagas<br />

encountered was the British in 1832 when the British sought to link their base in Burma (now<br />

Myanmar) with Assam. By 1890 the British had conquered most <strong>of</strong> the Naga country; only about onethird<br />

remained unconquered 10 . Despite this history the GoI claims that Nagas are part <strong>of</strong> the Union <strong>of</strong><br />

India since areas inhabited by the Naga (presumably Naga areas currently in the Indian Union) are<br />

part <strong>of</strong> what India inherited from the British at independence. Following such claims the Indian<br />

leaders wanted to incorporate the Naga areas 11 and other areas <strong>of</strong> the region into the Union <strong>of</strong> India.<br />

Some initiatives for arriving at consensus were undertaken by both the leaders <strong>of</strong> the GoI and the<br />

Naga, represented by the Naga National Council, in 1946. According to the Nine-Point Agreement <strong>of</strong><br />

1947 12 , the Nagas would have an interim arrangement for ten years with maximum autonomy (see<br />

Vashum, 2000). The Governor <strong>of</strong> Assam was to take responsibility for the observance <strong>of</strong> the terms <strong>of</strong><br />

the Agreement. Although the Nagas were aware that the Agreement was short on sovereignty, it was<br />

largely viewed as a good beginning for Naga nation-building and peacemaking with the GoI.<br />

However, the GoI immediately withdrew from the Agreement to the humiliation <strong>of</strong> the Nagas. The<br />

Nagas then unilaterally declared independence on 14 August 1947 (a day before the declaration <strong>of</strong><br />

Indian independence) with the blessing <strong>of</strong> Mahatma Gandhi, the father <strong>of</strong> the Indian nation. On 14<br />

August 1947 the Nagas also made their decision known to India, the United Kingdom and the United<br />

Nations. Thus, the foundation for the Indo-Naga conflict was created.<br />

At the heart <strong>of</strong> the conflict we discern a contradiction between the principles <strong>of</strong> `voluntary<br />

participation' and `people's consent' that guided the formation <strong>of</strong> the Indian Union in 1947 and the<br />

tendency <strong>of</strong> the GoI to co-opt princely states (including the Nagas) through coercion.<br />

56


The conflict escalated into a war between India and the Nagas in 1954 when hundreds <strong>of</strong> thousands<br />

<strong>of</strong> Indian army troops assumed control <strong>of</strong> the Naga Hills (see Mullick, 1972; Nibedon, 1983; Vashum,<br />

2000). The Nagas, under the aegis <strong>of</strong> the Naga National Council (NNC), formed their own<br />

government (called the Federal Government <strong>of</strong> Nagaland) by drawing up their own Constitution<br />

called Yehzabo. The GoI enacted an extraordinary armed law called the Armed Forces (Special<br />

Powers) Act (AFSPA) in 1958 in order to suppress the Naga movement for self-determination. This<br />

Act accorded the GoI extraordinary powers that were not possible through the lapsed Terrorist and<br />

Disruptive Activities (Prevention) Act <strong>of</strong> 1987 (TADA) and the Prevention <strong>of</strong> Terrorism Act <strong>of</strong> 2002<br />

(POTA) (see Vashum, 2002). The AFSPA is still operating in many parts <strong>of</strong> the North-East region.<br />

This war was followed by the creation <strong>of</strong> the Nagaland state in 1963. The state was not acceptable to<br />

the NNC and larger sections <strong>of</strong> Naga society. Thus, a peace initiative, which spanned from 1964 to<br />

1972, was launched to address Indo-Naga conflict, (see Aram, 1974; Gundevia, 1975; Haksar<br />

Horam, 1988; Iralu, 1999; Ramunny, 1993; Vashum, 2000). Despite several rounds <strong>of</strong> talks, including<br />

engagement at Prime Ministerial level, the negotiations failed. The main stumbling block remained<br />

the divergence between the GoI's and the NNC's respective positions. The NNC insisted on complete<br />

sovereignty/independence, while the GoI resisted the proposal <strong>of</strong> the Nagas. Subsequently, the Indo-<br />

Naga war was resumed. In November 1975 there was a national emergency in India, and the GoI<br />

had a few NNC leaders to sign an accord called the Shillong Accord 13 under duress (see Vashum,<br />

2000). The Accord represented an instrument <strong>of</strong> surrender <strong>of</strong> NNC cadres to the GoI. Thus, the<br />

NSCN was mandated in 1980 to spearhead the Naga struggle for self-determination under the<br />

leadership <strong>of</strong> Isak Swu (then Vice-President <strong>of</strong> the NNC), Th. Muivah (then General Secretary <strong>of</strong> the<br />

NNC) and S.S. Khaplang, a veteran leader <strong>of</strong> the NNC from eastern Nagaland (situated in Myanmar).<br />

However, since the mid-1980s the GoI has made several attempts to launch dialogue with the Naga<br />

leaders. After many attempts and gestures, P.V. Narasimha Rao, former Prime Minister <strong>of</strong> India,<br />

made a breakthrough by winning the goodwill <strong>of</strong> the Naga (NSCN) leaders and so re-launched<br />

another peace initiative in 1995. The formal ceasefire and peace process began on 1 August 1997.<br />

As the previous dialogue, three terms were agreed on as the basis for peace talks: (1) the talks were<br />

to be unconditional; (2) the talks were to engage the highest level <strong>of</strong> leadership, including the Prime<br />

Minister <strong>of</strong> India; and (3) the venue <strong>of</strong> the talks was to be outside India. A Ceasefire Monitoring<br />

Group (CMG or CFMG) was also constituted to oversee and guide the efficient functioning <strong>of</strong> the<br />

agreed ceasefire and associated ground rules.<br />

The dialogue gained significant support through the involvement <strong>of</strong> successive Prime Ministers <strong>of</strong><br />

India, the involvement <strong>of</strong> national and international civil society movements, and the overall moral<br />

support <strong>of</strong> the world community.<br />

In July 2004, the peace process was seven years old. So it would be pertinent to ask: What has been<br />

achieved thus far? While there is no substantive answer, it is apparent that there are elements <strong>of</strong><br />

`insincerity' and so-called `compulsions', especially on the part <strong>of</strong> the GoI, that have impacted<br />

negatively on the course <strong>of</strong> the current peace process.<br />

57


RECONCILIATION, THE PEACEBUILDING PROCESS AND ITS IMPLICATIONS<br />

Reconciliation and peacebuilding<br />

Although reconciliation may seem irrelevant in the context <strong>of</strong> the peace process in the North-East<br />

region, the Indo-Naga peace process will ultimately need to embrace elements <strong>of</strong> `reconciliation' and<br />

goodwill. But can the Nagas `forgive' the Indians for killing thousands <strong>of</strong> Nagas, and torturing and<br />

humiliating many more in the process <strong>of</strong> suppressing the Naga movement for self-determination?<br />

Can the Indians in turn forgive some <strong>of</strong> the excesses committed by the Nagas against the innocent<br />

civilians in the process <strong>of</strong> defending their right to self-determination?<br />

The recent encouraging statement that the ``Government <strong>of</strong> India recognises the unique history and<br />

situation <strong>of</strong> Nagas'' 14 (Vashum, 2002, p.93) represents a new development in the history <strong>of</strong> the peace<br />

process between the GoI and the Nagas, since in itself it contains a process <strong>of</strong> admitting the `truth',<br />

the basis for reconciliation. The statement reflects a growing commitment by the GoI to understand<br />

the complexities and Naga claims in the Indo-Naga engagement. The Naga leaders' readiness ``to<br />

understand ten times more if the Indians are willing to understand the situation <strong>of</strong> the Nagas'' 15 , will<br />

perhaps boost the prospects for truth and reconciliation and ultimately peacebuidling.<br />

Despite several hiccups and misunderstandings in the peace process, the negotiating parties seem<br />

to have been investing their best efforts to address the hurdles.<br />

PROSPECTS OF THE PEACEBUILDING PROCESS<br />

By way <strong>of</strong> conclusion I <strong>of</strong>fer comments on the conditions required to increase the prospects for<br />

success in the Indo-Naga peace process. The success <strong>of</strong> the peace talks will depend a great deal on<br />

the following factors.<br />

Sincerity, political will and commitment: The importance <strong>of</strong> these factors in peace initiatives has been<br />

frequently noted and reported in the media, with good reason. Accordingly, it is imperative for the GoI<br />

to demonstrate that it is seriously committed to the peace process. Certain measures need to be<br />

implemented to boost the peace talks, and to ensure that actions and policies that would jeopardise<br />

the peace process, such as the GoI backtracking on the Bangkok Agreement on ceasefire coverage,<br />

should not be repeated. The impact <strong>of</strong> the GoI backtracking on the Bangkok Agreement almost led to<br />

the NSCN's withdrawal from peace talks. The timely intervention <strong>of</strong> civil society groups, particularly<br />

Naga civil society groups, facilitated the NSCN's continued involvement in the peace talks.<br />

On their part, the Nagas should demonstrate their commitment to solving the 55-year-old Indo-Naga<br />

conflict even though there has been some misunderstanding between the GoI and the Nagas in the<br />

course <strong>of</strong> the peace process.<br />

Confidence building: The GoI and the Nagas should give due importance to confidence building. The<br />

Nagas, for example, have experienced many instances <strong>of</strong> GoI betrayal, beginning with the Nine-Point<br />

Agreement in June 1947.<br />

58


Trust: Trusting each other is a great challenge for the two parties involved in peace talks. In other<br />

words, they should be able to overcome the `mistrust' that could destroy the peace process.<br />

Sensitivity and understanding: The parties concerned should be sensitive to, and uphold the agreedupon<br />

principles, ground rules and issues under discussion.<br />

Restraint: The negotiating parties should demonstrate maximum restraint. Any act or opinion that<br />

could have a damaging effect on the peace dialogue should be avoided at all costs.<br />

Creating an appropriate and peaceful situation: The GoI and the Nagas should consider the<br />

importance <strong>of</strong> maintaining an appropriate atmosphere for continuing the peace talks. No matter how<br />

difficult the challenges are in the course <strong>of</strong> the talks, the two parties, with the cooperation and support<br />

<strong>of</strong> the public, should be determined to proceed until the goal <strong>of</strong> peace is achieved.<br />

Addressing the core issues <strong>of</strong> conflict: The prospects <strong>of</strong> the peace process will depend on whether<br />

the negotiating parties can sincerely address the core issues <strong>of</strong> the conflict. The success <strong>of</strong> the talks<br />

will depend greatly on the ability <strong>of</strong> the negotiating parties to settle differences by accommodating the<br />

difficulties and interests <strong>of</strong> both sides.<br />

Role <strong>of</strong> political parties: The politicians have a major role to play in supporting the success <strong>of</strong> the<br />

Indo-Naga peace process. The goodwill and cooperation <strong>of</strong> the various political parties will give the<br />

process for settling the conflict a great boost. The political parties need to reach a broad consensus<br />

on the peace process being a national issue that needs to be considered above party politics and<br />

petty politicking. Hence, any political statements or actions that will jeopardise the peace process<br />

should be avoided at all costs.<br />

Involvement <strong>of</strong> civil society groups: Involvement <strong>of</strong> civil society groups, be it at local, regional,<br />

national and/or international levels, will be <strong>of</strong> immense benefit to the ongoing peace process.<br />

However, the involvement <strong>of</strong> civil society groups from Naga society and mainland India will be most<br />

crucial. This process will involve creating a democratic space for the involvement <strong>of</strong> civil society<br />

groups by the GoI on the one hand and the NSCN on the other.<br />

Civil society groups are to act as facilitators, and to sensitise the population to the nature <strong>of</strong> the<br />

conflict. Civil society groups could also be involved in the mobilisation <strong>of</strong> people's participation in the<br />

peace process. The people should be kept informed on the development <strong>of</strong> the peace process<br />

through documentation and dissemination <strong>of</strong> information. Civil society groups can also help maintain<br />

peace and assist in the functioning <strong>of</strong> the ceasefire monitoring process. Civil society groups in the<br />

North-East may also consider initiating inter-community dialogue to resolve problems in a peaceful<br />

manner.<br />

Role <strong>of</strong> the media: The media has been a very controversial player in the North-East conflict.<br />

Misreporting by the media, distortion <strong>of</strong> information and/or providing partial information on relevant<br />

issues and situations has <strong>of</strong>ten compounded the conflict in the North-East. The media has <strong>of</strong>ten<br />

spawned suspicion among the people in the North-East by making unsubstantiated statements and<br />

reports. The media needs to be more responsible in writing about the issues <strong>of</strong> the North-East,<br />

59


particularly sensitive issues such as the ongoing Indo-Naga peace process. It should not succumb to<br />

pressures from interest groups or its own prejudices.<br />

Role <strong>of</strong> the intelligentsia: The role <strong>of</strong> the intelligentsia in building society or in conflict resolution has<br />

always been crucial. However, not much has been done so far in this regard in the Indo-Naga peace<br />

process. A few recent writings by Indian scholars on the Indo-Naga peace process have been largely<br />

based on distorted sources, or the writers are themselves ignorant <strong>of</strong> the hard reality, or are not<br />

addressing the core issues. The reluctance to follow the history and development <strong>of</strong> the Indo-Naga<br />

peace process has been one <strong>of</strong> the main problems with most <strong>of</strong> the so-called scholars who claim to<br />

be experts on North-East issues. Consequently, the mainland Indian intelligentsia is regarded with<br />

suspicion by the North-East people. The intelligentsia therefore needs to undertake confidencebuilding<br />

exercises in order for the people to consider the constructive and facilitative roles scholars<br />

may play in the situation <strong>of</strong> conflict resolution and peacemaking.<br />

NOTES<br />

1. Recently, Sikkim has come to be considered part <strong>of</strong> the North East region. I have not mentioned<br />

this in the article for technical reasons.<br />

2. In the North-East, the concept <strong>of</strong> `self-determination' presents as multi-layered. The movements<br />

in the region can be classified into two broad categories <strong>of</strong> self-determination Ð internal (those<br />

struggling for autonomy and certain status within the framework <strong>of</strong> the Constitution <strong>of</strong> India), and<br />

external (those struggling outside the framework <strong>of</strong> the Constitution <strong>of</strong> India).<br />

3. The Nagas would also call it a `war <strong>of</strong> resistance' against the coercive occupation <strong>of</strong> Nagalim<br />

(Naga Land) by India and Myanmar (erstwhile Burma).<br />

4. The VIth Schedule to the Constitution <strong>of</strong> India <strong>of</strong>fers some protective power and authority to the<br />

districts coming under it. Such status is so far applicable to some <strong>of</strong> the North-East states <strong>of</strong><br />

India. The tribes <strong>of</strong> Manipur have been demanding such limited autonomy for over a decade.<br />

Ironically, the Government <strong>of</strong> Manipur (Meitei/Manipuri dominated state) has not been willing to<br />

concede this minimum demand, to the disappointment <strong>of</strong> the tribes. The tribes <strong>of</strong> Manipur have<br />

now gone a step ahead by demanding the status <strong>of</strong> Union Territory.<br />

5. Jharkhand state was formed in 2001. The region was previously part <strong>of</strong> Bihar state.<br />

6. Manipur was once a princely state and merged with the Indian Union in October 1949, two<br />

years after the formation <strong>of</strong> the Indian Union. Today, some sections <strong>of</strong> the Manipuris (Meiteis)<br />

are up in arms against the merger <strong>of</strong> Manipur into the Union <strong>of</strong> India. According to them, the<br />

then Maharaja (head <strong>of</strong> the Manipur princely state) signed the Merger Agreement in 1949 under<br />

duress.<br />

7. Assam has four conventional universities (including two central universities), Manipur has two<br />

(including one agricultural university), Meghalaya has one (central university), Tripura has one<br />

(state university), Nagaland has one (central university), Mizoram has one (central university)<br />

and Arunachal Pradesh has one (state university).<br />

8. Manipuri is also called Meiteilon in local dialect, which is language <strong>of</strong> the dominant Manipuri/<br />

Meitei ethnic group.<br />

9. The homeland is about 1 000 000 sq km and is situated in the Patkai range between longitude<br />

60


938 E and 978 E and latitude 23 1/28 N and 288 N. Today, the Nagas are located within two<br />

sovereign states Ð India (about 2/3 <strong>of</strong> the Naga population) and Myanmar (about 1/3 <strong>of</strong> the<br />

Naga population). Even within India the Nagas are located in four administrative states, namely<br />

Nagaland, Manipur, Arunachal Pradesh and Assam.<br />

10. The Nagas refer to the unconquered Naga country as `Free Nagaland'. It is located mainly on<br />

the north-western border <strong>of</strong> Myanmar.<br />

11. The Naga areas referred to here represent just two-thirds <strong>of</strong> the Naga's territory. About one-third<br />

<strong>of</strong> the Naga areas are located in Myanmar.<br />

12. The Nine-Point Agreement was signed between the GoI, represented by the then Governor <strong>of</strong><br />

Assam, Sir Akbar Hydari, and the Nagas, represented by the Naga National Council. It was<br />

agreed on during their meeting from 27-29 June, 1947.<br />

13. The Shillong Accord was mainly an instrument <strong>of</strong> the Nagas' surrender to India. According to<br />

the so-called Naga leaders who signed the Accord, the Accord was signed under duress.<br />

14. The Indo-Naga Joint Communique was signed at Amsterdam on 11 July 2002.<br />

15. The statement has been repeatedly made by Th. Muivah, the General Secretary <strong>of</strong> the NSCN,<br />

and the chief Naga negotiator <strong>of</strong> the Indo-Naga dialogue, in his interviews with the press and<br />

consultations with various concerned civil society groups.<br />

REFERENCES<br />

Alexander, Y. & Friedlander, R.A. (1980). Self-determination: National, regional, and global<br />

dimensions. Boulder, Colo.: Westview.<br />

Aram, M. (1974). Peace in Nagaland: Eight-year story 1964-72. New Delhi: Arnold-Heinemann.<br />

Cassese, A. (1981). The self-determination <strong>of</strong> peoples. In L. Henkins (Ed.), The international bill <strong>of</strong><br />

rights: The covenant <strong>of</strong> civil and political rights (n.p.). New York: Columbia <strong>University</strong> Press.<br />

Chen, L.C. (1976). Self-determination as a human right. In M. Reismann & B. Weston (Eds), Toward<br />

world order and human dignity (pp. 198-262). New York: Free Press.<br />

Cobban, A. (1969). The nation state and national self-determination. New York: Thomas Y. Cromwell.<br />

Cobo, J.R.M. (1986). Study <strong>of</strong> the problem <strong>of</strong> discrimination against indigenous populations. UN Doc.<br />

E/CN. 4/Sub. 2/1996/7/Add. 4, 29, paras 378-80.<br />

Gundevia, Y.D. (1975). War and peace in Nagaland. New Delhi: Palit and Palit.<br />

Haksar, N. & Luithui, L. (1984). Nagaland file: A question <strong>of</strong> human rights. New Delhi: Lancer<br />

International.<br />

Hannum, H. (1992). Autonomy, sovereignty, and self-determination: The accommodation <strong>of</strong><br />

conflicting rights. Philadelphia, USA: <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> Pennsylvania Press.<br />

Horam, M. (1988). Naga insurgency: The last thirty years. New Delhi: Cosmo.<br />

61


Iralu, N. (1999). A critical analysis <strong>of</strong> the Naga political struggle. In G.A. Ghevarghese (Ed.), Patkai<br />

Christian College: The twenty fifth anniversary souvenir (n.p.). Chumukedima-Seithekema<br />

(Nagaland): Patkai Christian College.<br />

Mullick, B.N. (1972). My years with Nehru: 1948-1964. Bombay: Allied.<br />

Nibedon, N. (1983). Nagaland: The night <strong>of</strong> the guerrillas. New Delhi: Lancers Publishers.<br />

Ramunny, M. (1993). The world <strong>of</strong> Nagas. New Delhi: Northern Book Centre.<br />

Sanajaoba, N. (1994). Right <strong>of</strong> nations to self-determination: Principles and practices. In N.<br />

Sanajaoba (Ed.), Human rights: Principles, practices & abuses (pp. 38-65). New Delhi: Omsons.<br />

Sanders, D. (1993). Indigenous peoples in the international stage. In W. Fernandes (Ed.), The<br />

indigenous question: Search for an identity (n.p.). New Delhi: Indian Social Institute.<br />

Vashum, R. (1996). Self-determination: Principles, meanings and practices. Indian Anthropologist,<br />

26(1), 63-76.<br />

Vashum, R. (1999). Nationality question in India: The Naga case. Social Action, 49(4), 413-430.<br />

Vashum, R. (2000). Nagas' right to self-determination: Anthropological-historical perspective. New<br />

Delhi: Mittal.<br />

Vashum, R. (Ed.) (2002). The Indo-Naga Joint CommuniqueÂ. Naga Journal <strong>of</strong> Indigenous Affairs,<br />

2(1).<br />

62


CONFLICT MANAGEMENT IN THE<br />

INDIAN SUBCONTINENT: THE<br />

DIMENSIONS OF HINDU-MUSLIM<br />

CONFLICT<br />

Iqbal A. Ansari 1<br />

Minorities Council and Human Rights Today<br />

ABSTRACT<br />

The Indo-Pak-Bangladesh subcontinent presents a particularly challenging case for the study and<br />

development <strong>of</strong> appropriate models <strong>of</strong> conflict management for those who want to promote durable<br />

peace and stability in the volatile Indian sub-continent where both India and Pakistan house nuclear<br />

arms. In this article, I will provide a brief outline <strong>of</strong> some <strong>of</strong> the dimensions <strong>of</strong> the present communal<br />

and regional conflict, and will highlight selected and salient features <strong>of</strong> a model for conflict<br />

management as located within a human rights framework.<br />

THE ROOTS AND NATURE OF THE INDO-PAK CONFLICT<br />

In spite <strong>of</strong> the universally acknowledged fact that India fought a non-violent war <strong>of</strong> independence and<br />

Indian claims to being inheritors <strong>of</strong> long-established traditions <strong>of</strong> spirituality and peace, that are<br />

defining characteristic <strong>of</strong> their civilisation, the region has witnessed holocausts, wars and massacres<br />

involving colossal loss <strong>of</strong> life, and the migration and internal displacement <strong>of</strong> millions <strong>of</strong> people. This<br />

violence has characterised partition in 1947, Indo-Pak wars, the secession <strong>of</strong> Bangladesh in 1971,<br />

and during periodic communal clashes in each country, especially in India where the threat <strong>of</strong> civil<br />

war has been held out by those responsible for crimes against humanity in the west Indian Gujarat<br />

state in February and March 2002. This discrepancy between the collective self-image <strong>of</strong> Indians,<br />

especially Hindus, and the history <strong>of</strong> unpalatable violence constitutes one <strong>of</strong> the difficulties to be<br />

surmounted in any attempt at building durable structures <strong>of</strong> peace.<br />

ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ<br />

1. Please direct all correspondence to Iqbal A. Ansari, Minorities Council and Human Rights Today, 20, Jaswant Apartments, Okhla, New Delhi-110025, India;<br />

Tel. + 0991 11 26324452; E-mail: iqbalansari2001@hotmail.com<br />

63


Unlike <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, which was able to keep its territorial integrity intact, India at the moment <strong>of</strong><br />

liberation had to undergo the tragic experience <strong>of</strong> an irrational partition, which did not neatly divide<br />

people into a Muslim Pakistan and a Hindu India. Muslims who continued to live in India constituted<br />

about 10% <strong>of</strong> India's population in 1947, and are now more than 12%, unevenly distributed over<br />

almost every part <strong>of</strong> India.<br />

Some kind <strong>of</strong> Indo-Pak Truth and Reconciliation Commission (IP-TRC) would possibly have been<br />

attempted if Mahatma Gandhi had not been assassinated. Such an IP-TRC may have dealt with a<br />

focus on wider terms with the complex reality in the region and the discrepancies between self-image<br />

and history. Gandhi's assassination resulted from his perceived appeasement <strong>of</strong> Muslim Pakistan,<br />

and so was executed by a person associated with a Hindu nationalist militant organisation which<br />

resented Gandhi's insistence that the Indian government grant Pakistan its due share <strong>of</strong> funds. Such<br />

an IP-TRC might also have had the mandate to evolve ways and means <strong>of</strong> healing the wounds <strong>of</strong><br />

partition and to probe why and how things went wrong. Why, for example, was the idea <strong>of</strong> a loose<br />

federation, or even confederation, not accepted, and why was any consociational model <strong>of</strong> power<br />

sharing not given a chance?<br />

The conditions under which Pakistan came into existence made its leadership apprehensive <strong>of</strong><br />

India's plans for its liquidation. Both the champions <strong>of</strong> Hindu Akhand Bharat and secular democratic<br />

leaders <strong>of</strong> the Indian National Congress, including Nehru, failed to make Pakistanis feel that India<br />

had wholeheartedly accepted them, and had stakes in the country's stability. Nehru is reported to<br />

have said in defence <strong>of</strong> his acceptance <strong>of</strong> partition that ``may be in this way we shall reach that united<br />

India sooner than otherwise'' (Mosley, 1961, p. 248; also see Menon, 1957). The ongoing sense <strong>of</strong><br />

threat and vulnerability Ð real or perceived among Pakistanis Ð caused by the physical and ethnic<br />

separation <strong>of</strong> Pakistan's eastern wing, and the dispute over Jammu and Kashmir that also lead to<br />

armed hostilities, caused the Pakistani elite to seek military aid. Consequently, Pakistan entered into<br />

regional defence alliances such as the <strong>South</strong>east Asia Treaty Organisation (SEATO) and Central<br />

Treaty Organisation (CENTO). Nehru in turn raised the alarm over these Pakistani responses,<br />

characterising them as acts <strong>of</strong> war against India.<br />

These adversarial relations were exacerbated by the superpower politics <strong>of</strong> the Cold War. Even<br />

though Pakistani leaders <strong>of</strong>fered common defence to India in its military confrontation with China in<br />

1962, India waged war against Pakistan in 1965. Aside from the military costs, the Indo-Pak war<br />

intensified the Indo-Pak national and Hindu-Muslim communal divide throughout the entire region.<br />

The most affected victims were Indian Muslims who were, un<strong>of</strong>ficially and on occasions <strong>of</strong>ficially,<br />

treated as a suspect community in spite <strong>of</strong> the Indian Constitution guaranteeing equal rights to all<br />

citizens, and minorities a collective right to a distinct cultural identity.<br />

The hostilities intensified when India actively supported the dismemberment <strong>of</strong> Pakistan in 1971<br />

through the formation <strong>of</strong> Bangladesh. For the Pakistani elite, especially its military, the humiliating<br />

defeat in Dhaka, Bangladesh wounded its psyche because <strong>of</strong> its perception <strong>of</strong> India as the chief<br />

architect <strong>of</strong> the secession. The Simla Agreement <strong>of</strong> 1972 <strong>of</strong>fered an opportunity to Pakistan to rethink<br />

its very ideological basis <strong>of</strong> existence in terns <strong>of</strong> religion-based nationalism, to escape the obsession<br />

<strong>of</strong> completing the agenda <strong>of</strong> partition by acquiring control over Kashmir, and to normalise relations<br />

with its neighbour. The year 1971 had the potential <strong>of</strong> becoming a turning point in the history <strong>of</strong> the<br />

64


subcontinent, as the Hindu elite <strong>of</strong> all shades had felt reassured by what had been characterised as<br />

the surrender <strong>of</strong> the Pakistani army in Bangladesh and as the weakening <strong>of</strong> Islamic militancy in India.<br />

However, the path <strong>of</strong> reconciliation was not taken primarily because Pakistan at the time was ruled by<br />

a leader who was inspired with the ambition <strong>of</strong> resisting perceived Indian hegemonic designs, and <strong>of</strong><br />

seeking parity with India, as was evident in the eloquent speech he delivered in the UN General<br />

Assembly during the 1965 Indo-Pakistan war. In 1972 Bhutto prepared the blueprint <strong>of</strong> what he<br />

characterised, in civilisational terms, as an Islamic bomb. He was partly led into this course by his<br />

desire to escape being blackmailed by a nuclear India. India's nuclear arms status was confirmed by<br />

the 1974 Pokharan test. The search for hegemonic power by one, and <strong>of</strong> parity <strong>of</strong> sorts by the other,<br />

led eventually to Pokharan II and Chagai Hills.<br />

Later in 1979 Soviet armed intervention in Afghanistan set Pakistan and India on divergent courses.<br />

In spite <strong>of</strong> the apparently persistent efforts by the Pakistani military ruler from 1980 onward for a nonaggression<br />

pact with India, and the latter's <strong>of</strong>fer <strong>of</strong> treaty <strong>of</strong> friendship, neither India nor Pakistan<br />

were motivated by any sense <strong>of</strong> the subcontinent's shared destiny. Pakistan had a strategic interest<br />

in the disengagement <strong>of</strong> its forces from its eastern border and, given India's friendly relations with<br />

and dependence on Soviet Russia, Pakistan could not afford to antagonise or even embarrass India.<br />

Pakistan's excessive involvement with the armed-resistance (Jihadi) in Afghanistan, conditions in<br />

Jammu and Kashmir, and India's mishandling <strong>of</strong> the Russian occupation <strong>of</strong> Afghanistan changed the<br />

entire subcontinental scene 1 . India's refusal, especially after Nehru, to heed any voice <strong>of</strong> sanity, like<br />

that <strong>of</strong> Jaya Prakash Narayan (see Narayan, 1964a, 1964b) who in 1964 highlighted the fate <strong>of</strong> the<br />

people <strong>of</strong> Jammu and Kashmir by virtue <strong>of</strong> their accumulated unaddressed anger, found militant<br />

expression between 1989 and 1990. The free flow <strong>of</strong> arms and Jihadi ideology arising in the wake <strong>of</strong><br />

armed resistance in Afghanistan provided fertile soil for the establishment <strong>of</strong> militant groups in<br />

Jammu and Kashmir.<br />

The last thirteen conflict-ridden years have witnessed innumerable episodes <strong>of</strong> brutality by the Indian<br />

state's forces, including torture, custodial and encounter killings, disappearances, reprisal killings <strong>of</strong><br />

innocent civilians and gang rapes <strong>of</strong> women, as well as indiscriminate acts <strong>of</strong> terrorist violence, and<br />

kidnapping and hostage taking <strong>of</strong> innocent people, including foreigners, by militant groups. This<br />

period has also witnessed the mass migration <strong>of</strong> Kashmiri Pandits from the Kashmir valley, bringing<br />

to the fore the communal dimension <strong>of</strong> the problem. In Jammu, militant attacks against innocent<br />

Hindus brought home the same message <strong>of</strong> communal hate 2 . The armies <strong>of</strong> the two countries, fully<br />

prepared for combat, were deployed on the border, facing each other for months. There were<br />

occasions when threats involving the possible deployment <strong>of</strong> nuclear weapons were resorted to.<br />

The search for nationhood: Illusion or reality<br />

Nehru questioned whether Kashmir is the key problem or a symptom <strong>of</strong> the partition <strong>of</strong> minds, lands,<br />

and the shared history and culture <strong>of</strong> a people. Is there a clash <strong>of</strong> civilisations at the heart <strong>of</strong> the<br />

continually conflictual state <strong>of</strong> existence involving vast numbers <strong>of</strong> people? The question acquires<br />

validity and relevance when we find that the creation <strong>of</strong> Pakistan, instead <strong>of</strong> solving British India's<br />

Hindu-Muslim problem, aggravated it, as there are a larger number <strong>of</strong> Muslims in India than there are<br />

in Pakistan. The Muslim community in India is periodically subjected to violence, justified by extremist<br />

65


Hindus who seek legitimation for their aggression in the perceived wrongs committed by British India,<br />

as well as during partition and within the context <strong>of</strong> medieval India when Muslim dynasties ruled over<br />

the country. Medieval Muslim rulers are supposed to have been responsible for destroying temples,<br />

ravaging the modesty <strong>of</strong> Hindu women, and for the forced conversion <strong>of</strong> infidel (Kafir) Hindus to<br />

Islam. However, what is forgotten is that the indigenous overwhelming majority <strong>of</strong> Indian Muslims, on<br />

embracing Islam, did not enjoy any share in power. Power and privilege were the exclusive domain <strong>of</strong><br />

the Muslim nobility from the alien lands and the collaborating Hindu castes.<br />

British administrator-historians who in the wake <strong>of</strong> the 1857 revolt, perceiving Muslims as the greater<br />

destabilising force, encouraged Hindus to revive the memory <strong>of</strong> a golden era <strong>of</strong> ancient Indian<br />

history, which was supposedly destroyed by Muslim rulers. This ideologically suspect venture to<br />

revive history and memory was avowedly motivated by the British policy <strong>of</strong> ``divide and rule'', which<br />

alone could ensure the survival <strong>of</strong> British colonial rule in India 3 (also see Barrier, 1976; Siddiqui,<br />

1993). Extending on its divide and rule policy, the British also in turn encouraged Muslims to develop<br />

an exaggerated fear that their interests will not be adequately protected if the newly formed Indian<br />

National Congress succeeded in securing independence.<br />

However, the entire range, direction and varying intensity <strong>of</strong> Hindu-Muslim conflict in the 19th century<br />

and the first four decades <strong>of</strong> the 20th century cannot only be explained in terms <strong>of</strong> British ``divide and<br />

rule'' policy. During the early decades, independently <strong>of</strong> the British, sections <strong>of</strong> both Hindus and<br />

Muslims had envisioned their separate destinies in exclusivist revivalist terms. Some members <strong>of</strong> the<br />

modern educated elite, familiar with secular democratic parlance, from within the two communities,<br />

were motivated and inspired by respective visions <strong>of</strong> Hindu and Muslim cultural aspirations, some <strong>of</strong><br />

which were traceable to the differences in the two religious traditions. It is possible to trace some <strong>of</strong><br />

the post-1857 Hindu-Muslim conflict to a clash over political and economic interests, described by<br />

sociologists as intra-community and inter-community elites in competition for control over power and<br />

resources. However, it would be a dangerous over-simplification to view the whole conflict over<br />

identity-related issues as nothing more than an economic tool for mobilising the masses. Each <strong>of</strong> the<br />

identity related issues, like cow protection, religious conversion, Urdu script, religious processions,<br />

Bande Mataram (Indian song) and the sanctity <strong>of</strong> holy places and personages, which were<br />

dexterously used for the political mobilisation <strong>of</strong> Hindus and Muslims, have a genuine core with the<br />

capacity to move millions.<br />

It is unfortunate that Nehru, a modernist influenced by Western secular and socialist thought and<br />

practice, had a dismissive attitude to identity related issues. Mahatma Gandhi, whose discourse and<br />

idiom were avowedly Hindu (though with a humane spiritual interpretation) and who conceived <strong>of</strong><br />

resolving communal conflict by recourse to the concept <strong>of</strong> the unity <strong>of</strong> all religions under the slogan <strong>of</strong><br />

Ram-Rahim, failed to touch Muslim imaginations. Hindus and Muslims, with a long history <strong>of</strong> living<br />

together, could have succeeded in evolving a model <strong>of</strong> government and society if institutional<br />

arrangements upheld law and convention, and consensual agreement accommodating both groups'<br />

distinct sectoral and common national values, aspirations and interests.<br />

The Westminster model <strong>of</strong> electoral systems frightened individuals such as Sir Syed Ahmad Khan,<br />

thought to be the originator <strong>of</strong> the idea <strong>of</strong> Muslim nationalism, because <strong>of</strong> the Hindu numerical<br />

dominance in representative institutions. Sir Syed Ahmad Khan feared that Hindus would try to settle<br />

66


old historical scores with Muslims. His fears were rooted in the Hindu elite's desire to replace the<br />

Persian script by the Nagri, and the emergence <strong>of</strong> Hindu revivalist movements, which were perceived<br />

as anti-Muslim and which had caused periodic riots 4 (also see Mohammad, 1972).<br />

One is struck by the lack <strong>of</strong> any creative attempt to develop a consociational model <strong>of</strong> power-sharing<br />

(under the Proportional Representation electoral system and coalition form <strong>of</strong> government), sectoral<br />

cultural autonomy and mutual veto within a federal polity, which could have kept a multi-cultural<br />

country together. The Motilal Nehru Report <strong>of</strong> 1928 made the following significant observation: ``We<br />

have no doubt that proportional representation will in future be the solution <strong>of</strong> our (communal)<br />

problem. It <strong>of</strong>fers the only rational and just way <strong>of</strong> meeting the fears and claims <strong>of</strong> various<br />

communities'' (All Parties Conference, 1975, n.p). However, the Report did not recommend the<br />

proportional representation system due to a lack <strong>of</strong> consensus about its workability.<br />

The history <strong>of</strong> political and constitutional developments during 1927-1946 gives the impression that<br />

the Hindu elite's preference for a strong centralised Indian state, based on what the Congress<br />

resolutions confirmed as ``pure undiluted nationalism'' (Indian National Congress, 1934, n.p.),<br />

contributed to partition becoming a reality. The post-1947 Indian state's experiment <strong>of</strong> managing its<br />

diversity has however convinced everyone that the idea <strong>of</strong> a ``pure undiluted nationalism'' in India is<br />

not workable. The idea <strong>of</strong> India as an undiluted nation state is what tore it apart. The search for parity<br />

with Hindu India on the part <strong>of</strong> the Muslim elite, including Sir Syed and Bhutto, also contributed to<br />

partition. In the rest <strong>of</strong> India, it became clear to the intellectual and political classes that India was not<br />

a nation, but one in the making. Nation-building would have been successfully accelerated if the<br />

concept <strong>of</strong> India's unity in diversity had been allowed to unfold within a plural, humanistic framework,<br />

assuring humane citizen-centred governance, the rule <strong>of</strong> law, and observance <strong>of</strong> human rights<br />

norms.<br />

The nature <strong>of</strong> Hindu-Muslim conflict<br />

In this section I will consider how Muslims have been treated, and examine why pre-independence<br />

Hindu-Muslim conflict has yet to be resolved.<br />

Settling old scores with Muslims and locating them in what is considered to be a proper place in<br />

society started with the process <strong>of</strong> framing the Constitution. Although Mahavir Tyagi's proposal to<br />

make the rights <strong>of</strong> minorities in India dependent on how Pakistan treated its minorities (Constituent<br />

Assembly, 1947) was rejected by Dr. Ambedkar, partition did cast its shadow over the framing <strong>of</strong> the<br />

Constitution. For example, safeguards for political and economic rights, provided for in the earlier<br />

versions <strong>of</strong> Draft Constitution, were finally and unceremoniously scrapped 5 . The demand for the right<br />

<strong>of</strong> the child to receive primary education in the mother tongue, unanimously made by Muslim<br />

members, was not acceded to and included in the Constitution because G.B. Pant maintained that<br />

having separate Urdu sections in schools would cost the exchequer a great deal <strong>of</strong> money. Moreover,<br />

he maintained that Urdu was no different from Hindi and that those who were keen on their children<br />

learning Urdu might send them to madrassas (Islamic schools) (Constituent Assembly, n.d). The<br />

promise contained in Article 29(1), that distinct languages and scripts would be conserved, has<br />

consequently remained a teasing illusion, at least for Urdu-speaking Indians.<br />

67


During the debate a staunch nationalist Muslim, Hasrat Mohani, was told to go to Pakistan when he<br />

made a fervent plea for the protection <strong>of</strong> the Urdu language. Articles 347 and 350(A), providing for<br />

the use <strong>of</strong> minority languages for <strong>of</strong>ficial and instructional purposes, are discretionary and not<br />

mandatory in nature. Though some states, like Bihar and Andhra, Maharashtra and Himachal<br />

Pradesh, have made provision for the <strong>of</strong>ficial use <strong>of</strong> Urdu for specified purposes, the demand for its<br />

becoming the second <strong>of</strong>ficial language in the State <strong>of</strong> Uttar Pradesh has remained unfulfilled, and has<br />

been causing communal tension and violence.<br />

It must be stressed that the loss <strong>of</strong> the Urdu script by its users (who happen to be largely Muslims) is<br />

a genuine grievance. The marginalisation <strong>of</strong> Urdu is best understood in the context <strong>of</strong> the fear <strong>of</strong><br />

cultural assimilation and disregard <strong>of</strong> Islamic religious teachings related to the regulation <strong>of</strong> relations<br />

in the family. It is my contention that from a purely humanistic perspective, cultural pluralism validates<br />

legal pluralism in family laws and so it is for the state to ensure that the right to cultural autonomy is<br />

exercised in a manner consistent with norms <strong>of</strong> equity and justice for all parties, especially women.<br />

In 1961 in Jabalpur communal riots were triggered by the news <strong>of</strong> the suicide <strong>of</strong> a Hindu girl in love<br />

with a Muslim boy. The Hindu Rashtravadis wanted to teach the Muslim community a lesson for their<br />

`historical role' <strong>of</strong> dishonouring Hindu women. Muslim houses were marked, just as was the case in<br />

Gujarat in 2002. The communal violence was marked by killings and large-scale destruction <strong>of</strong><br />

property, especially residential houses.<br />

The riots are reported to have shaken Prime Minister Nehru, who held the opinion that they were preplanned.<br />

The failure <strong>of</strong> the police in intelligence-gathering for the prevention <strong>of</strong> violence and<br />

subsequently in investigation and prosecution, which resulted in the acquittal <strong>of</strong> the rioters, has been<br />

noted by Justice Shiv Dayal Shrivastava, who inquired into the riots at Jabalpur, Sagar, Damoh and<br />

Narsimhapur in February 1961. A National Integration Committee was constituted, which<br />

recommended, among other things, that the district administration should be held responsible for<br />

failure to maintain peace and that appropriate action should be taken. In 1968 the National<br />

Integration Council (NIC) made the recommendation that ``failure to take prompt and effective action<br />

should be considered a dereliction <strong>of</strong> duty and <strong>of</strong>ficers concerned should be dealt with accordingly.<br />

Service rules should be amended, if necessary'' (uncited source).<br />

The 1961 NIC had made a significant recommendation to suitably amend the Section 153(A) <strong>of</strong> the<br />

Indian Penal Code for the prevention and prosecution <strong>of</strong> hate speech. That these recommendations<br />

were not taken seriously is obvious from the observations <strong>of</strong> the Raghubar Dayal Commission Report<br />

on riots in Ranchi, Sholapur, Malegaon and other places in 1967. The Commission noted that ``the<br />

general impression has been that either there was no police force to deal with the mischief makers or<br />

it had direction not to act'' (cited from Noorani, 1997, n.p.).<br />

In Ahmedabad in 1969 a fracas was witnessed between a group <strong>of</strong> boys, enjoying a local fair near<br />

the revered Jagannath Hindu temple, and sadhus returning with their cattle in the evening. The<br />

fracas led to stone throwing, and one stone hit and broke the glass pane <strong>of</strong> the temple's panel, which<br />

contained the revered Murti 6 The word soon went round that malicious Muslims had attacked the<br />

temple and killed sadhus. Retaliatory violence ultimately resulted in the loss <strong>of</strong> 2000 innocent lives,<br />

68


destruction <strong>of</strong> property, and the desecration and damage to holy Muslim shrines. One thousand<br />

people were forced to live in camps, mostly under the open sky.<br />

My investigation revealed that the accidental hitting <strong>of</strong> the panel <strong>of</strong> the temple had been associated<br />

with the destruction <strong>of</strong> the Somnath temple by Mahmood Ghazni about a thousand years ago. The<br />

local Dharm Raksha Samiti and Hindu Sangram Samiti, which campaigned for retaliation, reminded<br />

Hindus <strong>of</strong> the historical role <strong>of</strong> Muslims as destroyers <strong>of</strong> temples, and claimed that again Hindu<br />

Dharma faced a threat from the Muslims. One <strong>of</strong> the leaflets published by Hindu Sangram Samiti<br />

stated: ``Muslims have meanly attacked Ahmedabad's famous Jagannath Temple and desecrated its<br />

idols. Muslims are repeating history. Their main aim is not only to destroy maximum possible Hindu<br />

temples but to destroy Hindu religion and culture and to convert Hindus to Islam'' (Ansari, 1970, n.p.).<br />

The leaflet exhorted Hindu youth to ``avenge insult to our Temples and ladies and rush to Muslim<br />

areas with weapons and finish them'' (Ansari, 1970, n.p.). Apart from the exhumation <strong>of</strong> a thousand<br />

year old `history', Pakistan was a living presence in the minds <strong>of</strong> people who were warned by the<br />

Jana Sangh leader, Balraj Madhok, while addressing the Rifle Training Club on 14 September 1969,<br />

<strong>of</strong> imminent attack from Pakistan in the states <strong>of</strong> Gujarat and Rajasthan. The ensuing violence, apart<br />

from taking a very heavy human toll, destroyed a large number <strong>of</strong> mosques.<br />

In Baroda, another city in Gujarat affected by communal violence, a slogan on the wall asked<br />

Muslims to ``Quit India''. A number <strong>of</strong> posters appeared appealing to Hindus to subject Muslims to<br />

complete social and economic boycott, which was repeated during the communal violence in 2002.<br />

The then military ruler <strong>of</strong> Pakistan, General Yahya Khan, had gone public saying that he had ordered<br />

his men to seal the border with India against any infiltration <strong>of</strong> Muslim refugees. He, however,<br />

exploited the events in Gujarat in 1969 to deny any <strong>of</strong>ficial presence <strong>of</strong> the Indian Muslim delegation<br />

in the Rabat Conference <strong>of</strong> the Organisation <strong>of</strong> Islamic Conference.<br />

The partisan role <strong>of</strong> the police during the initial phase <strong>of</strong> the Gujarat massacre is evident in the title <strong>of</strong><br />

the Asia Watch Report on Gujarat 2002, ``We have no orders to save you'' (Human Rights Watch,<br />

2002). My own inquiry into this first large-scale Gujarat pogrom against Muslims revealed that the<br />

police connivance and complicity were partly caused by communal bias on the part <strong>of</strong> the police<br />

personnel, and mainly by their dependence on policy directions from the political executive.<br />

Bhattacharjea's (1969) report on the 1969 Ahmedabad communal violence does not attribute the first<br />

three days <strong>of</strong> rioting to police inaction, but to the policy <strong>of</strong> the secular Congress Government.<br />

Bhattacharjea's conversations with Congress leaders revealed that if the Congress government had<br />

instructed the police to be firm with the rioters, Congress might have lost the next elections to the<br />

Jana Sangh. No prosecution was lodged against those who had distributed handbills inciting people<br />

to violence in the name <strong>of</strong> protection <strong>of</strong> Dharma. Similarly, the Justice D.P. Madon Commission,<br />

which inquired into riots in Bhiwandi, Jalgaon and Mahad in 1970, reported blatant communal bias<br />

against Muslims to be present in the entire law-enforcement machinery (cited from Ansari, 1997).<br />

That the police force in India does not function as an impartial law enforcement agency, but as a<br />

subordinate body to enforce the policies <strong>of</strong> the government <strong>of</strong> the day, was noted by the Nahond<br />

Police Commission (NPC) in its Reports (1978-81). The Commission attributed police partiality to the<br />

continuation <strong>of</strong> the 1861 Police Act, which formalised the police's command-control system, and<br />

69


oriented it as a ruler-appointed body. The NPC made the recommendation that the police force be<br />

reorganised in order to enable it to function independently <strong>of</strong> government policy, accountable to the<br />

law. The recommendations, endorsed by the National Human Rights Commission (NHRC), the<br />

National Commission for Minorities (NCM) Report on Communal Riots: Prevention And Control<br />

(1999) (Minorities Council, 1999) and by several human rights organisations, have not been<br />

implemented.<br />

Apart from the politics <strong>of</strong> Ram Mandir, the uniform civil code, conversion and other ethno-religious<br />

identity issues, primarily the fragility <strong>of</strong> the institutional mechanism <strong>of</strong> rule <strong>of</strong> law has proved<br />

disastrous for Hindu-Muslim, Hindu-Sikh and Hindu-Christian relations in India. The massacre <strong>of</strong><br />

3000 innocent Sikhs in 1984 in Delhi may be attributed to this system <strong>of</strong> partial policing. Dara Singh,<br />

the killer <strong>of</strong> Graham Staines 7 and his two sons, was emboldened to commit the heinous crime<br />

because he was not brought to justice for his earlier anti-Muslim criminal acts.<br />

As another illustration, the demolition <strong>of</strong> Babri Masjid happened because the district administration<br />

and the police carried out the partisan orders <strong>of</strong> the Chief Minister, disregarding their duty under law.<br />

The justice delivery system is also characterised by a pervasive climate <strong>of</strong> impunity, and distortion<br />

and miscarriage <strong>of</strong> justice, thereby becoming a major source <strong>of</strong> communal and other inter-group<br />

violence in India.<br />

While it is imperative to fully appreciate the historical basis <strong>of</strong> the conflict, we should note that the<br />

contemporary communal conflict in India, which peaked during 1990-1992 in Ayodhya and in Gujarat<br />

in 2002, may be traced back to 1981 when a few hundred former untouchables in Meenakshipuram<br />

in Tamil Nadu converted to Islam en-masse. This mass event seems to have revived and intensified<br />

the sense <strong>of</strong> siege which Hindus have been nursing since the publication <strong>of</strong> census data in 1881,<br />

which showed a gradual decline in the Hindu population. The mass conversion made almost all <strong>of</strong><br />

Hindu India, including Mrs. Indira Gandhi, pay attention. It set the Vishwa Hindu Parishad (VHP) upon<br />

a determined course <strong>of</strong> consolidating the protection <strong>of</strong> Hindus' interests and controlling perceived<br />

Muslim assertiveness and ascendancy. While it may not have been widely and explicitly noted, the<br />

VHP policy <strong>of</strong> observing Muslim population growth invoked possible alarm about the all-time high<br />

percentage <strong>of</strong> Muslim members elected to the Lok Sabha (parliament) in the general elections <strong>of</strong><br />

1980 and 1984. Whereas earlier there were between 21 and 35 Muslim members <strong>of</strong> parliament, their<br />

numbers peaked to 49 in 1980 and 46 members in 1984. This was the time when the VHP initiated<br />

its Hindu mobilisation project over Ayodhya mosque. The mobilisation was intensified by what<br />

appeared to be the secular Congress government's continuing appeasement <strong>of</strong> Muslims, especially<br />

when it enacted a law, Muslim Women (Protection <strong>of</strong> Rights on Divorce) 1986, in accordance with the<br />

Islamic Shariah (law).<br />

The period <strong>of</strong> the 1980s also brought into focus the wider Indo-Pak conflict, intensifying the existing<br />

Hindu sense <strong>of</strong> siege and threat supposedly presented by Islam and Muslims. Violent opposition to<br />

Indian presence in Kashmir further aggravated the sense <strong>of</strong> siege among Hindus.<br />

All <strong>of</strong> the issues like the controversy surrounding the status <strong>of</strong> the Ayodhya, cow, conversion, Bande<br />

Mataram and Personal Law, that have been politically exploited in pursuit <strong>of</strong> a narrow chauvinistic<br />

Hindu agenda and a communalised mythic reading <strong>of</strong> history, characterised Muslim-Hindu relations<br />

70


in India for a long time. During phases <strong>of</strong> the freedom movement they were politically exploited. But<br />

this historical conflict should not make us assume a dismissive attitude in the name <strong>of</strong> secularism.<br />

We must not ignore the fact that Article 48 <strong>of</strong> the Constitution does specially direct the state to take<br />

steps to prohibit the slaughter <strong>of</strong> cows and calves, in the name <strong>of</strong> the science <strong>of</strong> animal husbandry.<br />

State laws providing for the prohibition <strong>of</strong> the slaughter <strong>of</strong> cows have been upheld by the apex court<br />

despite constitutional values favouring secularism and minority rights. Irrespective <strong>of</strong> the legality <strong>of</strong><br />

laws on cow slaughter, the point to be borne in mind is that these laws reflect the strong religious<br />

sentiments <strong>of</strong> large sections <strong>of</strong> the population, leading us to the conclusion that there is a political<br />

cow and a sacred cow. As in the case <strong>of</strong> the cow, there is a political Rama 8 , as admitted by L.K.<br />

Advani in his deposition before the Liberhan Commission, and there is a sacred Rama. To be able to<br />

deal effectively with the political Rama, peacemakers and peacebuilders will have to accommodate<br />

the sacred Rama.<br />

TOWARDS COMMUNAL AND REGIONAL SECURITY AND PEACE<br />

Given our holistic understanding <strong>of</strong> the phenomenon <strong>of</strong> communal violence, we recommend a tw<strong>of</strong>old<br />

approach. First we need the establishment <strong>of</strong> an institutional mechanism supportive <strong>of</strong> the rule <strong>of</strong> law.<br />

Second, we need to tackle aggressive ideologies, including exclusive Hindu militant nationalism and<br />

militant Muslim Jihadist ideologies focused only on armed-struggle. Effective laws to prevent and<br />

punish hate speech, uphold the right to freedom <strong>of</strong> speech, guarantee the rights <strong>of</strong> victims <strong>of</strong> all<br />

public violence, and that enshrines legal procedures to establish <strong>of</strong>ficial responsibility for acts <strong>of</strong><br />

commission or omission are central to the prevention <strong>of</strong> communal violence. In order to use legal<br />

mechanisms effectively, it is necessary that the personnel <strong>of</strong> law-enforcement machinery are not<br />

communalised in their attitudes and composition. Priority should be accorded to making the staff<br />

composition <strong>of</strong> the governance system, including the policing system, socially diverse and free from<br />

biases.<br />

Most <strong>of</strong> these reform measures have already been suggested in the reports <strong>of</strong> the NIC (1961; 1968),<br />

NPC (1978-81), NHRC (1994, 2002), NCM (1999) and the Union Home Ministry's Guidelines (1997).<br />

The most comprehensive is the Report <strong>of</strong> the Concerned Citizens' Tribunal on Gujarat (Concerned<br />

Citizens Tribunal, 2002).<br />

Civil society and peace<br />

However, we need to note that in a traditional society like India contentious ethno-religious issues like<br />

Ayodhya, the cow, conversion, Bande Mataram and Urdu, which have been a source <strong>of</strong> communal<br />

conflict for more than a century and a half, cannot be left to be resolved by law alone. Rule <strong>of</strong> law is a<br />

necessary but not a sufficient condition for durable communal peace. It requires civil society<br />

initiatives to bring about conciliation through dialogue between the parties in an atmosphere <strong>of</strong> trust,<br />

mutual respect and accommodation. A <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n court, giving its decision on a dispute between<br />

Christians and Muslims on the issue <strong>of</strong> use <strong>of</strong> amplifiers for azan (the calling to prayers in the<br />

mosques), ruled that while the Muslims had a right to use amplifiers for azan, the timing and volume<br />

had to be settled by community leaders themselves. In such issues, there is a role for law and a role<br />

71


for dialogue. Without the protection <strong>of</strong> the law, the weaker party will have to submit to the dictates <strong>of</strong><br />

the strong, but absence <strong>of</strong> mechanisms <strong>of</strong> dialogue will make the parties unable to work out a winwin<br />

solution, which can produce peace dividends, especially for the weaker party.<br />

Communal conflict in India will continue to be exacerbated by the absence <strong>of</strong> firm institutional<br />

mechanisms to assure the rule <strong>of</strong> law and <strong>of</strong> dialogue. It should, however, be realised that there can<br />

be no meaningful dialogue between the hate-mongering tormentors, who threaten to impose their<br />

majoritarian will in defiance <strong>of</strong> law onto the minority, and the oppressed weaker party who feels hurt<br />

and humiliated. In order to understand the requisites <strong>of</strong> successful dialogue, it is vital to grasp the<br />

background <strong>of</strong> the two decades <strong>of</strong> confrontation and the politics <strong>of</strong> identity, described earlier.<br />

In particular, conciliation over contentious communal issues is required so that unresolved issues are<br />

not politically exploited in any dubious attempts to polarise the population for electoral gains. Such<br />

conciliation would require inter- and intra-community dialogue around issues related to the equal<br />

rights <strong>of</strong> all persons as citizens and as members <strong>of</strong> identity-based communities, the rule <strong>of</strong> law, and<br />

the censure <strong>of</strong> hate speech.<br />

Other statutory measures<br />

Alongside these recommended civil society initiatives, there is a need for an empowered statutory<br />

Community Relations Commission (CRC) that is focused on the monitoring, prevention, resolution<br />

and review <strong>of</strong> all inter-group conflicts based on religion, language or ethnicity. In a country <strong>of</strong> India's<br />

diversity and history <strong>of</strong> conflict, such a Commission, as opposed to the ad hoc NIC which lacks any<br />

mandate or structure for research and monitoring, will be required to promote social and cultural<br />

harmony, peace and stability. The CRC, which was also recommended by the NCM Report on<br />

Communal Riots (Minorities Council, 1999), could focus on promoting dialogue and upholding the<br />

rule <strong>of</strong> law. In the event <strong>of</strong> facilitating any agreement between parties to a dispute, the CRC and its<br />

regional and local branches, working in liaison with NGOs, may be responsible for enforcing the<br />

terms <strong>of</strong> the agreement. In the event <strong>of</strong> failed dialogue or breach <strong>of</strong> terms <strong>of</strong> an agreement, the CRC<br />

could be empowered to initiate legal action against the erring party and act to censure hate speech.<br />

The CRC could be assisted by special Intelligence Units and Special Prosecutors. The CRC should<br />

also have some influence in the appointment <strong>of</strong> an Inquiry Commission that probes the determinants<br />

<strong>of</strong> communal violence and allocates responsibility. The Commission's apex Advisory Council should<br />

include representatives from all political parties, eminent public figures and intellectuals, all <strong>of</strong> whom<br />

ought to be appointed according to agreed-on procedures, thereby ensuring the independence <strong>of</strong> the<br />

CRC.<br />

The CRC might also consider appointing a Truth and Reconciliation Commission (TRC) if and when<br />

such a TRC is considered advisable by consenting communities, and when the Advisory Council<br />

determines that it would facilitate better and lasting peace and justice.<br />

Indo-Pak-Bangladesh peacebuilding<br />

In order to facilitate Indo-Pak-Bangladesh regional peace, I suggest the adoption <strong>of</strong> the <strong>South</strong> Asian<br />

72


Association for Regional Cooperation (SAARC) Human Rights Convention and institutions. Instead <strong>of</strong><br />

limiting measures to an Indo-Pak Confederation or no-war pacts, the European Union may be a<br />

pertinent model for the SAARC to adopt. Such a model could include a focus on regional human<br />

rights conventions, special instruments for the promotion <strong>of</strong> the rights <strong>of</strong> minorities, refugees, migrant<br />

workers, asylum seekers and members <strong>of</strong> divided families, provisions for SAARC Commissioners for<br />

Human Rights, Minorities and Non-Citizens, and SAARC Human Rights Courts. Special attention<br />

needs to be granted to formalising mechanisms for the harmonisation <strong>of</strong> security concerns <strong>of</strong> all<br />

member states and for the resolution <strong>of</strong> inter-state disputes.<br />

The SAARC Charter adopted in Dhaka, Bangladesh on 8 December 1985 is based on recognition <strong>of</strong>,<br />

among other things, the desire to promote peace, stability and amity in the region. The Dhaka<br />

Declaration adopted by heads <strong>of</strong> governments in 1985 makes more explicit that peace and security<br />

are essential prerequisites for the promotion <strong>of</strong> the welfare and prosperity <strong>of</strong> all the region's people.<br />

The Charter also takes due cognisance <strong>of</strong> the fact ``that in an increasingly interdependent world the<br />

objectives <strong>of</strong> peace, freedom, social justice and economic prosperity are best achieved by mutual<br />

understanding, good neighbourly relations and meaningful cooperation among the countries <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong><br />

Asia which are bound by ties <strong>of</strong> history and culture'' (uncited source).<br />

In view <strong>of</strong> these broad principles it would be appropriate for the Charter to include the objective <strong>of</strong><br />

promoting peace in the region and protecting the human rights <strong>of</strong> all individuals and communities.<br />

Disputes among neighbours are bound to arise. If recourse to war is to be replaced by the rule <strong>of</strong> law<br />

in international relations, then the parties to a dispute must be willing to be subjected to the process<br />

<strong>of</strong> adjudication, arbitration and reconciliation through third-party mediation. It does not make any<br />

sense to treat bilateral negotiation as the only lawful method <strong>of</strong> resolving disputes between two<br />

parties, individuals, groups or nations. In this regard, priority needs to be given to a multi-lateral<br />

SAARC treaty on the use <strong>of</strong> force in settling disputes. Such a treaty must be based on the four<br />

Geneva Conventions <strong>of</strong> 1949 and optional protocols. If pursued with genuine commitment to peace,<br />

such a treaty will end all indiscriminate and unlawful use <strong>of</strong> force in the region.<br />

In negotiations regarding Kashmir, Pakistan would be well advised not to adopt a narrow national<br />

perspective based exclusively on legal terms. This article calls on Pakistani people, especially the<br />

more enlightened sections <strong>of</strong> its citizenry and civil society, to assert their voice so that the ruling elites<br />

adopt a more humanistic perspective and consider the welfare <strong>of</strong> all the region's people, including<br />

Indian Muslims, when arriving at an agreement on the Kashmir dispute.<br />

NOTES<br />

1. Unfortunately, unprincipled opportunistic Indian policy <strong>of</strong> appeasement <strong>of</strong> the Soviet Union during<br />

the period <strong>of</strong> its occupation <strong>of</strong> Afghanistan did not elicit any strong protest from the `peace and<br />

democracy' forums in India. India's principled position might have helped Afghan resistance to<br />

become broadly democratic and reconsider its strategy <strong>of</strong> armed-struggle.<br />

2. Under the forum <strong>of</strong> the Coordination Committee on Kashmir, constituted jointly with Justice V.M.<br />

Tarkunde and others, the author inquired into human rights violations by state forces and militant<br />

groups in June-July 1991 and October 1992. The latter inquiry included the case <strong>of</strong> gang rape <strong>of</strong><br />

73


women in Chaksaidapor in Shopian district <strong>of</strong> Kashmir. Besides these two, the Committee<br />

brought out four other reports based on inquiries by teams comprising Justice V.M. Tarkunde and<br />

others. Amnesty International and Asia Watch/Human Rights Watch, New York have also been<br />

publishing periodic reports on human rights violations in Kashmir.<br />

3. ``Divide et impera should be the motto for our Indian administration whether political, civil on<br />

military, wrote a British scholar under the nom-de-plume ``Caranaticus'' in the Asiatic Journal, May<br />

1821.<br />

4. Sir Syed Ahmed Khan believed that the earliest foreboding <strong>of</strong> Hindus and Muslims drifting apart<br />

and seeking their separate destinies emerged with the Nagri Parcharni Sabha resolution<br />

demanding the introduction <strong>of</strong> Hindi as an <strong>of</strong>ficial language in 1967. The controversy over Urdu is<br />

recorded in the Institute Gazethe, Aligarh, edited by Sir Syed Ahmad Khan (24 January 1867; 31<br />

October 1868; 12 November 1868; 27 November 1868; 2 July 1869; 3 January 1873).<br />

Apprehension about out-numbered Muslims living at the mercy <strong>of</strong> the Hindu majority found its<br />

early frank expression in Sir Syed's speech in the Legislative Council on 12 January 1883.<br />

5. Articles 292 and 294, dealing with population-based seats in central and state legislatures; Article<br />

296, dealing with consideration <strong>of</strong> minorities in public services; and Article 299, dealing with<br />

Minority Officers to monitor and supervise implementation <strong>of</strong> safeguards for minorities, adopted in<br />

August 1947, were scrapped in May and October 1949.<br />

6. Murtis are deities or images used by Hindus during worship as points <strong>of</strong> devotional and<br />

meditational focus.<br />

7. Graham Staines was a Christian missionary from Australia who worked with lepers in Orissa, and<br />

was burnt alive in January 1999.<br />

8. In Hindu folklore Rama is the epitome <strong>of</strong> chivalry and courage, and obedience to sacred law.<br />

REFERENCES<br />

All Parties Conference. (1975). The Motilal Nehru Committee Report. New Delhi: Michiko &<br />

Panjathan.<br />

Ansari, I.A. (1970). Ahmedabad riots: Focus on dark corners. Delhi: Radiance Book Depot.<br />

Ansari, I.A. (Ed.) (1997). Communal riots, the state and lawin India. New Delhi: I.O.S.<br />

Bhattacharjea, A. (1969). Report on Ahmedabad. New Delhi: Sampra Dayikta Virodhi Committee.<br />

Barrier, V.G. (Ed.) (1976). Roots <strong>of</strong> communal politics, Bhagwan Das Committee Report. New Delhi:<br />

Bhagwan Das Committee.<br />

Concerned Citizens Tribunal. (2002). Report <strong>of</strong> the Concerned Citizens' Tribunal on Gujarat. India:<br />

Author.<br />

Constituent Assembly. (n.d.). Constituent Assembly debates, II, 891-927.<br />

Constituent Assembly. (1947). Constituent Assembly debates, III, 505.<br />

74


Human Rights Watch. (2002). ``We have no orders to save you'': State participation and complicity in<br />

communal violence in Gujarat. Human Rights Watch Report, 14,3(C).<br />

Indian National Congress (1934, June 12-13). Resolution <strong>of</strong> the Working Committee <strong>of</strong> the Indian<br />

National Congress on the White Paper and the Communal Award. India: Author.<br />

Menon, V.P. (1957). Transfer <strong>of</strong> power in India. Pakistan: Callard.<br />

Minorities Council. (1999). Report on communal riots: Prevention and control, New Delhi: Author.<br />

Mohammad, S. (1972). Speeches and writings <strong>of</strong> Sir Syed Ahmad Khan. Bombay: Nacliketa.<br />

Mosley, L. (1961). The last days <strong>of</strong> the British Raj. London: Harcourt, Brace & World.<br />

Narayan, J. P. (1964a, April 20). Our great opportunity in Kashmir. Hindustan Times, n.p.<br />

Narayan, J. P. (1964b, May 15). Need to rethink. Hindustan Times, n.p.<br />

Noorani, A.G. (1997). Communal riots and the police. In I.A. Ansari (Ed.), Communal riots, the state<br />

and lawin India (pp. 6-7). New Delhi: I.O.S.<br />

Siddiqui, M. A. K. (1993). Hindu-Muslims relations. Calcutta: Abadi.<br />

75


Short Research Reports<br />

REFLECTIONS ON TRUTH AND<br />

RECONCILIATION<br />

Hiren Gohain 1<br />

English Department, Gauhati <strong>University</strong><br />

The <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Truth and Reconciliation Commission appears to have made a focused endeavour<br />

to heal divisions in a multi-ethnic society. If, as argued, these efforts were based on principles and not<br />

on expediency, it is imperative to identify such principles for application in other contexts and<br />

situations. When a state institution or a community is involved in crimes against its citizens or another<br />

community, is it necessary to investigate those crimes after a political settlement has been achieved,<br />

or turn our back on them and regard them as an episode <strong>of</strong> temporary insanity and a panic reaction?<br />

Or would this be regarded as an attempt to expand our understanding <strong>of</strong> politics through the<br />

application <strong>of</strong> human values?<br />

The modern world is rife with political tensions which frequently erupt into conflict and violence. A<br />

case in point is the ongoing war <strong>of</strong> aggression in the Middle East, which is waged in scornful defiance<br />

<strong>of</strong> world public opinion. Can a dialogue on truth and reconciliation have any relevance against this<br />

backdrop? It could be argued that the legacy <strong>of</strong> violence and conflict has itself been responsible for<br />

placing such endeavours on the agenda. But can there be genuine reconciliation between interests<br />

and views that are irreconcilably opposed? Could this not be interpreted as a disingenuous<br />

suppression <strong>of</strong> fear and resentment, suspicion and pain?<br />

It is necessary to emphasise that reconciliation can occur only in the case <strong>of</strong> antagonists who form<br />

some kind <strong>of</strong> a dialectical unity, say, between a colonial power and a colonised nation 1 , between<br />

imperialism and its victims, or between an oppressive state and a small, weak minority group. Those<br />

who dominate situations <strong>of</strong> conflict and social inequity make large claims about truth, which appear<br />

dubious to impartial outside observers. Such pretence <strong>of</strong> unity, it is perhaps believed, will be replaced<br />

by genuine unity once antagonism has been overcome. Hence, epistemological and social<br />

reconstruction appear to be two aspects <strong>of</strong> the same enterprise.<br />

Reconciliation in this context does not mean wishing away conflict and difference, but engaging the<br />

conflictual situation explicitly with a view to adopting a less partial and broader perspective. Given<br />

ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ<br />

1. Please direct all correspondence to Hiren Gohain, English Department, Gauhati <strong>University</strong>, Guwahati-3, Assam, India.<br />

76


that the basis <strong>of</strong> reconciliation is justice, and not mere accommodation, the replacement <strong>of</strong> a colonial<br />

order by a native regime does not in itself meet the needs <strong>of</strong> justice. Mere withdrawal <strong>of</strong> an aggressor<br />

from a country's soil is also not enough. Remorse should include full compensation for the damage<br />

done, and a confession <strong>of</strong> the injustices committed. Vietnam is a clear example <strong>of</strong> such a lapse,<br />

suggesting that only when arrogance is replaced by tragic acceptance <strong>of</strong> the historical destiny <strong>of</strong><br />

humans, can true reconciliation follow.<br />

T.S. Eliot aptly summed up the situation when meditating on the deep divisions that characterised<br />

English society in the 17th century and still continue to haunt it to this very day.<br />

History may be servitude<br />

History may be freedom ...<br />

We cannot revive old factions<br />

We cannot restore old policies<br />

Or follow an antique drum,<br />

These men and those who opposed them<br />

And those whom they opposed<br />

Accept the Constitution <strong>of</strong> Silence<br />

And are folded in a single party.<br />

Whatever we inherit from the fortunate<br />

We have taken from the defeated<br />

What they had to leave us<br />

A symbol:<br />

A symbol perfected in death.<br />

(Four Quartets: ``Little Gidding'')<br />

Of course the quiet pathos and subdued pain <strong>of</strong> these lines may belong in the context <strong>of</strong> religious<br />

meditation. The suffering and pain <strong>of</strong> history are transfigured, rendered meaningful ex post facto by a<br />

Christian view <strong>of</strong> time redeemed. On a more mundane level, we could say time heals old wounds in<br />

society as much as in the individual. However, the project <strong>of</strong> truth and reconciliation boldly lifts into<br />

consciousness what takes place beneath the threshold <strong>of</strong> consciousness. So justice is what we are<br />

reconciled to, however difficult it is.<br />

The great works <strong>of</strong> literature correct the myopia <strong>of</strong> people who are possessed by confident visions <strong>of</strong><br />

social engineering, without any sense <strong>of</strong> history. Eliot prompts the idea that we inherit the guilt <strong>of</strong> our<br />

fathers in more than a factual sense, and that the project for future life should include coming to<br />

terms with that guilt. It is not religious dogma to hold that social crimes have a tendency to linger long<br />

after the perpetrators and their victims have left the scene. The structure <strong>of</strong> society and the way <strong>of</strong> life<br />

that permitted such crimes <strong>of</strong>ten survive them, are reinforced by them, and may yet again see their<br />

recurrence. In this respect, the communalism that led to the horrendous massacres <strong>of</strong> the partition<br />

days in India has not disappeared despite the best efforts <strong>of</strong> secular-minded leaders for several<br />

decades.<br />

It could even be argued that in any social ideology the prevailing mode <strong>of</strong> rhetoric and reasoning<br />

77


perpetuates implicit violence. An Oriental such as Edward Said was needed to retrace steps into the<br />

past and discover that the self-definition <strong>of</strong> an awakened, modern Europe in the 17th to 18th<br />

centuries required a demonisation <strong>of</strong> its other, the Orient, which it sought to dominate. This image<br />

was the product <strong>of</strong> a particular discourse, but the discourse itself, Said declared, had been intimately<br />

linked to the rise <strong>of</strong> a certain regime <strong>of</strong> power. So as stated earlier, epistemology and social<br />

development coincide.<br />

Some say that we still live in the dark ages <strong>of</strong> history, when the other, against whom we define<br />

ourselves, becomes the enemy, a veritable threat to our existence. We tend to deny his/her human<br />

identity as a matter <strong>of</strong> course. It is <strong>of</strong>ten said that post-modern enlightenment has rid us <strong>of</strong> such<br />

superstitions. But even long before that, Buddhist ethics encouraged the abandonment <strong>of</strong> racial and<br />

cultural pride (see Lessing & Wayman, 1993). The Brahman priests <strong>of</strong> later times also retained<br />

something <strong>of</strong> this ethos. To Francois Bernier, a physician, scientist, and 17th century inquisitive<br />

traveller, who was armed with scientific reason and intolerant Protestant faith, Hindu priests replied<br />

as follows: ``We believe God has given to each people its own path to salvation. We respect the path<br />

you are following to God, but we prefer to follow our own'' (uncited source). But Bernier chose not to<br />

heed this message. Ruth Benedict, in her Patterns <strong>of</strong> culture (1934), quotes an old American Indian<br />

tribal chief who remarked that different peoples <strong>of</strong> the world drew out <strong>of</strong> the same well, the water <strong>of</strong><br />

life, but in cups <strong>of</strong> different shapes. These ideas at least remind us that long before the advent <strong>of</strong><br />

postmodernism, people had from time to time expressed tolerance and respect for traditions other<br />

than their own. Even feudal empires did not attempt cultural hegemony, but cultivated at pluralism<br />

and local autonomy as long as the rulers received tribute. In the state <strong>of</strong> Assam in India, for example,<br />

ethnic self-rule was allowed under the political overlordship <strong>of</strong> the Ahom rulers.<br />

The rise <strong>of</strong> the modern nation-state, however, witnessed an earnest and systematic endeavour to<br />

standardise laws, cultural practices and language. As a result, many smaller and weaker groups<br />

suffered physical and mental humiliation at the hands <strong>of</strong> the hegemonising dominant group. It is on<br />

account <strong>of</strong> this ideal that Bosnian Muslims were nearly exterminated. National oppression has<br />

reached a new level <strong>of</strong> brutality in unstable nation-states that have emerged out <strong>of</strong> arbitrary<br />

arrangements <strong>of</strong> colonial empires. The practice <strong>of</strong> ``ethnic cleansing'' is rooted in the main in the<br />

policies and actions <strong>of</strong> former colonisers. The European eradication <strong>of</strong> so-called ``savages'' in<br />

America is an illustration <strong>of</strong> ethnic cleansing.<br />

This proclivity for ethnic cleansing and associated cycle <strong>of</strong> unending violence continues to dominate<br />

the global scene. Jews, who for ages have endured the agony <strong>of</strong> oppression, now seem intent on<br />

visiting the same horrors on Palestinian Arabs in Israel. In Assam, armed groups <strong>of</strong> ethnic militants<br />

rebelling against the oppression <strong>of</strong> the dominant community, now take it out on equally helpless<br />

families <strong>of</strong> the dominant community in the area <strong>of</strong> their influence. Border wars on a small scale have<br />

become endemic among states <strong>of</strong> the same union in North-East India. Scores <strong>of</strong> Bodos were gunned<br />

down by the police in Assam, and according to a report in the Assam Assembly on 30 March 2003,<br />

the Bodo militants, in turn, killed 923 non-Bodos in the period 1988 to 2003.<br />

Violent domination was set in motion by the colonial empires <strong>of</strong> the 19th century. During the recent<br />

process <strong>of</strong> decolonisation, former colonial powers effected a transfer <strong>of</strong> power to small leading<br />

sections <strong>of</strong> the aggrieved colonised societies on terms advantageous to themselves, disregarding the<br />

78


plight <strong>of</strong> other smaller and even weaker groups settled in the same territory. The new rulers seem to<br />

follow in the footsteps <strong>of</strong> the former masters because they are unwilling to make a radical break with<br />

the historical structures <strong>of</strong> economy and government. This ultimately gives rise to intra-group tension<br />

and disaffection, as well as plots by entrenched groups to divert them into inter-communal violence.<br />

There is strong evidence to suggest that British rulers periodically fomented communal riots in India<br />

by exploiting pre-existing differences to safeguard their domination <strong>of</strong> the country until this culminated<br />

in the pre-partition blood bath.<br />

Many contemporary conflicts and disputes seem to have their genesis in colonial history. It is<br />

customary today to blame Robert Mugabe, President <strong>of</strong> Zimbabwe, for encouraging his followers to<br />

use violent methods to seize farmland from law-abiding British residents. However, those who point<br />

fingers have conveniently forgotten that the most fertile and productive parts <strong>of</strong> the country had been<br />

seized in colonial times through violence and chicanery by the ancestors <strong>of</strong> those settlers, leaving<br />

native Zimbabweans the poorest barren soil.<br />

Therefore the role <strong>of</strong> power in shaping human institutions must be carefully considered in our<br />

deliberations about truth and reconciliation. The author does not, however, subscribe to the anarchist<br />

view that the structure <strong>of</strong> all human relations ranging from parent-child and teacher-pupil to that<br />

between friends and lovers is determined by power relations, because such relations also promote<br />

human growth and well-being to mutual benefit. We must consider why the treatise <strong>of</strong> Kautalya in<br />

ancient India or Machiavelli's treatise in Renaissance Europe, focused on how the consolidation <strong>of</strong><br />

the state led to increasingly vicious and cruel manipulation <strong>of</strong> human beings and public opinion.<br />

The separation <strong>of</strong> the state from society and <strong>of</strong> the pr<strong>of</strong>essions from people at large seems to have<br />

served the imbalances <strong>of</strong> power. While the state still pr<strong>of</strong>essed to serve social goals, it was actually<br />

serving the narrower interests <strong>of</strong> social elites and the ruling classes. Hence, the power <strong>of</strong> the state to<br />

control and hold down the masses, by fair or foul means, gradually becomes the defining<br />

characteristic <strong>of</strong> the state. Yet, it is precisely because <strong>of</strong> this development and consolidation <strong>of</strong> class<br />

power that the danger <strong>of</strong> internal violence increased manifold.<br />

While politics was being reduced to the management, if not worship, <strong>of</strong> the state, there was a rival<br />

tradition marked by social and ethical concern, such as that to be found in the quest for the elusive<br />

Dharma 2 in the Mahabharata, and the Christian Humanism <strong>of</strong> Sir Thomas More. In the Mahabharata,<br />

Yudhisthira questions the dictates <strong>of</strong> the duties <strong>of</strong> Kshatriyas, the warrior-caste, in an unceasing<br />

endeavour to arrive at a universal human ideal. Sir Thomas More sardonically mentions the<br />

encroachment <strong>of</strong> enterprising landlords on the sheep farms <strong>of</strong> the small farmer, reducing him to<br />

beggary. His rationality, unlike capitalist rationality in the 19th century, does not endorse such<br />

practices (see Hooper, 1962; Horkheimer, 1947).<br />

Perhaps we are on the edge <strong>of</strong> a new realisation arising from which the pain and suffering caused by<br />

the age <strong>of</strong> contesting nation-states and aggressive imperialism. Consider the new custom <strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong>fering<br />

apologies and restitution to the descendants <strong>of</strong> victimised groups for the crimes and injustices <strong>of</strong> the<br />

forefathers <strong>of</strong> a group or nation. From the perspective <strong>of</strong> legal rationality, this might appear irrelevant<br />

and meaningless. But if the present generations are beneficiaries <strong>of</strong> privileges established by force,<br />

then this is an acknowledgement <strong>of</strong> material responsibility. Likewise, the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Truth and<br />

79


Reconciliation Commission (TRC) appears to be an attempt to return to the politics <strong>of</strong> this obscured<br />

ethico-social message.<br />

The fact that all over the world today there is such a massive, spontaneous outcry against the<br />

outrage <strong>of</strong> the war on Iraq, shows that events <strong>of</strong> our time are stretching the narrow bounds <strong>of</strong> the<br />

nation-state towards wider horizons. There is a dawning consciousness that truth is not a power<br />

regime, but a form <strong>of</strong> self-transcendence that <strong>of</strong>fers a fair hearing to all points <strong>of</strong> view. Since truth is<br />

admittedly different from ideology, and there is no immediate, uncontested intuition <strong>of</strong> truth in the<br />

world, an authoritative articulation <strong>of</strong> truth can only come about through patient negotiation <strong>of</strong><br />

difference and conflict <strong>of</strong> interest. This inevitably includes a phase <strong>of</strong> struggle.<br />

Why was it considered necessary to establish a TRC in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>? Why did <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> not<br />

follow the usual practice <strong>of</strong> extending general amnesty to all those guilty <strong>of</strong> brutal violation <strong>of</strong> human<br />

rights and hope that the memory <strong>of</strong> such brutalities would be erased in the near future? The<br />

Commission appears to have been an attempt to reject the secretive and top-down method <strong>of</strong><br />

reaching consensus. The public was taken into confidence so that they set their seal <strong>of</strong> approval on<br />

what was in fact a serious compromise without any reservation. The state was to be reborn as an<br />

instrument <strong>of</strong> society.<br />

Even though force and violence as a means <strong>of</strong> settling disputes have not been eliminated, in most<br />

cases, however bitter and bloody the conflict, there is always hope that one day it will be settled in a<br />

manner acceptable to both parties. The hope <strong>of</strong> reconciliation must be kept alive, and the spirit <strong>of</strong><br />

accommodation must moderate the passion for one's just rights.<br />

Sometimes conflict refers to a past dispute, a dispute that rankles in the present, such as the conflict<br />

between China and Japan on the crimes committed by the invading Japanese army against the<br />

Chinese people in the 1930s and 1940s. Similar disputes exist on the atrocities committed mutually<br />

by rioting Hindus and Muslims during the partition <strong>of</strong> India.<br />

Memories <strong>of</strong> such events are not erased even when we move into a new phase <strong>of</strong> history and attend<br />

to a new agenda. It is always possible for a mischievous party or force to dredge up from a<br />

bottomless reservoir, memories <strong>of</strong> violence, brutality, pain and horror, and the unquenched thirst for<br />

revenge. These tend to fuel the flame <strong>of</strong> ever-recurring hatred and violence.<br />

It is therefore <strong>of</strong> utmost importance to overcome our natural shame and revulsion, and confront the<br />

horror perpetrated by us or by our brethren. To confess to such horrible crimes is to acknowledge the<br />

humanity <strong>of</strong> our victims, rescue them from the anonymity <strong>of</strong> abstract hatred, and realise our own<br />

grievous lapse from humanity. It is to ask forgiveness and seek help from our fellow-beings in our<br />

attempt to recover our lost or impaired humanity. To be able to forgive is also to overcome a blockage<br />

in the heart, and begin the healing <strong>of</strong> a mind divided against itself. It has come to the author's<br />

attention that a number <strong>of</strong> Assamese youths who had participated in a chauvinist frenzy in a<br />

massacre <strong>of</strong> immigrant Muslim children at Nellie 3 in 1983, had been driven insane by the memory <strong>of</strong><br />

the horrors they themselves had perpetrated.<br />

Some might dismiss such stories as sentimental and question whether we can conceive <strong>of</strong><br />

forgiveness for fascist criminals or demented perpetrators inspired by suspect ideologies. There is no<br />

80


question that those guilty <strong>of</strong> mass-murders, <strong>of</strong> diabolical plans to inspire and organise such<br />

massacres, or unleash systematic torture and persecution on selected targets for their views and<br />

thoughts, must be named and brought to book. But will mere punishment suffice if they are regarded<br />

as martyrs by later followers? However romantic it may sound, it would be far better if they are<br />

persuaded to realise the horror <strong>of</strong> what they had done and to express remorse.<br />

After all, the uninvolved German citizen was also guilty. One only has to recall Pastor Niemoller's<br />

admonition: ``When the Gestapo came and took away the Jews from my neighborhood, I did not<br />

bother because it did not concern me. When the Gestapo took the Communists away, again I<br />

remained unconcerned. When they came for the dissident democrat, yet again I remained silent. And<br />

when the Gestapo came to drag me to prison, there was no one around to raise his voice for me''<br />

(uncited source).<br />

We cannot therefore escape guilt and responsibility by pointing to others, or by taking shelter behind<br />

the separation <strong>of</strong> the state from society. We too need forgiveness, as do the perpetrators <strong>of</strong> explicit<br />

crimes. Through the admission <strong>of</strong> our own fallible humanity we earn the right to forgive. To forgive is<br />

therefore not to claim high moral ground, but to recognise the common ground between the so-called<br />

``sinners'' and ourselves.<br />

Truth in this sense is closer to the psychoanalytic idea <strong>of</strong> reality and the prescription to accept such<br />

reality. It means overcoming irresponsible fantasy or regressive blocks. Yet, one is reconciled to<br />

others through reconciliation with the temptations and failings <strong>of</strong> the self. However, here there<br />

appears to be evidence <strong>of</strong> an extension <strong>of</strong> the classical psychoanalytical image <strong>of</strong> the self in sole<br />

confrontation with the world. The world and truth are to be regarded as collaborative constructions <strong>of</strong><br />

many different selves.<br />

The eruptions <strong>of</strong> various terrorist movements 4 all over the world, and their eventual recognition<br />

through deals struck at different stages with states opposed to them, have led to recurring cycles <strong>of</strong><br />

amnesia. Once a political settlement is reached, atrocities committed by both the state and terrorist<br />

movements are all quickly forgotten. However, the costs <strong>of</strong> such an amnesia appear too high in times<br />

<strong>of</strong> inconsolable human suffering and irreparable loss. A point has been reached when some writers,<br />

traditionally the conscience-keepers <strong>of</strong> society, have turned away from highlighting the futility <strong>of</strong><br />

wanton violence. However, the newly devised exercise <strong>of</strong> reaching truth through reconciliation,<br />

properly undertaken and undergone, will be a rite <strong>of</strong> passage for transition to nobler and more mature<br />

human societies.<br />

NOTES<br />

1. Colonialism in disguised forms is still alive and well in many parts <strong>of</strong> the world and bedevils<br />

international politics. <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> may indeed be regarded as a special case <strong>of</strong> colonialism,<br />

where people from metropolitan countries settled in the land <strong>of</strong>, and among the people they<br />

exploited, and deliberately erected barriers against their assimilation into their country <strong>of</strong> adoption.<br />

According to the 1996 Census, the poorest 40% <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> receive 3% <strong>of</strong> the national<br />

income, while the richest 10% enjoy over 50% <strong>of</strong> that income. The weakness <strong>of</strong> the economy<br />

81


inherited from the past compelled the <strong>Africa</strong>n National Congress (ANC) government to adopt the<br />

GEAR (Growth, Employment and Redistribution) policy, which in fact subscribes to the Structural<br />

Adjustment Programme (SAP) <strong>of</strong> the International Monetary fund (IMF).<br />

2. In traditional Hindu discourse such as in the Bhagavad Gita, ``Dharma'' concretely refers to<br />

prescribed rules <strong>of</strong> behaviour and moral ideals appropriate to each <strong>of</strong> the four major Hindu<br />

castes. In the Mahabharata as a whole, however, the Buddhist notion <strong>of</strong> ``Dhamma'', as a<br />

universal policy <strong>of</strong> righteousness, seems to leave strong traces in Yudhisthira's quest, his search<br />

for an ultimate principle <strong>of</strong> social justice and moral rectitude, which transcends caste-specific ideal<br />

behaviour.<br />

3. The Nellie massacre <strong>of</strong> immigrant Muslims by frenzied Assamese mobs, in which hundreds<br />

perished, took place in 1983, following a decision to impose an election on Assam against the<br />

wishes <strong>of</strong> the leaders <strong>of</strong> the Anti-foreigner Movement that was rampant at that time.<br />

4. By the term ``terrorist movement'' the author means a movement that uses indiscriminate terror<br />

and violence inflicted on noncombatant civilian populations or their members as a means <strong>of</strong><br />

propaganda or political pressure. The author deems it necessary to distinguish such tactics from<br />

guerilla warfare which has broad mass-support. Needless to say, this does not imply that vicious<br />

state-terror does not exist.<br />

REFERENCES<br />

Benedict, R. (1934). Patterns <strong>of</strong> culture. Boston: Houghton Mifflin.<br />

Hooper, R. (1962). Right reason in the English Renaissance. Cambridge: Harvard <strong>University</strong> Press.<br />

Horkheimer, M. (1947). The eclipse <strong>of</strong> reason. New York: Continuum International.<br />

Lessing, F.D. & Wayman, A. (Translators) (1993). Introduction to the Buddhist Tantric Systems. Delhi,<br />

India: Motilal Banarsidass.<br />

82


CASTE AND CLASS VIOLENCE IN<br />

CENTRAL BIHAR: RESTRUCTURING<br />

SOCIAL ORDER TOWARDS<br />

RECONCILIATION<br />

Prakash Louis 1<br />

Indian Social Institute<br />

While one death is as tragic and as meaningless as another; over a thousand persons were killed<br />

by the Naxalites in different incidents in Andhra Pradesh during the current decade, and almost as<br />

many have been killed by the state in police encounters during the same period. It goes without<br />

saying that the majority <strong>of</strong> those who lost their lives were poor from the Backward Castes,<br />

Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes. As reports <strong>of</strong> violent deaths occur with nauseating<br />

frequency, people seem to have become increasingly insensitive and the society is getting<br />

progressively brutalised (Committee <strong>of</strong> Concerned Citizens, 1998, n.p.) 1 .<br />

This perception <strong>of</strong> the Committee <strong>of</strong> Concerned Citizens <strong>of</strong> Andhra Pradesh poignantly exposes the<br />

violence being unleashed on the common masses in certain parts <strong>of</strong> India. It underscores the urgent<br />

need to restructure the social order, which will hopefully spur on a reconciliatory process.<br />

In the last four decades, caste and class violence has been endemic in Indian society in general, and<br />

in Central Bihar 2 in particular. The highly rigid, skewed, hierarchical and oppressive caste system<br />

reinforces the idea <strong>of</strong> high and low, privileged and underprivileged social groups at the centre and the<br />

periphery. Feudalism, with its extra-economic coercion and economic monopoly by a few, is<br />

responsible for a divided Indian society. Social inequality and exclusion, which are endemic in the<br />

caste system, are sustained by the denial <strong>of</strong> access to resources by the class system. This castecum-class-based<br />

structure leads to discrimination, deprivation and dispossession. It is this social<br />

reality that has contributed to the emergence <strong>of</strong> an armed struggle and a cycle <strong>of</strong> violence in rural<br />

agrarian Central Bihar. The aim <strong>of</strong> the Naxalite Movement, the radical agrarian movement, which has<br />

functioned unabated in central Bihar for the last four decades, is to seize state power through a<br />

protracted armed struggle and to establish a classless society. Adopting a Marxist-Leninist-Maoist<br />

ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ<br />

1. Please direct all correspondence to Prakash Louis, Indian Social Institute, 10, Institutional Area, Lodi Road, New Delhi, 110003, India; E-mail:<br />

prakash@unv.ernet.in or prakash@hotmail.com.<br />

83


perspective, the Naxalites view the exploited proletarian class as the revolutionised vanguard to be<br />

mobilised to bring about revolutionary change. Since the revolutionary Naxalite-oriented peasant<br />

organisations have started working for the liberation <strong>of</strong> the under-classes, which are almost always<br />

represented by the lower castes or the exploited castes, there has been increased awareness <strong>of</strong> the<br />

structural oppression and a concomitant determination to secure equity and human rights for the<br />

dispossessed in Central Bihar. However, the dominant castes which, in most cases, are also the<br />

feudal landlords have resisted every move by the `subalterns' to introduce change in the oppressive<br />

and unequal social order. Hence the dominant caste landlords have at regular intervals formed<br />

senas, or private caste militia, to unleash terror and perpetrate massacres (Louis, 2002).<br />

Instead <strong>of</strong> fulfilling its role as the arbitrator between the various segments <strong>of</strong> the population, the state<br />

has become the tool in the hands <strong>of</strong> the powerful against the powerless. Adding to the complexity <strong>of</strong><br />

the situation, various splinter groups in the militant peasant groups are also constantly engaged in<br />

internecine violence and feuding. The common masses in central Bihar are thus at the receiving end<br />

in this cycle <strong>of</strong> violence.<br />

The state, the landed gentry and the agents <strong>of</strong> the people's movement have all unleashed violence<br />

on the common masses. While there is ongoing debate about who is initiating the violence or the<br />

factors that are contributing to it, the common masses Ð the victims Ð continue to suffer. The violent<br />

crisis in Central Bihar has led to many people being orphaned, widowed, physically maimed or<br />

incapacitated. The cycle <strong>of</strong> violence has also led to loss <strong>of</strong> property and gainful employment and<br />

stagnation in agricultural growth.<br />

Despite the massive loss <strong>of</strong> life, property and well-being, the embattled parties continue to engage in<br />

accusations and counter-accusations. The landed gentry accuse the oppressed and marginalised<br />

communities <strong>of</strong> having become ugravadi or terrorists, or antisocial elements, expressed in terms<br />

such as naxalvadi, nas katne wala, che inch chota karney wala, all referring to ``one who engages in<br />

annihilation''. The militant peasant organisations on the other hand, blame the dominant landed lords<br />

<strong>of</strong> being atyachari or julmi, that is, oppressors and exploiters. The landed gentry incite violence<br />

through the formation <strong>of</strong> militias such as the Bhumi sena, Lorik Sena (established in the early 1980s)<br />

and the Ranvir Sena (started in the late 1990s). The revolutionary peasant movements have<br />

established their armed wings, which are known as lal senas. All these armed groups spawn terror<br />

and violence, thus minimising any chance <strong>of</strong> peace.<br />

The state, instead <strong>of</strong> addressing the root causes <strong>of</strong> the conflict, fulfils a partisan role, referring to the<br />

cadres, leaders and sympathisers as ``trigger-happy youth'' or ``people bent on disrupting law and<br />

order''. Furthermore, from time to time, the civil and police administration engage in aggressive<br />

operations, blockades, indiscriminate arrests and fake encounters.<br />

Internecine violent conflict in the ranks <strong>of</strong> the revolutionary peasant movements is also characterised<br />

by accusations and counter-accusations. Different groups call one another ``traitors'' or ``revisionists'',<br />

thus not only harming the progress <strong>of</strong> the people's movement, but also creating confusion in the<br />

minds <strong>of</strong> the masses. At times, the feud between these revolutionary groups results in the killing <strong>of</strong><br />

civilians, adding to the trauma and suffering <strong>of</strong> the general population. Therefore, how to impose a<br />

84


moratorium on violent attacks within the ranks <strong>of</strong> the revolutionary peasant movements is a crucial<br />

and central question with which peace and human rights activists have to grapple.<br />

RESTORING HUMAN RIGHTS IN CENTRAL BIHAR<br />

Hence any process <strong>of</strong> assuring reconciliation and human rights in Central Bihar needs to address all<br />

the inter-related features <strong>of</strong> the conflict. In the Central Bihar context, peacebuilding exercises<br />

embracing a human rights perspective need to be comprehensively formulated to focus on the<br />

victims' experiences and rights, the responsibilities and obligations <strong>of</strong> the perpetrators <strong>of</strong> violence, the<br />

role <strong>of</strong> the state administration, and the concerns and rights <strong>of</strong> the unarmed common masses.<br />

Despite the fact that each <strong>of</strong> these social actors has a different perception <strong>of</strong> peace and<br />

reconciliation, it is imperative to provide a common platform and establish sufficient consensus to<br />

ensure human rights in this region <strong>of</strong> Central Bihar.<br />

Peacebuilding is contingent on addressing the following issues: (a) discrimination, segregation and<br />

exclusion, which are the salient features <strong>of</strong> the caste system; (b) the lack <strong>of</strong> access to resources,<br />

non-payment <strong>of</strong> minimum wages, and begari or forced labour, which characterise a feudal economic<br />

order; (c) the sexual exploitation <strong>of</strong> women, which is the legacy <strong>of</strong> patriarchy; and (d) the political<br />

exclusion <strong>of</strong> the marginalised, and the partisan and repressive role <strong>of</strong> the state and local<br />

administration, which are the hallmarks <strong>of</strong> bourgeoisie democracy.<br />

It is thus vital to forge a new vision for democracy and development in the brutalised and victimised<br />

region <strong>of</strong> Central Bihar. Although there have been instances <strong>of</strong> developmental and welfare activities<br />

undertaken by the Naxalite Movement, allegations that some Naxalite groups are appropriating funds<br />

allotted for developmental activities need to be addressed.<br />

Equal distribution <strong>of</strong> resources, another key ingredient <strong>of</strong> peacebuilding, is one <strong>of</strong> the major demands<br />

<strong>of</strong> the Naxalite Movement. As in other parts <strong>of</strong> the country, the lower castes, the landless agricultural<br />

labourers and producing class in Central Bihar do not own the means <strong>of</strong> production. The dominant<br />

castes, which own the resources, deny access to common property resources, gair mazrua zamin or<br />

government land, pasture land and river beds. The little land that some <strong>of</strong> the poor people own is<br />

<strong>of</strong>ten surreptitiously appropriated by the landed gentry. Moreover, vast tracks <strong>of</strong> land remain<br />

unutilised as a result <strong>of</strong> court cases or an ``economic blockade'' imposed by radical peasant<br />

organisations. Hence, once these lands have been liberated and distributed to the landless masses<br />

through the enforcement <strong>of</strong> constitutional provision-enabling land reform, a significant part <strong>of</strong> the<br />

foundation for peace and reconciliation will be established.<br />

It is fitting to conclude this brief article with a quotation from Justice M.N. Rao <strong>of</strong> the Andhra Pradesh<br />

High Court. In his judgment on 1 July 1997 in discharging two prominent Naxalites charged under the<br />

Terrorist and Disruptive Activities Prevention Act (TADA), he stated:<br />

Despite its magnitude and menacing dimension, the problem, we think, does not admit <strong>of</strong> any<br />

solutions. A Peace Commission with representative character inspiring confidence in all sections<br />

<strong>of</strong> the society including the Naxalites and the police and backed by state power and consent, we<br />

believe, can bring about immediate cessation <strong>of</strong> police encounters and violence by Naxalites and<br />

85


then only in the resultant peaceful atmosphere, a meaningful search for permanent solution is<br />

possible (Committee <strong>of</strong> Concerned Citizens 1998, p.7).<br />

NOTES<br />

1. The efforts <strong>of</strong> the Committee <strong>of</strong> Concerned Citizens (CCC) were directed at locating people's<br />

aspirations and the right to live with dignity on the agenda <strong>of</strong> the Naxalite movements and the<br />

government.<br />

2. Until the bifurcation <strong>of</strong> Jharkhand in 2000 as a separate state, Bihar was divided into the North<br />

Ganga plain, the <strong>South</strong> Bihar Plateau and the region between the two, known as the <strong>South</strong><br />

Ganga plain or Central Bihar.<br />

REFERENCES<br />

Committee <strong>of</strong> Concerned Citizens. (1998). In search <strong>of</strong> democratic space. Hyderabad: Author.<br />

Louis, P. (2002). People power: The Naxalite Movement in Central Bihar. New Delhi: Wordsmith.<br />

86


SATYAGRAHA IN<br />

CREATIVE SOCIETY<br />

Manoranjan Mohanty 1<br />

Developing Countries Research Centre, <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> Delhi<br />

MOMENT OR SHATTERED DREAMS<br />

The one hundred year history <strong>of</strong> Satyagraha (pursuit <strong>of</strong> truth force) for Swaraj (self-rule or self<br />

determination or self-realisation), which began with Gandhi in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> and had guided the<br />

dominant course <strong>of</strong> the Indian freedom struggle, and later had its echoes in Martin Luther King's<br />

campaign against racism in the U.S. and the struggle against apartheid in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, had unfolded<br />

a dream for people's self-determination that stands shattered today as the U.S.-led aggression on<br />

Iraq makes advances with imperialist fury. Yet, the Satyagraha persists as millions <strong>of</strong> people all over<br />

the world demonstrate in protest against this war, which violates all the gains <strong>of</strong> the 20th century, and<br />

especially the Iraqi people's right to Swaraj. After all, it was Tilak's 1 proclamation in the 1890s that<br />

had electrified India's freedom straggle: ``Swaraj is my birth right and I shall have it'' (uncited source).<br />

Hence, the struggle for Swaraj has entered a new phase. Satyagraha, too, has to be comprehended<br />

in the context <strong>of</strong> the experiences <strong>of</strong> the last century.<br />

THEORY OF SATYAGRAHA<br />

Satyagraha is not merely a statement <strong>of</strong> means focusing on the pursuit <strong>of</strong> the path <strong>of</strong> Ahimsa or nonviolence.<br />

There is a theory or a general philosophical principle underlying it. It focuses on satya, or<br />

truth, and agraha, or commitment. In other words, commitment to, or firmly following truth force is at<br />

the centre <strong>of</strong> this perspective. In this understanding, truth has become a truth force or a major force,<br />

which is in fact the main resource or weapon in the course <strong>of</strong> struggle. Here, truth as a value has<br />

also been taken as truth as a force. How does it happen? The abstract value <strong>of</strong> truth becomes a<br />

force when we subject a phenomenon to reason.<br />

Without entering into assessing definitions and propositions on Truth, we can take a working view<br />

ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ<br />

1. Please direct all correspondence to Manoranjan Mohanty, Developing Countries Research Centre, <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> Delhi, Delhi, 110007, India.<br />

87


that truth is comprehension <strong>of</strong> reality by application <strong>of</strong> reason. Every such comprehension takes into<br />

account the civilisation's accumulated knowledge to tackle the three questions <strong>of</strong> What, Why and<br />

How. It seeks to explain the nature <strong>of</strong> the particular thing in its historical and contemporary context,<br />

why it is so, especially in comparison with others, and how it can be transformed to meet the<br />

requirements <strong>of</strong> other values. It is this act <strong>of</strong> knowing that becomes an act <strong>of</strong> doing.<br />

The basic theory <strong>of</strong> Satyagraha is that reason applied to the truth <strong>of</strong> a situation drives the process<br />

towards freedom. If R is reason, T stands for Truth and F represents freedom, we can suggest the<br />

following proposition: R x T= F.<br />

Take for example slavery, which objectifies human beings as physical bodies to be bought and sold,<br />

or commandeered for labour. At some point in the human history <strong>of</strong> a society, this reality was<br />

comprehended as truth <strong>of</strong> denial <strong>of</strong> the value <strong>of</strong> a human being and human dignity, which had<br />

evolved over centuries. As distinct from the slaves, there were free men and some women. The<br />

system <strong>of</strong> slavery was sustained by a certain kind <strong>of</strong> economy, politics and culture. With new values<br />

<strong>of</strong> freedom and rational re-organisation <strong>of</strong> production, there was a move to abolish slavery. The truth<br />

<strong>of</strong> a situation was comprehended not just by abstract reason, but also by historical struggle that<br />

constantly tested the reasoning challenging slavery. The outcome was freedom not only for the<br />

slaves, but also for the social order as a whole, the latter gradually absorbing the general principle,<br />

which became relevant to other spheres in the future.<br />

PROPOSITION ON TRUTH, PEACE AND VIOLENCE<br />

The Satyagraha perspective seeks to discover the truth <strong>of</strong> a conflict situation, thus underlining<br />

questions about `the truth'. It is obvious that the oppressor and the oppressed have different notions<br />

<strong>of</strong> truth. The slave-owning class had thought that they were the men <strong>of</strong> reason and had the right to<br />

rule. The Brahmins <strong>of</strong> the Indian caste order considered themselves repositories <strong>of</strong> wisdom.<br />

European colonialism claimed that it had a civilising mission in Asia, <strong>Africa</strong> and Latin America. The<br />

white racist regime in yesterday's <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> thought it to be unreasonable to <strong>of</strong>fer universal<br />

franchise to all the `races'. Forces <strong>of</strong> capitalist globalisation argue that this process would be in the<br />

interest <strong>of</strong> all in the `Third World'. Finally, the Bush-Blair rhetoric hawks the slogan <strong>of</strong> `liberation' <strong>of</strong> the<br />

Iraqi people. On the other hand, the struggling forces have different voices <strong>of</strong> reason and present<br />

truth <strong>of</strong> the conflict situation in markedly different terms. Although notions <strong>of</strong> truth are not just twopronged,<br />

but are multiple, the overall struggle involves contradictions between two broad sets <strong>of</strong><br />

forces, which are connected with other contradictions in many complex ways. Hence, articulation <strong>of</strong><br />

truth is always contested from a variety <strong>of</strong> vantage points. In the course <strong>of</strong> struggle the historical<br />

process tilts in favour <strong>of</strong> one vantage point. It is by no means resolved forever, and the contestation<br />

continues. The dialectical notion <strong>of</strong> truth is neither absolutist Ð always subject to testing in practice<br />

Ð nor is it relativist Ð so relative to ideology, culture, communication or interest that is so uncertain<br />

that it cannot be the basis <strong>of</strong> political action.<br />

Therefore, we can only have propositions on the relationship between truth and peace. The<br />

proposition is: If truth <strong>of</strong> a conflict situation is comprehended by the parties to the conflict, prospects<br />

88


<strong>of</strong> peaceful resolution <strong>of</strong> the conflict are greater. Conversely: If truth <strong>of</strong> a conflict situation is contested<br />

by the parties to the conflict, prospects <strong>of</strong> violence persist.<br />

The key variable in these propositions is political practice by the struggling forces. To what extent the<br />

civilisation's values are strongly pursued and what effects it has on the dominant forces determines<br />

the degree to which there is common ground in grasping the truth. This is where the success <strong>of</strong><br />

Satyagraha depends on the effectiveness <strong>of</strong> the force <strong>of</strong> the people's movement.<br />

Satyagraha as truth force has been based on another perspective <strong>of</strong> Gandhi's values, namely<br />

Ahimsa. But this is where the debate will continue. What if the gap in the understanding <strong>of</strong> truth<br />

persists? History provides numerous examples <strong>of</strong> use <strong>of</strong> brute force, which has been contained only<br />

when people's movements, with both armed struggle and non-violent struggle, have turned the tide.<br />

However, one proposition <strong>of</strong> Satyagraha has to be seriously considered, namely: resorting to<br />

violence creates its own unreason and untruth generating spirals <strong>of</strong> untruths as it ``violates<br />

humanness''.<br />

Therefore, even while comprehending the history <strong>of</strong> struggle for liberation, it has to be asserted that<br />

violence cannot be a creed <strong>of</strong> freedom as it violates humanness while truth enhances humanness.<br />

Structures, policies and practices <strong>of</strong> violence, by definition, embody unreason and therefore<br />

humankind always attempts to seek the path <strong>of</strong> peaceful resolution <strong>of</strong> conflicts. In that sense,<br />

Satyagraha and peace are interconnected.<br />

An important implication <strong>of</strong> this understanding <strong>of</strong> Satyagraha is that it aims at making the adversary<br />

see reason and grasp truth embedded in the conflict. Once this is accomplished, the structure <strong>of</strong> that<br />

relationship <strong>of</strong> oppression is transformed and the parties are likely to shift towards a process <strong>of</strong><br />

reconciliation. The process <strong>of</strong> transformation is a complex one, involving discovery <strong>of</strong> truth,<br />

establishing guilt, punishing the guilty, forgiving those who grasp the truth, and positively creating<br />

bonds <strong>of</strong> love and solidarity in the new situation. Reconciliation is thus not about disregarding crime,<br />

but treating crime as a deviation.<br />

Reconciliation among contending parties is facilitated by a common grasping <strong>of</strong> truth through new<br />

structures, policies and a culture <strong>of</strong> transformation. Humankind is struggling for liberation from<br />

bondages based on colonialism, class, `race', ethnic, caste, gender and other forms <strong>of</strong> domination,<br />

and for positive fulfillment <strong>of</strong> multiple urgings <strong>of</strong> the creative self. Against this backdrop, Satyagraha<br />

for Swaraj is emerging as the most powerful current in the 21st century.<br />

NOTES<br />

1. Tilak, Bal Gangadhar (1856-1920) was the leader <strong>of</strong> the extreme wing <strong>of</strong> the Indian National<br />

Congress and the foremost nationalist before Mohandas Gandi. Tilak, a journalist, initiated the<br />

Ganapati festival and the Shivaji festival to inspire patriotism. He was imprisoned by the British for<br />

sedition because <strong>of</strong> his critical writings. Tilak organised an extreme wing <strong>of</strong> the Congress Party<br />

that demanded complete independence for India. His advocacy <strong>of</strong> independence was adopted by<br />

the Congress only after his death.<br />

89


Short communications<br />

INTERNATIONAL COLLABORATIVE<br />

EFFORT ON INJURY STATISTICS<br />

MEETING, 1-2 JUNE 2005,<br />

CUERNAVACA, MEXICO<br />

Richard Matzopoulos 1<br />

MRC-UNISA Crime, Violence & Injury Lead Programme<br />

Medical Research Council<br />

The International Collaborative Effort (ICE) on Injury Statistics Meeting, which was held in<br />

Cuernavaca, Mexico from 1 to 2 June 2005, was hosted by the US Department <strong>of</strong> Health and Human<br />

Services Centres for Disease Control and Prevention National Centre for Health Statistics. The<br />

meeting brought together delegates from 17 countries and several multilateral organisations. The<br />

meeting focused on the primary goals <strong>of</strong> the ICE on Injury Statistics, which include the facilitation <strong>of</strong><br />

(1) exchange and collaboration among injury researchers who develop and promote international<br />

standards in injury data collection and analysis; and (2) the comparability and improved quality <strong>of</strong><br />

injury data.<br />

The availability <strong>of</strong> accurate surveillance data fulfils one <strong>of</strong> the first steps in the public health approach<br />

to violence and injury prevention. However, as in many other low-income settings, injury surveillance<br />

is still in its infancy in <strong>Africa</strong> Ð hence the current lack <strong>of</strong> accurate and reliable data on which policies<br />

and interventions can be based. Collaborative meetings such as those presented by the ICE afford<br />

individuals an opportunity to inform the establishment <strong>of</strong> surveillance systems, which in turn can<br />

provide a more complete pr<strong>of</strong>ile <strong>of</strong> continental injury patterns.<br />

However, surveillance experts in low- and middle-income countries are <strong>of</strong>ten exposed to a level <strong>of</strong><br />

discourse which, although important for the injury prevention sector in general and pertinent to some<br />

<strong>of</strong> the cutting-edge research being conducted in high-income countries, does not appear to have<br />

much relevance in their own contexts. Hence, one <strong>of</strong> the most positive aspects <strong>of</strong> the Mexico ICE<br />

meeting was its attention to inclusiveness, with delegates attending from each <strong>of</strong> the WHO regions.<br />

Although there were several participants from high-income countries, such as the USA, Canada,<br />

ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ<br />

1. Please direct all correspondence to Richard Matzopoulos, MRC-UNISA Crime, Violence & Injury Lead Programme, P.O. Box 19070, Tygerberg, 7505,<br />

<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>; Tel: + 27 21 938-0536; Fax: +27 21 938-0381; E-mail: richard.matzopoulos@mrc.ac.za<br />

90


Australia and the Netherlands, as well as international agencies such as the WHO and PAHO, lowand<br />

middle-income countries were well represented. <strong>South</strong> and Central America were represented by<br />

participants from Argentina, Brazil, Chile, Colombia, Mexico and Nicaragua; the Caribbean by<br />

participants from Barbados, Dominica, Puerto Rico and St Lucia; Asia by two participants from<br />

Thailand; and <strong>Africa</strong> by a <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n participant. WHO AFRO presented a paper in absentia that<br />

focused on various surveillance initiatives currently in progress on the continent.<br />

The meeting started with introductory presentations for first-time participants by a group <strong>of</strong> delegates<br />

who regularly contribute to the ICE meetings. Additionally, information updates were provided on<br />

topics currently being investigated by several ICE working groups focused on:<br />

1. International Classification <strong>of</strong> External Causes <strong>of</strong> Injury (ICECI)<br />

2. US National Electronic Injury Surveillance System Ð All Injury Programme<br />

3. Injury indicators<br />

4. Occupational injuries<br />

5. Hospitalisation data<br />

6. Selecting a main injury<br />

7. ICE web pages<br />

8. Overview <strong>of</strong> ICE-related surveillance activities<br />

During the remainder <strong>of</strong> the meeting, the participants presented papers on country-specific<br />

surveillance research, methodologies for data collection and comparative data. The presentations<br />

were thus wide-ranging in subject matter, and included a focus on injury information systems in<br />

Mexico; mortality data collection and public hospitalisation data in Brazil; firearm injury in Brazil; the<br />

role <strong>of</strong> PAHO and CDC in Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health hospitals; injury surveillance in Nicaragua; application <strong>of</strong><br />

surveillance systems in mortality data and domestic violence ICECI in Colombia; violence and injury<br />

surveillance in the Caribbean; injury surveillance on violence in <strong>South</strong> America and <strong>Africa</strong>; injury<br />

surveillance efforts in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> and other parts <strong>of</strong> the <strong>Africa</strong> region; injury surveillance in Thailand;<br />

morbidity and mortality in Chile; injury mortality and injury surveillance in Argentina; and paediatric<br />

trauma registry and information systems for epidemiology and surveillance.<br />

Many <strong>of</strong> the presentations listed above are to be made available online. <strong>Africa</strong>n Safety Promotion<br />

readers interested in viewing these presentations, subscribing to the listserv or learning more about<br />

the work <strong>of</strong> the ICE on Injury Statistics are referred to the ICE website: http://www.cdc.gov/nchs/<br />

about/otheract/ice/meetings.htm<br />

Importantly, an envisaged output from the meeting is a document to be jointly compiled by the<br />

participants, which will compare the injury mortality rates in their countries for a selection <strong>of</strong> high<br />

priority injury subsets.<br />

91


INJURY PREVENTION AND SAFETY<br />

PROMOTION EVENTS HELD UNDER<br />

THE AUSPICES OF THE INJURY<br />

PREVENTION INITIATIVE FOR AFRICA,<br />

3-10 JULY 2005, PORT-SAID, EGYPT<br />

Fatma Hassan 1<br />

Faculty <strong>of</strong> Medicine, Suez Canal <strong>University</strong><br />

Wilson Odero<br />

School <strong>of</strong> Public Health, Moi <strong>University</strong><br />

Ashley Van Niekerk<br />

MRC-UNISA Crime, Violence & Injury Lead Programme<br />

Medical Research Council<br />

The Injury Prevention Initiative for <strong>Africa</strong> (IPIFA) and its partners coordinated three injury prevention<br />

and <strong>safety</strong> promotion initiatives in July 2005 in Port-Said, Egypt. These included the 4th <strong>Africa</strong>n<br />

Regional Safe Communities Conference (3-5 July); the Authorship Development and Writing Skills<br />

Workshop (6 July); and the Injury Epidemiology and Prevention Course (7-10 July).<br />

THE 4TH AFRICAN REGIONAL SAFE COMMUNITIES CONFERENCE<br />

Port-Said follows Harare, Johannesburg and Mauritius, as the most recent location for the biennial<br />

<strong>Africa</strong>n Regional Safe Communities Conference. These conferences have afforded <strong>Africa</strong>n <strong>safety</strong><br />

promotion researchers, policy makers and practitioners the opportunity on a regular basis to:<br />

. exchange their most recent scientific findings and practices in all fields <strong>of</strong> injury prevention and<br />

<strong>safety</strong> promotion;<br />

. present their own outcome- or process-oriented research;<br />

. promote evidence-based practice;<br />

ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ<br />

1. Please direct all correspondence to Pr<strong>of</strong>. Fatma Hassan, Community Medicine Department, Faculty <strong>of</strong> Medicine, Suez Canal <strong>University</strong>, Ismailia, Egypt;<br />

E-mail: fatmahassan1@yahoo.com<br />

92


. increase synergy and foster partnerships between pr<strong>of</strong>essionals across the continent and different<br />

regions <strong>of</strong> the world; and<br />

. promote the formulation <strong>of</strong> appropriate and effective <strong>Africa</strong>n injury prevention projects.<br />

The following institutions collaborated to organise the 4th <strong>Africa</strong>n Regional Safe Communities<br />

Conference: the Port-Said Governorate, Suez Canal <strong>University</strong>, the Red Crescent Society, the<br />

<strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> Institute for Social and Health Sciences (ISHS), the Injury Control Centre-<br />

Uganda (ICC-U) and IPIFA. The theme <strong>of</strong> the conference was Safe Communities: Communities for<br />

Injury and Violence Prevention. The sessions focused on injury surveillance, violence prevention,<br />

safe communities, safe schools, road traffic injuries, road <strong>safety</strong> and home visitation for the<br />

prevention <strong>of</strong> childhood injuries. More than 35 papers were accepted for presentation by<br />

representatives from various <strong>Africa</strong>n countries, including Ethiopia, Egypt, Ghana, Kenya, Nigeria,<br />

Ghana, Mauritius, <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, Tanzania, Uganda and Bangladesh. One hundred delegates<br />

attended the three-day conference.<br />

The conference was <strong>of</strong>ficially opened by the Port-Said Governor, His Excellency, Dr. Mostafa Kamel,<br />

and Dr. Yehia Tomom who represented Pr<strong>of</strong>. Mamdouh Gabr, the head <strong>of</strong> the Egyptian Red<br />

Crescent, Pr<strong>of</strong>. Farouk Abd Elkader, President <strong>of</strong> the Suez Canal <strong>University</strong>, Pr<strong>of</strong>. Mohamed Shoair,<br />

Dean <strong>of</strong> the Faculty <strong>of</strong> Medicine, Suez Canal <strong>University</strong>, Pr<strong>of</strong>. Mohamed Seedat <strong>of</strong> UNISA, and IPIFA<br />

President, Pr<strong>of</strong>. Fatma Hassan.<br />

During the opening ceremony, the delegates witnessed the signing <strong>of</strong> a Regional Safe Community<br />

Statement <strong>of</strong> Understanding. According to this Statement, the Governorate <strong>of</strong> Port-Said in Egypt<br />

agreed to implement an ongoing programme <strong>of</strong> injury control and community <strong>safety</strong> in Port-Said,<br />

Egypt. This safe community initiative will cover the entire community in Port Said, including people in<br />

all age groups, environments and situations. The Governorate and the Red Crescent Society agreed<br />

to document and evaluate their efforts, and to actively disseminate their experiences both nationally<br />

and across the <strong>Africa</strong>n continent with a view to seeking international designation in the near future.<br />

The Governorate and the Red Crescent Society also agreed to draw on the UNISA Affiliate Support<br />

Centre as a resource.<br />

AUTHORSHIP DEVELOPMENT AND WRITING SKILLS WORKSHOP<br />

The one-day workshop on authorship development and writing skills was conducted by a team <strong>of</strong><br />

<strong>Africa</strong>n injury researchers, including the following: Pr<strong>of</strong>. Wilson Odero <strong>of</strong> Moi <strong>University</strong>, Dr. Olive<br />

Kobusingye <strong>of</strong> WHO-AFRO, Pr<strong>of</strong>. Mustafa Abolfotouh from Alexandria <strong>University</strong>, and journal editors<br />

Dr. Babatunde Solagberu from the <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> Ilorin and editor <strong>of</strong> the <strong>Africa</strong>n Journal <strong>of</strong> Trauma, as<br />

well as Mr. Garth Stevens <strong>of</strong> the UNISA ISHS and Mr. Ashley Van Niekerk from the MRC-UNISA<br />

Crime, Violence and Injury Lead Programme, both <strong>of</strong> whom are on the editorial committee <strong>of</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n<br />

Safety Promotion: A Journal <strong>of</strong> Injury and Violence Prevention (ASP). The workshop was <strong>of</strong>fered in<br />

recognition <strong>of</strong> the significance <strong>of</strong> publishing to the functioning <strong>of</strong> the <strong>safety</strong> promotion sector on the<br />

continent. It is largely through publications that <strong>safety</strong> promotion pr<strong>of</strong>essionals disseminate their<br />

ideas, opinions and research findings to other researchers, practitioners, policy makers, and<br />

ultimately even to the general public.<br />

93


The aim <strong>of</strong> the workshop was to improve the capacity for writing research articles for publication in<br />

scientific journals, with particular emphasis on improving the quality <strong>of</strong> papers presented at the 4th<br />

<strong>Africa</strong>n Regional Safe Communities Conference and ensuring subsequent submission to the ASP.<br />

The workshop focused on the motivations for publishing, the generation <strong>of</strong> research ideas, the<br />

process <strong>of</strong> literature search and reviews, the structure and formats <strong>of</strong> scientific papers, the writing<br />

and rewriting process, the peer review process, journal selection and submission <strong>of</strong> manuscripts,<br />

authorship ethics, and technical requirements for articles submitted specifically to the ASP. The<br />

workshop concluded with some <strong>of</strong> the more experienced researchers agreeing to mentor the<br />

participating authors in their submission <strong>of</strong> articles to the ASP. The workshop generated a great deal<br />

<strong>of</strong> interest and was highly rated among the 33 participants.<br />

AFRICAN INJURY EPIDEMIOLOGY AND PREVENTION COURSE<br />

The <strong>Africa</strong>n Injury Epidemiology and Prevention Course provided exposure to emerging and midlevel<br />

researchers and programme managers to good injury surveillance practices. The focus on<br />

injury surveillance systems is critical because it can help us to quantify, cost and monitor trends and<br />

priorities for different injury sub-categories. Surveillance is the cornerstone <strong>of</strong> the public health<br />

approach to injury prevention, and the resultant development and expansion <strong>of</strong> <strong>safety</strong> promotion<br />

efforts. The first two days <strong>of</strong> the course were devoted to general injury epidemiology and violence<br />

prevention, while the last two days focused specifically on road traffic injury prevention. The course<br />

was attended by 29 participants, and was conducted by injury researchers and experts who are also<br />

active members <strong>of</strong> IPIFA. These included Pr<strong>of</strong>. Fatma Hassan, Pr<strong>of</strong>. Wilson Odero, Dr. Ronald Lett,<br />

Dr. Babatunde Solagberu, Pr<strong>of</strong>. Enas El-Sheikh and Mr. Erastus Njeru, who collaborated with two<br />

WHO members <strong>of</strong> staff, Dr. Olive Kobusingye and Dr. Meleckidzedeck Khayesi from Geneva. The<br />

course topics focused on the regional injury burden and epidemiology, concepts and strategies for<br />

injury prevention, surveillance systems, injury severity, trauma registries, pre-hospital and hospital<br />

trauma care, injury research in <strong>Africa</strong> and data management. The Violence and Injury Prevention<br />

Department <strong>of</strong> the WHO and WHO's Regional Office for <strong>Africa</strong> assisted in the funding and<br />

presentation <strong>of</strong> this course.<br />

CONCLUSION<br />

The successful seven-day programme signified a further milestone for IFIPA, the UNISA Safe<br />

Communities Affiliate Support Centre, and their <strong>safety</strong> promotion partners. In recent years IPIFA,<br />

UNISA's ISHS, the ICC-U, WHO-AFRO and others have combined efforts with a small but growing<br />

group <strong>of</strong> communities from across the region, and taken on the challenge <strong>of</strong> injury control on a<br />

continent where the injury problem remains largely unrecognised, despite its massive toll on <strong>Africa</strong>n<br />

lives. Such training and exchange programmes serve to strengthen and expand a critical mass <strong>of</strong><br />

<strong>safety</strong> promotion researchers and practitioners who have invested in prioritising injury prevention<br />

across <strong>Africa</strong>.<br />

94


ABSTRACTS<br />

The dissertation citations and abstracts contained here are published with permission <strong>of</strong> ProQuest<br />

Information and Learning. Further reproduction is prohibited without permission.<br />

Copies <strong>of</strong> dissertations may be obtained by addressing your request to UMI 1 Dissertation Services,<br />

300 North Zeeb Road, Ann Arbor, MI 48106-1346, USA. Telephone 091 (734) 761-7400; Web-page:<br />

wwwlib.umi.com/dissertations.<br />

Factors in the Liberian national conflict: Views from Liberian expatriates. Samuel Kpehe<br />

Ngaima, Sr., PhD, WALDEN UNIVERSITY, 2003. 217 pages. Adviser: Earl Joseph. Publication<br />

Number: AAT 3085839.<br />

This study analyzed the historical, social, ethnic, political, and international factors that contributed to<br />

the Liberian national conflict, which resulted in rampant violence, genocide, destruction, and<br />

displacement <strong>of</strong> more than half the population <strong>of</strong> the country and threatened the security <strong>of</strong> West<br />

<strong>Africa</strong>. No previous work had identified the major causes <strong>of</strong> the Liberian civil war. The researcher<br />

used a random sampling selection to locate 60 Liberian expatriates and conducted in-depth<br />

interviews in Ghana and the United States. The findings revealed that nearly all <strong>of</strong> those interviewed<br />

considered the prime factors in the civil conflict to be the perpetuation <strong>of</strong> Americo-Liberian<br />

governance over the indigenous <strong>Africa</strong>ns for more than a century and the resulting disparities in<br />

political, educational, and economic opportunities among Liberian citizens <strong>of</strong> different ethnic groups.<br />

Religion, which has been a major cause <strong>of</strong> internal conflicts in the developing world, was the least<br />

mentioned factor in the Liberian civil war. The findings suggest that an end to the violence and return<br />

<strong>of</strong> the vast numbers <strong>of</strong> Liberians in exile will result only when Liberians unite across class and ethnic<br />

divisions against individuals who victimize their own people to obtain power and wealth. The<br />

international community must provide logistical and economic support for rebuilding the country and<br />

creating the conditions for lasting peace and stability. A new society with policies <strong>of</strong> inclusion and<br />

equal opportunity must be implemented to bring about reconciliation among all Liberians.<br />

95


ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ<br />

Civilization and genocide (France, Guatemala, Tasmania, India, Turkey, Rwanda). Christopher<br />

John Powell, PhD, Carleton <strong>University</strong> (Canada), 2005. 448 pages. Adviser: Bruce Curtis, Publication<br />

Number: AAT NR00806<br />

This dissertation argues that civilization produces genocides. It begins by considering the obstacles<br />

to a sociological understanding <strong>of</strong> genocide. First among these is the metaphysics <strong>of</strong> rupture that<br />

situates genocide radically outside the field <strong>of</strong> ordinary social relations, treating it as a breakdown,<br />

rather than as a product, <strong>of</strong> social relations. A second obstacle is the essentially contested status <strong>of</strong><br />

the concept <strong>of</strong> ``genocide'', which must be understood historically, through genealogical and<br />

figurational analysis. A third obstacle is the relative over-development <strong>of</strong> heroic sociologies <strong>of</strong><br />

genocide, which focus on the production <strong>of</strong> an intending collective subject, and the relative underdevelopment<br />

<strong>of</strong> anti-heroic sociologies that attend to difference, to relations, and to strategies <strong>of</strong> unmaking.<br />

I theorize genocide using Norbert Elias's figurational analysis <strong>of</strong> the European civilizing<br />

process, which traces the intertwined growth <strong>of</strong> state institutions, particularly the state's territorial<br />

monopoly <strong>of</strong> military force, and <strong>of</strong> forms <strong>of</strong> self-regulation and habitual conduct that have come to be<br />

seen as civilized behaviour. Through a deconstructive reading <strong>of</strong> Elias's texts, I overcome the limits<br />

set by Elias's residual essentialism and Eurocentrism, which naively equates civilization with<br />

pacification, to produce instead an account <strong>of</strong> how the expansion <strong>of</strong> the civilizing process involves the<br />

reproduction <strong>of</strong> social violence on an ever-expanding scale. Under some circumstances, this process<br />

<strong>of</strong> ``barbarous civilization'' is realized through genocidal violence, or ``civilizing genocides''. Finally, I<br />

apply this framework to the analysis <strong>of</strong> six historical examples <strong>of</strong> civilizing genocides: in Languedoc,<br />

Guatemala, Tasmania, India, Turkey, and Rwanda. I show that these examples, some <strong>of</strong> which are<br />

not usually considered genocides, can fruitfully and appropriately be treated as such, and how each<br />

<strong>of</strong> these events, usually considered examples <strong>of</strong> the failure or the breakdown or the limits <strong>of</strong><br />

European civilization, are better understood as instances <strong>of</strong> its expansion.<br />

ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ<br />

Buddhists in ethnopolitical conflict: Examining belief systems <strong>of</strong> non-violence and<br />

compassion (Sri Lanka, India). Terri D. MacKinnon, MA, Royal Roads <strong>University</strong> (Canada),<br />

2004. 88 pages. Adviser: Hrach Gregorian, Publication Number: AAT MQ93831.<br />

The purpose <strong>of</strong> this research project is to identify how Buddhists view and manage conflict, in<br />

particular during the reconciliation phase. Through two field case studies the research analyzes how<br />

Tibetan refugees in India and Sinhalese Buddhists in Sri Lanka have managed ethnopolitical conflict,<br />

particularly the reconciliation phase, by applying Buddhist beliefs and principles. Further research<br />

objectives include defining which Buddhist principles they are utilizing in managing conflict and to<br />

establish if commonalities exist between those <strong>of</strong> differing Buddhist traditions in applying Buddhist<br />

principles to conflict; and whether these methods can be used by conflict specialists within secular<br />

contexts to help others affected by violent conflict reach forgiveness and reconciliation. The research<br />

also examines literature relevant to Buddhist teachings on conflict, and literature concerning<br />

ethnopolitical conflicts involving Buddhists. Additionally, several Buddhist organizations working with<br />

96


conflict resolution are studied to determine how they incorporate Buddhist principles into their<br />

activities.<br />

ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ<br />

By violent means only? A comparative analysis <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n agrarian labour relations, c.<br />

1900Ð2003. Luke Michael Radoux, MA, Dalhousie <strong>University</strong> (Canada), 2003. 161 pages. Adviser:<br />

Gary Kynoch, Publication Number: AAT MQ83594.<br />

In the last twenty years there has been much scholarly discussion regarding violence within <strong>South</strong><br />

<strong>Africa</strong>n farm labour relations, yet little comparative analysis has been conducted to date. Studies<br />

addressing violence between white masters and black labour tenants, sharecroppers and<br />

wageworkers have remained isolated regionally and have neglected to address this phenomenon's<br />

changing nature over a protracted timespan. To that end, this thesis examines three <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n<br />

agricultural regions comparatively during the period c. 1900-2003 and reveals that violence varies<br />

over time and is employed by white farmers to various degrees, in a number <strong>of</strong> ways, and for a wide<br />

array <strong>of</strong> reasons. As a feature <strong>of</strong> rural labour relations in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> during the twentieth century,<br />

violence was shaped by specific economic, social, ideological, and political conditions present at<br />

certain times and places. These included types <strong>of</strong> farming practiced, modes <strong>of</strong> labour utilized, levels<br />

<strong>of</strong> white agrarian capital accumulation, and the rise <strong>of</strong> Afrikaner nationalism, among many others. Yet<br />

violence within the black/white, master/servant, landlord/tenant nexus was neither sufficient to<br />

maintain absolute dominance <strong>of</strong> the countryside nor the sole means <strong>of</strong> ensuring white hegemony.<br />

The development and entrenchment <strong>of</strong> an ethos <strong>of</strong> paternalism in rural <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> <strong>of</strong>ten placated<br />

the more violent tendencies <strong>of</strong> white masters. But paternalistic relationships were also, at times,<br />

violent themselves and paternalism as an ideology did not in itself preclude the use <strong>of</strong> violence. In<br />

regions where paternalism existed, violence was mediated and less common; where a sense <strong>of</strong><br />

paternalism was absent, violence was more pervasive. Paternalism and violence were not mutually<br />

exclusive. They interacted in an intricate manner and constituted the core <strong>of</strong> a highly complex and<br />

diverse power relationship also grounded in notions <strong>of</strong> patriarchy, coercion and control.<br />

ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ<br />

A place-in-between: Narratives <strong>of</strong> gender, violence and identity in a <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n township.<br />

Upjeet Chandan, PhD, <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong>ern California, 2004. 386 pages. Adviser: Janet Hoskin,<br />

Publication Number: AAT 3155389.<br />

Located within the historical framework <strong>of</strong> apartheid <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> and the contemporary conundrums<br />

<strong>of</strong> its post-liberation transition, this study analyzes the peculiar predicaments <strong>of</strong> gendered race, place<br />

and identity in post-apartheid <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> from the perspectives <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Indians, the<br />

smallest <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>'s historically racialized groups. Set primarily in Chatsworth, Durban the first<br />

large-scale working class township built by the apartheid government in the 1960s specifically for<br />

persons racially defined as ``Indian,'' this ethnography contextualizes the ruptures and reversals <strong>of</strong><br />

post-apartheid political-economic transformations within a historical framework <strong>of</strong> spatialized racial<br />

domination and forced culture change. It traces the historically produced, everyday gendered<br />

experiences and effects <strong>of</strong> legalized racial segregation, spatial control, and dislocation at the level <strong>of</strong><br />

community, family, and gender relationships and formations. Examining stories <strong>of</strong> violation and<br />

97


violence within their particular apartheid and post-apartheid contexts <strong>of</strong> spatial, political and cultural<br />

change, this study illustrates how racial and masculine domination were interwoven in the making <strong>of</strong><br />

Chatsworth as a modern township and how its legacies continue to shape the pervasiveness <strong>of</strong><br />

gender violence in the present day. This ethnography argues that while post-apartheid narratives <strong>of</strong><br />

decay and decline and feelings <strong>of</strong> racial ``stuck-in-betweenness'' that predominate among Durban<br />

Indians speak fundamentally about the uncertain ``place'' <strong>of</strong> this racialized community within the new<br />

post-apartheid body politic, these narratives must also be contextualized within a longer history <strong>of</strong><br />

political insecurity, displacement, and exclusion on <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n soil. In addition, these narratives <strong>of</strong><br />

in-betweenness simultaneously reflect gendered cultural tensions between ``tradition'' and<br />

``modernity'' and nostalgia for previous hierarchies <strong>of</strong> identity and certainty within a context <strong>of</strong><br />

rapid political change, globalization, and economic struggle. While post-apartheid democratic rule has<br />

created new opportunities for self-making through the universalist discourse <strong>of</strong> citizenship,<br />

contemporary economic conditions and political reconfigurations from White minority rule to Black<br />

majority governance have also provoked new dilemmas <strong>of</strong> place.<br />

ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ<br />

Healing violence in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>: A textual reading <strong>of</strong> Kentridge's `Drawings for Projection'<br />

(William Kentridge). Vanessa Thompson, PhD, Duquesne <strong>University</strong>, 2005. 179 pages. Adviser:<br />

Leswin Laubscher, Publication Number: AAT 3162814.<br />

While the literature appears to understand trauma and violence as experienced singularly, and as<br />

effecting intrapsychic changes or reactions, latterly there has been a recognition that this<br />

understanding <strong>of</strong> the term ``trauma'' may not be adequate to describe violence suffered over a<br />

prolonged period <strong>of</strong> time. Further, psychology tends to avert our attention from healing by attending to<br />

symptomatology. In <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, during the apartheid years (1948-1994), violence was constituted<br />

by an extraordinary threat to ongoing being and was informed by a totalitarian prejudice. Creative<br />

texts, unlike traumatic texts, show how many artists have worked with <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n traumas in an<br />

effort to understand, and come to terms with them. This dissertation is a textual reading <strong>of</strong> Drawings<br />

for Projection (1989-1999) by William Kentridge (1955-), an acclaimed <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n artist. The<br />

approach <strong>of</strong> this study is broadly hermeneutic, phenomenological, and semiological. The reading<br />

suggests that the healing <strong>of</strong> violence is circular and continuous, and includes our remembering the<br />

past, and our humanity as ethical beings on both personal and collective levels. Additionally, the<br />

recognition <strong>of</strong> the Face, and the breath <strong>of</strong> the Other, contributes to the reconstitution <strong>of</strong> our ethics;<br />

conversely the counter pull to erasure, reconstitutes violence.<br />

ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ<br />

Inside rebellion: The political economy <strong>of</strong> rebel organization. Jeremy Matthew Weinstein, PhD,<br />

Harvard <strong>University</strong>, 2003. 561 pages. Adviser: Robert H. Bates, Publication Number: AAT 3106714.<br />

Civil war is now the most common form <strong>of</strong> violent conflict: all but seven <strong>of</strong> the 110 conflicts recorded<br />

between 1989 and 2000 were civil wars. While significant attention has focused on the macro-level<br />

factors that explain where these conflicts break out, how long they last, and why they come to an<br />

end, comparatively little research has been done at the micro-level on a central question with<br />

significant implications for policy: how do rebel groups organize violence? Why do rebel groups<br />

98


employ high levels <strong>of</strong> indiscriminate violence against civilians in some conflicts, while they<br />

demonstrate restraint in others? What factors shape and constrain the behavior <strong>of</strong> rebel leaders and<br />

their combatants? Why do some groups use methods <strong>of</strong> social mobilization while others rely on<br />

means <strong>of</strong> social control? This study approaches these questions through an examination <strong>of</strong> the<br />

internal organizational structure <strong>of</strong> rebel groups. It characterizes five organizational challenges that<br />

groups face: how to recruit combatants, control their behavior, govern the civilian population, punish<br />

defectors, and maintain the organization over time. Then, drawing on evidence gathered in <strong>Africa</strong> and<br />

Latin America in interviews with combatants and civilians, it explores how organizations respond to<br />

each <strong>of</strong> these challenges and identifies the factors that shape their divergence in strategy. The<br />

central argument is that two distinct types <strong>of</strong> rebel groups emerge to wage civil war Ð opportunistic<br />

and activist insurgencies Ð and their formation hinges on the type <strong>of</strong> opportunity that rebellion<br />

provides to potential participants. Where rebellion provides short-term rewards and risks are<br />

relatively low, opportunistic joiners flood rebel groups, causing severe principal agent problems that<br />

give rise to strategies <strong>of</strong> authoritarian governance and high levels <strong>of</strong> violence. By contrast, where<br />

rebellion is costly and the risk <strong>of</strong> death is significant, only the most committed activists are attracted<br />

to rebellion, making social mobilization the central organizational strategy. In these contexts, the<br />

costs <strong>of</strong> organization are overcome where groups emphasize identities or ideologies to elicit and<br />

sustain individual participation.<br />

ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ<br />

Performing the signs <strong>of</strong> injury: Critical perspectives on traumatic storytelling after apartheid<br />

(<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>). Christopher James Colvin, PhD, <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> Virginia, 2004. 409 pages. Adviser:<br />

Richard Handler, Publication Number: AAT 3137288<br />

Since the end <strong>of</strong> apartheid, those who suffered human rights violations during apartheid became the<br />

objects <strong>of</strong> a great deal <strong>of</strong> attention, both inside and outside <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>. Victims have been<br />

repeatedly approached for their stories and experiences, asked permission to record and circulate<br />

these narratives, and, <strong>of</strong>ten, promised a range <strong>of</strong> benefits. These promises typically go unfulfilled and<br />

victims have grown increasingly impatient with the next person who arrives on their doorstep,<br />

speaking about the miracle <strong>of</strong> testimony and reconciliation. This dissertation traces the ambivalent<br />

testimonial practice <strong>of</strong> ``traumatic storytelling'' in the work <strong>of</strong> Khulumani, a victim support and<br />

advocacy group, and the Cape Town Trauma Centre, a psychological trauma clinic that <strong>of</strong>fered<br />

counseling services to Khulumani members. Traumatic storytelling was frequently a point <strong>of</strong> conflict<br />

and debate between Khulumani and the many individuals and institutions Ð both local and foreign Ð<br />

that sought out their traumatic narratives. These tensions were heightened as Khulumani pursued a<br />

high-pr<strong>of</strong>ile political battle for reparations from the government, and increasingly drew attention, both<br />

welcome and unwelcome, from journalists, academics, and politicians. The chapters move roughly<br />

chronologically through a broad, two-year ethnographic account <strong>of</strong> the work <strong>of</strong> Khulumani and the<br />

Trauma Centre. Each chapter also highlights one or more <strong>of</strong> the various ``domains'' in which<br />

traumatic storytelling operated. Chapters 1 and 2 examine traumatic storytelling as a product <strong>of</strong> a<br />

number <strong>of</strong> political, religious and scientific discourses that came together in the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Truth<br />

and Reconciliation Commission (TRC). Chapter 3 examines debates around the psychological<br />

dimensions <strong>of</strong> traumatic storytelling. Chapter 4 moves from the psychological to the social and moral<br />

aspects <strong>of</strong> traumatic storytelling. Chapter 5 looks at the ``political economy <strong>of</strong> traumatic storytelling''<br />

99


while Chapter 6 considers the relationship between traumatic storytelling and political action. Chapter<br />

7 considers the kinds <strong>of</strong> subjectivity promoted by traumatic storytelling. The final chapter examines<br />

the question <strong>of</strong> ``memory, power, and subjectivity'' in traumatic storytelling and discusses the<br />

emerging politics <strong>of</strong> trauma and memory in post-apartheid <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>.<br />

ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ<br />

Setting the stage for a `new' <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>: A cultural approach to the Truth and Reconciliation<br />

Commission. Tanya Goodman, PhD, Yale <strong>University</strong>, 2004. 228 pages. Adviser: Jeffrey C.<br />

Alexander; Kai Erikson, Publication Number: AAT 3152936.<br />

This dissertation argues that the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Truth and Reconciliation Commission (TRC) should<br />

be viewed as a modern ritual <strong>of</strong> performance which enabled the nation's apartheid past to be<br />

constructed as a ``cultural trauma'' and by so doing to create a new collective narrative <strong>of</strong> inclusion. In<br />

contrast to traditional accounts <strong>of</strong> ritual that assume there are pre-existing bonds <strong>of</strong> solidarity in<br />

society which are reinvigorated by recalling the sacred center <strong>of</strong> a community, my work seeks to<br />

show how a performance like the TRC, while still relying on the processes <strong>of</strong> demarcating the sacred<br />

from the pr<strong>of</strong>ane, can also be a forward-looking enterprise in which the construction <strong>of</strong> a new sense<br />

<strong>of</strong> connectedness can emerge. The TRC relied primarily on testimonies from victims and perpetrators<br />

<strong>of</strong> apartheid violence who came forward to tell their stories in a public forum. Rather than simply<br />

serving as data for setting the historical record straight, I demonstrate that these testimonies and the<br />

effervescent foundational moment in which the TRC operated, the ceremonial attention it gained from<br />

the media, and the affective engagement it initiated because <strong>of</strong> its emphasis on the horrific stories <strong>of</strong><br />

everyday people helped to perform and then designate the past as pr<strong>of</strong>ane and to imagine, through a<br />

process <strong>of</strong> performance as well, a future community clothed in sacred qualities. Seeking to<br />

understand how this process was enacted, I examine not only the content <strong>of</strong> the testimonies which<br />

were given but also how these stories were told and what values were attached to them. As a result,<br />

I identify a series <strong>of</strong> performance cycles, including the forums <strong>of</strong> the TRC hearings, the modes<br />

through which the testimonies were represented in the public sphere, and how audiences responded.<br />

I also determine that third parties Ð ``empathic interlocutors'' and ``sympathetic rapporteurs'' Ð were<br />

critical players not only as mediators for the claims made in the TRC hearings, but also in how the<br />

work <strong>of</strong> the TRC was translated for a broader audience.<br />

ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ<br />

The role <strong>of</strong> empathy in facilitating forgiveness: The lived experience <strong>of</strong> six political<br />

perpetrators in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>. Ida Marleen Ramsey, PhD, Gonzaga <strong>University</strong>, 2003. 261 pages.<br />

Adviser: Shann Ferch, Publication Number: AAT 3116073<br />

This study investigated the lived experience <strong>of</strong> perpetrators who received empathy and forgiveness<br />

from a person or persons they had deeply harmed. The study utilized a hermeneutic<br />

phenomenological approach in interviewing six political perpetrators who were found guilty <strong>of</strong><br />

crimes against humanity during the apartheid era <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, five <strong>of</strong> whom applied for and were<br />

granted amnesty for these crimes. The nature <strong>of</strong> the public confessions, apologies, and bestowal <strong>of</strong><br />

forgiveness by victims during the Truth and Reconciliation process in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> created an<br />

environment that necessitated the use <strong>of</strong> a hermeneutic phenomenological methodology. Interviews<br />

100


involving both structured and unstructured questions were used in obtaining the recorded text <strong>of</strong> the<br />

experience <strong>of</strong> each person included in this study. A review <strong>of</strong> the literature provided the philosophical<br />

and psychological background for understanding the role empathy and Ubuntu in facilitating the<br />

giving and receiving <strong>of</strong> unconditional forgiveness. The findings from this study suggest that the<br />

perpetrator may be deeply harmed by the violence or injury that they enact upon the other. The<br />

findings also imply that the perpetrator's outward appearance <strong>of</strong> arrogance, defensiveness, and<br />

insensitivity to the plight <strong>of</strong> the victim may be defense mechanisms to protect the ego from deep<br />

shame and humiliation. Finally, the study suggests that empathy and Ubuntu facilitate the <strong>of</strong>fering<br />

and receiving <strong>of</strong> unconditional forgiveness, which then opens the doorway for the possibility <strong>of</strong><br />

reconciliation for the perpetrator. This reconciliation may be threefold; reconciliation with the victim,<br />

reconciliation with the self as in the form <strong>of</strong> self-forgiveness, and reconciliation with a wider<br />

community <strong>of</strong> people. This dissertation opens both theoretical and therapeutic discussion <strong>of</strong> the role<br />

<strong>of</strong> empathy, Ubuntu, and forgiveness in bringing healing to both the victim and perpetrator. The<br />

findings point towards the need to explore these human phenomena in terms <strong>of</strong> reconciliation and<br />

redemption for perpetrators, regardless <strong>of</strong> how insignificant or significant the injury.<br />

ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ<br />

Through the public/private lens: Reconciliation, responsibility and democratization in <strong>South</strong><br />

<strong>Africa</strong>. Rosemary Lynne Nagy, PhD, <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> Toronto (Canada), 2003. 301 pages. Adviser:<br />

Melissa Williams, Publication Number: AAT NQ78446.<br />

Democratization in the wake <strong>of</strong> state violence necessarily involves the (re) construction <strong>of</strong> a strong<br />

public/private distinction. Following Shklar's principle <strong>of</strong> ``putting cruelty first,'' the prevention <strong>of</strong><br />

injustice requires, at a minimum, some sort <strong>of</strong> boundary between the public and the private. An<br />

expansive understanding <strong>of</strong> the public/private distinction is proposed: procedural mechanisms <strong>of</strong><br />

accountability are underpinned by ethical-political commitments to democratic principles and<br />

practices. A robust public/private distinction is dependent upon the integrity <strong>of</strong> its ``constituent''<br />

elements: ``selfhood privacy'' and solidarity. In state violence, institutional abuses are supported by<br />

ethical failings on the part <strong>of</strong> ``private'' citizens and enabled by damage to personal capacities to<br />

resist. The erosion <strong>of</strong> social solidarity and violations <strong>of</strong> an integral sense <strong>of</strong> self corrupt or destroy the<br />

sense <strong>of</strong> injustice among victims and passive bystanders. Thus, transitional nations must attend to<br />

the institutional or political requirements <strong>of</strong> democracy and to the ethical or personal requirements <strong>of</strong><br />

democracy. In both violence and transition, there is an interrelationship between the personal and the<br />

political, or the individual and systemic. The challenge in making a clean break with the past is finding<br />

an appropriate balance between political change and personal transformation that does not repeat or<br />

mimic the injustices <strong>of</strong> the past. The dissertation views the process <strong>of</strong> democratization in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong><br />

through the public/private lens. Analysis <strong>of</strong> the breakdown <strong>of</strong> the public/private distinction under<br />

apartheid reveals that egregious violence was inscribed within apartheid's structural violence.<br />

Responsibility for gross violations <strong>of</strong> human rights therefore cannot be dissociated from responsibility<br />

for human rights violations under basic apartheid law. The Truth and Reconciliation Commission<br />

(TRC) appeared well situated to establish accountability and to restore solidarity and selfhood<br />

privacy. However, narratives <strong>of</strong> forgiveness, healing and heroism glossed over the responsibility <strong>of</strong><br />

apartheid beneficiaries and placed the burden <strong>of</strong> reconciliation upon victims. This detracted from the<br />

paramount task <strong>of</strong> affirming the personal dignity <strong>of</strong> victims and cannot be considered a clean break<br />

101


with the past. In post-Commission <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, the efficacy <strong>of</strong> new institutions and the advancement<br />

<strong>of</strong> democracy are partly dependent upon continued reconciliation and responsibility on the part <strong>of</strong><br />

``private'' citizens.<br />

ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ<br />

Peasant unrest, community warriors and state power in India: The case <strong>of</strong> private caste senas<br />

(armies) in Bihar. Ashwani Kumar, PhD, The <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> Oklahoma, 2003. 322 pages. Adviser:<br />

Robert H. Cox, Publication Number: AAT 3082961<br />

Using the case study <strong>of</strong> private caste armies in Bihar, a state in eastern part <strong>of</strong> India, this dissertation<br />

attempts to describe and explain the dynamics <strong>of</strong> caste, class and state power in post-independence<br />

India. This study revolves around a fundamental question: what are the causes and outcomes <strong>of</strong><br />

emergence and proliferation <strong>of</strong> private caste armies in Bihar? Using a process oriented state-insociety<br />

perspective, this dissertation attempts to analyze interactions between state power and social<br />

forces in Bihar. The state and society are embedded in each other rather than being dichotomously<br />

related. In contrast to usual portrayal <strong>of</strong> the state as a monolith and the central actor <strong>of</strong> social<br />

transformation, the empirical evidence from Bihar presents an alternative interpretation. The<br />

emergence <strong>of</strong> private caste senas (armies) has resulted from the ineffectiveness <strong>of</strong> state power and<br />

the increasing peasant unrest in the state <strong>of</strong> Bihar since independence. Further, the emergence <strong>of</strong><br />

Ranvir Sena, a caste army <strong>of</strong> the landed Bhumihar caste, as the ruthless and dreaded community<br />

warriors in Bihar also points to the continuing influence <strong>of</strong> caste in structuring state-society outcomes<br />

in post-independence India. Evoking the spirit <strong>of</strong> selfless piety, Ranvir Sena claims to protect the<br />

caste as a community <strong>of</strong> merit and worth against the so-called depredations <strong>of</strong> lower castes (Dalits).<br />

In this sense, the frequent outbreak <strong>of</strong> caste wars between landowning castes and landless lower<br />

castes is not brought about by ancient caste hatred but by the modernity <strong>of</strong> caste wars rooted in the<br />

dynamics <strong>of</strong> political and agrarian struggles in post-independence India. In many places in Asia,<br />

<strong>Africa</strong>, and Latin America, militias, guerrillas, terrorists, vigilante groups, mafias, paramilitary groups<br />

have emerged and defined themselves in terms <strong>of</strong> ethnicity, language, region or religion. Seen as<br />

``irregular armed forces'', they have <strong>of</strong>ten challenged state's monopoly <strong>of</strong> coercion. From a<br />

comparative perspective, the case <strong>of</strong> private caste armies in Bihar suggests that the seemingly<br />

endless cycle <strong>of</strong> violence in many societies is rooted in the limited and fragmented nature <strong>of</strong> the state<br />

power to mediate power struggles; part political and part economic.<br />

ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ<br />

Reporting ethnic violence: Context, text and practice <strong>of</strong> journalism in an Indian city. Aloke<br />

Thakore, PhD, The <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> Wisconsin Ð Madison, 2004. 338 pages. Adviser: Hemant G. Shah,<br />

Publication Number: AAT 3155209<br />

This dissertation examines the reporting <strong>of</strong> ethnic violence, which in Indian English is called<br />

communal riots, in Ahmedabad, India. The research is premised on the model that journalism like<br />

any cultural product is best understood in its relationship with the social world, the creator and the<br />

receiver. The study <strong>of</strong> the creators, or journalism practice, is based on a theoretical framework <strong>of</strong><br />

influences on media content that includes the individual orientations, media routines, organizational<br />

pressures, extra media factors, and ideologies. Addressing the lacuna in research on media and<br />

102


ethnic violence, the research is conducted as a case study with three parts. First, the context <strong>of</strong> the<br />

reporting is presented using historical, geographical, economic, demographic, marketing and survey<br />

data. Second, a close textual analysis, which draws upon different strands <strong>of</strong> discourse analysis, <strong>of</strong><br />

the reporting <strong>of</strong> the violence in five newspapers, three Gujarati (Gujarat Samachar, Sandesh, and<br />

Gujarat Today) and two English (Times <strong>of</strong> India and Indian Express), is presented. Lastly, long<br />

interviews are used to show how an interaction between the backgrounds <strong>of</strong> the journalists, beliefs<br />

about journalism and its ethics, and pr<strong>of</strong>essional routines come together to result in the texts <strong>of</strong><br />

violence that are analyzed earlier. The findings suggest that the reporting <strong>of</strong> the violence was<br />

uneven. The same incidents were differently accented and the journalistic genres <strong>of</strong> news and views<br />

were blurred. Such a style shows the privileging <strong>of</strong> authority, the importance <strong>of</strong> geographic location<br />

and identity in covering incidents and different modes <strong>of</strong> blame or causality. Theoretically, the<br />

research suggests, albeit tentatively, that the media be construed not as causing riots but as working<br />

to harden identities among ethnic groups. Also, the study shows that reading coverage about ethnic<br />

violence <strong>of</strong>f the ideologies <strong>of</strong> journalists or <strong>of</strong> ownership structures is not useful. Rather it is the<br />

interaction between individuals, organizations, routines and contexts that have to be closely<br />

examined. Hence, normatively this research <strong>of</strong>fers multilevel suggestions for an ethical coverage<br />

which is rooted in the Gandhian idea <strong>of</strong> trusteeship instead <strong>of</strong> a purely consequentialist view <strong>of</strong> media<br />

coverage.<br />

ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ<br />

The everyday life <strong>of</strong> Hindu nationalism: An ethnographic account, 1990-1994 (India). Shubh<br />

Mathur, PhD, Newschool <strong>University</strong>, 2004. 238 pages. Adviser: Rayna Rapp, Publication Number:<br />

AAT 3118788<br />

This dissertation looks at factors behind the rise <strong>of</strong> Hindu nationalism in India and at the changes that<br />

take place in culture and civil society before the movement can gain political power. It is an<br />

ethnographic study <strong>of</strong> a popular, right-wing movement and documents the progress <strong>of</strong> the Hindu right<br />

through the lives <strong>of</strong> its actors and the experience <strong>of</strong> the victims <strong>of</strong> anti-minority violence. It focuses on<br />

the state <strong>of</strong> Rajasthan, which does not have a history <strong>of</strong> Hindu nationalism; and is based on fieldwork<br />

conducted in ``social welfare'' projects run by Hindu nationalist organizations in tribal districts in the<br />

state and in urban slums in Jaipur, the state capital. It also tracks the anti-minority violence occurring<br />

in different parts <strong>of</strong> the state between 1990 and 1992, based on interviews with survivors and relief<br />

workers, the hearings <strong>of</strong> the Inquiry Commission investigating the events <strong>of</strong> the I 990 ``riots'' in Jaipur,<br />

and on personal experience <strong>of</strong> relief work carried out in the wake <strong>of</strong> the anti-Muslim riots <strong>of</strong> 1992. It<br />

attempts to understand the success <strong>of</strong> Hindu nationalism through its appeal beyond dominant groups<br />

to disprivileged and marginalized social groups, such as tribals, the urban poor, women, dalits, trade<br />

unions etc. It views the ideology <strong>of</strong> Hindutva (``Hinduness) as a form <strong>of</strong> symbolic capital, which is<br />

accepted by subordinated groups as a means <strong>of</strong> advancing their claims to a higher status within a<br />

system which disprivileges them in very comprehensive ways. It examines the patterns <strong>of</strong> violence in<br />

Jaipur in 1990 and 1992, and argues that while the conditions <strong>of</strong> this violence are made possible by<br />

the development <strong>of</strong> Indian capitalism within the globalized economy, the violence follows not a<br />

political or economic but a cultural logic.<br />

103


ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ<br />

The relationship between protest and repression: An empirical analysis <strong>of</strong> domestic conflict<br />

in <strong>Africa</strong> and Latin America. Sabine C. Carey, PhD, <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> Essex (United Kingdom), 2003.<br />

Publication Number: Not Available from UMI.<br />

This dissertation analyses the dynamics that underlie domestic conflict and cooperation in the<br />

developing world. It investigates how protest and repression influence each other. The theoretical and<br />

empirical models that it develops incorporate both cooperative and conflictual behaviours <strong>of</strong> the state<br />

and the opposition into the analysis <strong>of</strong> domestic conflict. The empirical part <strong>of</strong> the dissertation is<br />

divided into two parts. The main analysis uses daily data from six Latin American and three <strong>Africa</strong>n<br />

countries between the late 1970s and early 1990s. It employs vector autoregression analysis to<br />

account for the two-way interactions between the government and the opposition. The analysis is<br />

performed separately for democracies and non-democracies in order to account for the differing<br />

characteristics <strong>of</strong> interaction between the state and the population under different institutional<br />

settings. The second part <strong>of</strong> the analysis employs ordered probit techniques to investigate a larger<br />

dataset, which includes most Latin American and <strong>Africa</strong>n countries over the same time period. Apart<br />

from studying the relationship between protest and repression, it focuses on the impact <strong>of</strong> different<br />

political regime characteristics on the interaction between the government and non-governmental<br />

actors, as well as on the effect <strong>of</strong> protest and repression on the level <strong>of</strong> democracy. The results from<br />

the two analyses suggest that both protest and repression are highly interdependent. Conflictual<br />

behaviour <strong>of</strong> one actor leads to conflictual behaviour <strong>of</strong> the other actor. In general, both actors seem<br />

to imitate each other's behaviour. The vector autoregression shows that the responses are most<br />

intense during the first four to ten days after a violent or non-violent attack from the opponent. The<br />

results from the wider analysis suggest that although democracies use less violence in their<br />

responses to domestic protest, they are very likely to respond with sanctions and limited coercion to<br />

popular dissent.<br />

ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ<br />

Violence in the midst <strong>of</strong> peace negotiations. Cases from Guatemala, Northern Ireland, <strong>South</strong><br />

<strong>Africa</strong> and Sri Lanka. Kristine Hoglund, PhD, Uppsala Universitet (Sweden), 2004. 232 pages.<br />

Publication Number: Not Available from UMI.<br />

Why do peace talks fall apart as a result <strong>of</strong> violence? The present study addresses the question <strong>of</strong><br />

why and how violence sometimes changes the dynamics <strong>of</strong> peace negotiation processes. Incidents<br />

<strong>of</strong> violence may produce friction between and within parties. As a result, violence can make parties<br />

reluctant to continue peace negotiations if it increases the risk and fears <strong>of</strong> reaching a peace<br />

agreement with the enemy. Twelve high-pr<strong>of</strong>ile incidents <strong>of</strong> violence, including political<br />

assassinations, massacres, and bomb explosions, are analysed with the aim <strong>of</strong> probing the causal<br />

patterns that emerge in the aftermath <strong>of</strong> violence. Cases are selected from four intra-state negotiation<br />

processes: Guatemala, Northern Ireland, <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, and Sri Lanka. The patterns <strong>of</strong> actions and<br />

responses, indicate that violence <strong>of</strong>ten symbolises a breach <strong>of</strong> faith between the parties. This is a<br />

main reason why violence is sometimes followed by a crisis. In addition, low intra-party cohesion<br />

regarding the peace negotiations, constrains the efforts <strong>of</strong> the decision makers to pursue peace. The<br />

104


study underlines the relationship between the parties, within each party, and the interaction between<br />

the two levels <strong>of</strong> analysis. The research further suggests that the destructive effect <strong>of</strong> violence can be<br />

counteracted by mutual certainty about where the negotiation process is heading, by confidencebuilding<br />

measures by the parties themselves, and through actions by third party mediators and<br />

monitors. Peace negotiations are also driven forward by the fears the parties have about continued<br />

armed conflict, a fear that commonly is exacerbated by the continued existence <strong>of</strong> violence.<br />

105


CALL FOR SUBMISSIONS<br />

<strong>Africa</strong>n Safety Promotion: A Journal <strong>of</strong> Injury and Violence Prevention (ASP) will be published twice a<br />

year. Submissions within the following guidelines are welcome. Please submit your contributions or<br />

any related queries to Pr<strong>of</strong>essor Mohamed Seedat, Editor-in-Chief, <strong>Africa</strong>n Safety Promotion: A<br />

Journal <strong>of</strong> Injury and Violence Prevention, P.O. Box 1087, Lenasia, 1820, <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, or via E-mail<br />

to seedama@unisa.ac.za<br />

GUIDE TO AUTHORS<br />

There are five categories <strong>of</strong> submissions accepted for publication in the ASP. These include original<br />

contributions, short research reports, literature reviews, book reviews and short communications. The<br />

journal is multisectoral, and welcomes contributions from individuals or organisations interested or<br />

involved in the injury and violence prevention and containment sector in <strong>Africa</strong>. The sectors most<br />

closely related to the focus <strong>of</strong> the journal include the behavioural and social sciences, health<br />

sciences, engineering, educational sciences and the humanities.<br />

MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION<br />

The manuscript must be accompanied by a letter indicating that the article has not been published<br />

elsewhere. This letter must be signed by all listed authors to indicate their agreement with the<br />

submission. All manuscripts should be typed in double spacing with a margin <strong>of</strong> 3.5 cm on the left<br />

and right sides <strong>of</strong> the page. The manuscripts should be in 12 point Courier font, with the main<br />

headings in capitals and bold, and sub-headings in capitals. No enumerations and section numbering<br />

should be included, and all graphs and tables should be inserted at the end <strong>of</strong> the document.<br />

106


ORIGINAL CONTRIBUTIONS<br />

Full scientific manuscripts accepted for this category should not exceed 25 pages, including the title<br />

page, references, figures and tables.<br />

SHORT RESEARCH REPORTS<br />

Shorter scientific manuscripts, reporting on studies utilising limited samples, new methodologies, or<br />

replication studies, submitted for this category should not exceed 12 pages, including tables and<br />

figures.<br />

LITERATURE REVIEWS<br />

Manuscripts submitted as a literature review should not exceed 30 pages in total.<br />

BOOK REVIEWS<br />

Copies <strong>of</strong> books may be sent to the Editor-in-Chief at P.O. Box 1087, Lenasia, 1820, <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>.<br />

SHORT COMMUNICATIONS<br />

These communications include commentaries on events in the injury prevention sector, and<br />

organisation or programme reports. These should not exceed four pages, inclusive <strong>of</strong> references.<br />

All original contributions and short research reports should have the following sections:<br />

1. Title Page. This page should include the title <strong>of</strong> the manuscript, all authors and their affiliations.<br />

Full contact details should be included for the corresponding author. The category in which the<br />

manuscript is to be submitted should be indicated at the top <strong>of</strong> the page. The appropriate types <strong>of</strong><br />

articles for the ASP can be found in this issue <strong>of</strong> the journal.<br />

2. Abstract. All manuscripts, except short communications and book reviews should include an<br />

abstract placed before the main text <strong>of</strong> the article. This abstract should not exceed 250 words in<br />

length. While all abstracts need to be submitted in English, authors are also allowed to submit<br />

translations <strong>of</strong> these abstracts in French or Swahili.<br />

3. Main Text. The main text <strong>of</strong> the article should, as far as is appropriate, be divided into the<br />

following sections: Introduction, Methods, Results, Discussion, and Prevention Implications.<br />

STYLE AND REFERENCES<br />

All contributions should follow the American Psychological Association style. This format can be<br />

found in:<br />

107


American Psychological Association (2001). Publication Manual <strong>of</strong> the American Psychological<br />

Association (5th ed.). New York: Author.<br />

Please note the format for the Reference List. For example:<br />

Bender, S., van Niekerk, A., Seedat, M., & Atkins, S. (2002). A review <strong>of</strong> best practice home visitation<br />

in low-income contexts. <strong>Africa</strong>n Safety Promotion: A Journal <strong>of</strong> Injury and Violence Prevention, 1(1),<br />

35-67.<br />

Kibel, M.A. & Wagstaff, L.A. (Eds) (1993). Child health for all. A manual for southern <strong>Africa</strong>. Cape<br />

Town: Oxford <strong>University</strong> Press.<br />

SUBMISSIONS<br />

Three copies <strong>of</strong> the manuscript must be submitted to the Editor-in-Chief, <strong>Africa</strong>n Safety Promotion: A<br />

Journal <strong>of</strong> Injury and Violence Prevention, P.O. Box 1087, Lenasia, 1820, <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>. Contributors<br />

may submit the names and contact details <strong>of</strong> two referees competent to review their manuscript.<br />

Authors will be asked to respond to the editors and reviewers comments within four weeks. Upon<br />

acceptance <strong>of</strong> the revision for publication, an electronic copy in either Windows Word or WordPerfect<br />

will be requested.<br />

If you have any queries please contact The Editors: ASP at P.O. Box 1087, Lenasia, 1820, <strong>South</strong><br />

<strong>Africa</strong>; Tel. +27 +11 857-1142; Fax. +27 +11 857-1770; E-mail: seedama@unisa.ac.za<br />

108


CONTENTS OF PREVIOUS ISSUES OF<br />

AFRICAN SAFETY PROMOTION:<br />

A JOURNAL OF INJURY AND<br />

VIOLENCE PREVENTION<br />

VOL. 1 NO 1 2003<br />

EDITORIAL<br />

A New Journal for the Promotion <strong>of</strong> Injury Prevention in <strong>Africa</strong> Ð A. Van Niekerk and N. Duncan<br />

ORIGINAL CONTRIBUTIONS<br />

Extending the Boundaries <strong>of</strong> Injury Prevention Theory, Research and Practice in <strong>Africa</strong> Ð M. Seedat<br />

A Pr<strong>of</strong>ile <strong>of</strong> Fatal Injuries in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>: Towards a Platform for Safety Promotion Ð R. Matzopoulos,<br />

A. Van Niekerk, S. Burrows and H. Donson<br />

A Qualitative Evaluation <strong>of</strong> Medico Legal Services in Gauteng, <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>: Service Accessibility and<br />

Quality <strong>of</strong> Care to Rape Survivors Ð S. Suffla, M. Seedat and A. Nascimento<br />

SHORT RESEARCH ARTICLES<br />

Patterns <strong>of</strong> Road Traffic Injuries and Associated Factors among School-aged Children in Dar es<br />

Salaam, Tanzania Ð L.M. Museru, M.T. Lesbabari and N.A.A. Mbembati<br />

Childhood Burn Injuries in Children in Dar es Salaam: Patterns and Perceptions <strong>of</strong> Prevention Ð<br />

N.A.A. Mbembati, L.M. Museru and M.T. Leshabari<br />

LITERATURE REVIEWS<br />

A Review <strong>of</strong> Best Practice Home Visitation Interventions for Childhood Injury Reduction Ð S. Bender,<br />

A. Van Niekerk, M. Seedat and S. Atkins<br />

109


Towards a <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Injury Costing Model: A Review <strong>of</strong> the Literature for the Development <strong>of</strong> a<br />

Process Path Ð B. Bowman<br />

BOOK REVIEWS<br />

The Anatomy <strong>of</strong> Power: European Constructions <strong>of</strong> the <strong>Africa</strong>n Body Ð A. Butchart; reviewed by M.<br />

Terre Blanche<br />

Community Psychology Theory, Method and Practice. <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n and Other Perspectives Ð M.<br />

Seedat (Editor) and N. Duncan and S. Lazarus (Consulting Editors); reviewed by A. Naidoo<br />

SHORT COMMUNICATIONS<br />

Injury Prevention Initiative for <strong>Africa</strong>: Achievements and Challenges Ð R. Lett and O. Kobusingye<br />

Considerations and Limitations to the Development <strong>of</strong> a Global Injury Costing Model: Conference<br />

Report Ð S. Bender and B. Bowman<br />

Injury Control and Traffic Safety Training Course Report Back Ð S. Atkins and A. Sukhai<br />

Montreal Declaration: People's Right to Safety Ð 6th World Conference on Injury Prevention and<br />

Control<br />

VOL. 1 NO 2 2003<br />

EDITORIAL<br />

Building and Consolidating the Injury Prevention Sector in <strong>Africa</strong> Ð G. Stevens<br />

ORIGINAL CONTRIBUTIONS<br />

Social Disorganisation, Social Capital and Violence Prevention in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> Ð T. Emmett<br />

The Magnitude <strong>of</strong> Firearm Homicide in Cape Town, 2001 Ð M. Prinsloo, R. Matzopoulos and A.<br />

Sukhai<br />

Occupational Injuries Among Physiotherapists: A Case Study in Zimbabwe Ð U. Useh, E.U. Igumbor<br />

and D.M. Madzivire<br />

SHORT RESEARCH REPORTS<br />

WHO-Supported Injury Surveillance Activities in <strong>Africa</strong>: Mozambique and Ethiopia Ð K. Bartolomeos<br />

and M. Peden<br />

Violence and Alcohol: A Study <strong>of</strong> Injury Presentations to Emergency Departments in Eldoret, Kenya<br />

Ð W. Odero and D. Ayuku<br />

110


Ingestion and Aspiration <strong>of</strong> Foreign Bodies in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Children Ð A.B. Van As, X. Chen, A.J.<br />

Millar and H. Rode<br />

BOOK REVIEWS<br />

Peace, Conflict and Violence: Peace Psychology for the 21st Century, D.J. Christie, R.V. Wagner and<br />

D. DuNann Winter (Editors). Reviewed by S. Suffla<br />

Security and Politics in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>: The regional dimension, P Vale. Reviewed by T. Swart<br />

SHORT COMMUNICATIONS<br />

Injury Prevention Initiative for <strong>Africa</strong>: 2003 Update Ð R. Lett and W. Odero<br />

World Health Day 2004 to Highlight Road Safety Ð Department <strong>of</strong> Injuries and Violence Prevention,<br />

World Health Organisation, Geneva<br />

An Interrogation <strong>of</strong> Urban Safe Community Model Integration: A Conference Report from Calgary,<br />

Canada, 2-4 April 2003 Ð B. Bowman<br />

Indo-<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> Dialogue on Truth, Reconciliation and Human Rights: A Conference Report from<br />

Delhi, India, 4-7 April 2003 Ð M. Seedat<br />

VOL. 2 NO 1 2004<br />

ORIGINAL CONTRIBUTIONS<br />

Community Volunteerism in Safety Promotion and Implications for Sustained Participation<br />

L. Swart, M. Seedat and F. Sader<br />

The Epidemiology <strong>of</strong> Childhood Burn Injuries in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>: A Review <strong>of</strong> the Evidence<br />

A. Van Niekerk<br />

ROUNDTABLE DISCUSSION<br />

WHO Communique on Violence and Health<br />

Department <strong>of</strong> Injuries and Violence Prevention, World Health Organisation<br />

Engaging Utopia through Evidence<br />

M. Seedat<br />

Violence involving Children and Youth<br />

C. Higson-Smith<br />

Intimate Partners and Sexual Violence: Implications for the Prevention <strong>of</strong> Violence against Women in<br />

<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong><br />

S. Suffla<br />

111


Collective Violence<br />

M. SchoÈnteich<br />

A Response to the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Responses<br />

S. Van Tuyll van Serooskerken and E. Krug<br />

SHORT RESEARCH REPORTS<br />

Critical Lessons from a Schools-based Injury Surveillance Initiative<br />

T. Swart and G. Stevens<br />

Children as Unintended Victims: The Shielding Phenomenon<br />

S. Van As, G. Fieggen, M. Wiemann and J. Peter<br />

The Importance <strong>of</strong> Oral and Facial Injuries in Child Abuse<br />

S. Naidoo<br />

Igun iflop: Gun Free <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> Work with Youth in Schools<br />

M. Keegan<br />

SHORT COMMUNICATIONS<br />

Trauma Team Training Course: Evaluation <strong>of</strong> Ugandan Implementation<br />

R. Lett, O. Kobusingye, N. Asingwire and F. Ssengooba<br />

Design and Implementation <strong>of</strong> a Child Injury Prevention Resource Pack for Primary Schools<br />

N. Du Toit and B. Prince<br />

First Indian Ocean and the Third <strong>Africa</strong>n Safe Communities Conference, 8-10 October 2003,<br />

Mauritius<br />

R. Ahmed and W.M. Senyonjo<br />

Call for Expression <strong>of</strong> Interest Ð 2006 8th World Conference Injury Prevention and Safety Promotion<br />

EDITORIAL<br />

Making <strong>Africa</strong> Safer for Children<br />

R. Matzopoulos and O. Kobusingye<br />

VOL 2, NO 2 2004<br />

ORIGINAL CONTRIBUTIONS<br />

Gunshot Wounds in Children: Epidemiology and Outcome<br />

J. Hutt, A.B. Van As, L.A. Wallis, A. Numanoglu, A.J.W. Millar and H. Rode<br />

112


Home Visitation: A <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Process Evaluation<br />

W. Odendaal, S. Atkins, A. Van Niekerk and M. Seedat<br />

SHORT RESEARCH REPORTS<br />

Domestic Energy Use, Time Activity Patterns and Risk <strong>of</strong> Burns Amongst Children Less Than Five<br />

Years <strong>of</strong> Age in Rural <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong><br />

B. Barnes and K. Moiloa<br />

Partnership and Dialogue for Implementation <strong>of</strong> New Road Safety Rules in Kenya<br />

M. Khayesi<br />

LITERATURE REVIEW<br />

Review <strong>of</strong> Childhood Burn Injuries in Sub-Saharan <strong>Africa</strong>: A Forgotten Public Health Challenge<br />

A.A. Hyder, K.S. Kashyap, S. Fishman and S.A. Wali<br />

BOOK REVIEWS<br />

World Report on Road Traffic Injury Prevention: Its Implications for Low-Income Countries<br />

Y. Holder<br />

A <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Perspective on the World Report on Road Traffic Injury Prevention from a<br />

Multidisciplinary Team Context<br />

E. de Beer, K. Groenewald, S. Nkosi, E. van Niekerk and L. Vermaak<br />

SHORT COMMUNICATIONS<br />

The 7th World Conference on Injury Prevention and Safety Promotion: A report from Vienna<br />

B. Bowman<br />

The 13th International Conference on Safe Communities: Prague, Czech Republic<br />

M. Prinsloo and S. Bulbulia<br />

Vulnerability, Resilience and Coping <strong>of</strong> Communities and Health Systems in Responding to Infectious<br />

Diseases in the Context <strong>of</strong> War/Conflict: Kandy, Sri Lanka<br />

S. Bulbulia and F. Alvarez-Castillo<br />

<strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>'s Department <strong>of</strong> Communication Science's Annual Postgraduate Winter<br />

School: Pretoria, <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong><br />

L. Baadjies, S. De Freitas and S. MacKenzie<br />

17th International Conference on Alcohol, Drugs And Traffic Safety: Glasgow, United Kingdom<br />

A. Sukhai<br />

Security 2004: ISSUP Conference: Pretoria, <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong><br />

S. MacKenzie<br />

Injury Control and Traffic Safety Training Course: Johannesburg <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong><br />

L. Baadjies, S. De Freitas and S. MacKenzie<br />

113


<strong>Africa</strong>n Safety Promotion<br />

A Journal <strong>of</strong> Injury and Violence Prevention<br />

ORDER FORM<br />

Subscription fee: ZAR 250 per individual subscription<br />

ZAR 500 per group or organisational subscription<br />

US$ 150 per international subscription<br />

Please fill in details <strong>of</strong> person/organisation responsible for payment in block letters:<br />

.....................................................................................................................................................................<br />

Tel number: ..............................................................................................................................................<br />

Fax number: .............................................................................................................................................<br />

Postal address: ........................................................................................................................................<br />

.....................................................................................................................................................................<br />

E-Mail address: ........................................................................................................................................<br />

PARTICULARS OF PAYMENT<br />

Payments must be made in favour <strong>of</strong>: UNISA ISHS/CPA<br />

Bank account:: ABSA. Sunnyside, Pretoria, <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>,<br />

Branch code: 33 4545 Account number: 0100 00114<br />

Cash ................................. Cheque ..................................<br />

Bank draft ........................ Transfer ..................................<br />

Please fax or post your order form and pro<strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong> payment to Ms. Lyndsey Lourie.<br />

%<br />

CONTACT DETAILS<br />

Ms Lyndsey Lourie, P.O. Box 1087, Lenasia 1820, <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>.<br />

Tel: + 27 +11 857-1142 Fax: +27 +11 857-1770 E-Mail: lourilc@unisa.ac.za<br />

Web pages: http://www.ishs.org.za<br />

http://www.mrc.ac.za/crime.crime.htm<br />

114

Hooray! Your file is uploaded and ready to be published.

Saved successfully!

Ooh no, something went wrong!